FORM 10-K

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

 

WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549

 

x ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 FOR THE FISCAL YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2013, OR

 

¨ TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 FOR THE TRANSITION PERIOD FROM ______ to _________________

 

Commission file number: 1-14120

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.

(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

 

Delaware   52-1611421
(State or other jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)   (I.R.S. Employer Identification No.)

 

One Jake Brown Road, Old Bridge, New Jersey   08857
(Address of principal executive offices)   (Zip Code)

 

Registrant’s telephone number, including area code: (732) 679-4000

 

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

 

Title of each class   Name of Exchange on which registered
Common Stock, Par Value $.001   NYSE MKT

 

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None

 

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.
Yes      ¨   No x

 

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Act.
Yes    ¨     No    x   

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days. Yes    x    No    ¨   

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files). Yes   x     No ¨

 

Indicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of registrant’s knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this Form 10-K. x

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer or a smaller reporting company. See definition of “accelerated filer,” “large accelerated filer” and “smaller reporting company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one)

 

Large accelerated filer   ¨ Accelerated filer      ¨    
Non-accelerated filer    ¨ Smaller reporting company     x    
(do not check if a smaller reporting company)  

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act).
Yes    ¨    No    x   

 

The aggregate market value of voting stock held by non-affiliates of the registrant as of June 30, 2013: $4,257,298

 

Number of shares of common stock, par value $.001, outstanding as of March 20, 2014: 6,216,372

 

Documents incorporated by reference:

 

Certain portions of the registrant’s definitive Proxy Statement for the Annual Meeting of Stockholders expected to be held on May 21, 2014 (which is expected to be filed with the Commission not later than 120 days after the end of the registrant’s last fiscal year) are incorporated by reference into Part III of this report.

 

 
 

 

Forward-Looking Statements

 

In addition to historical information, this Annual Report of Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc., a Delaware Corporation (“ Blonder Tongue ” or the “ Company ”), contains forward-looking statements regarding future events relating to such matters as anticipated financial performance, business prospects, technological developments, new products, research and development activities and similar matters. The Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995, the Securities Act of 1933 and the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 provide safe harbors for forward-looking statements. In order to comply with the terms of these safe harbors, the Company notes that a variety of factors could cause the Company’s actual results and experience to differ materially and adversely from the anticipated results or other expectations expressed in the Company’s forward-looking statements. The risks and uncertainties that may affect the operation, performance, development and results of the Company’s business include, but are not limited to, those matters discussed herein in the sections entitled Item 1 - Business, Item 1A - Risk Factors, Item 3 - Legal Proceedings and Item 7 - Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations. The words “believe,” “expect,” “anticipate,” “project,” “target,” “intend,” “plan,” “seek,” “estimate,” “endeavor,” “should,” “could,” “may” and similar expressions are intended to identify forward-looking statements. In addition, any statements that refer to projections for our future financial performance, our anticipated growth trends in our business and other characterizations of future events or circumstances are forward-looking statements. Readers are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements, which reflect management’s analysis only as of the date hereof. The Company undertakes no obligation to publicly revise these forward-looking statements to reflect events or circumstances that arise after the date hereof. Readers should carefully review the risk factors described herein and in other documents the Company files from time to time with the Securities and Exchange Commission.

 

PART I

 

ITEM 1.                  BUSINESS

 

Introduction

 

Overview

 

Blonder Tongue is a technology-development and manufacturing company that delivers television signal encoding, transcoding, digital transport and broadband product solutions for a broad range of applications. The markets we serve include cable television systems, multi-dwelling units, the lodging/hospitality market and institutional systems, including hospitals, prisons and schools. From the cable television pioneers that founded the Company in 1950, to the highly experienced research and development team that creates new products today, the Company’s success stems from listening to the needs of its customers, providing quality products to meet those needs and supporting those products after delivery. For over 60 years Blonder Tongue has been providing innovative solutions based on continually advancing technology, enabling the Company to maintain its position as a leader in many of the markets it serves. Since its founding Blonder Tongue has continued to keep abreast of evolving technologies, from analog to digital television, into High Definition (“ HD” ) digital encoding, Internet Protocol Television (“ IPTV” ) processing and distribution, as well as EdgeQAM (Quadrature Amplitude Modulation) products. By broadening these product groups, the Company is positioned to grow its existing business and continue to expand the applications and markets it serves.

 

The cable television market has reacted quickly to consumer demands for additional services by integrating multiple technologies into existing networks, providing consumers with high speed internet access in addition to enhanced video offerings. Today, video offerings have expanded from traditional cable television service to internet protocol (“ IP” ) based video delivery, switched digital video, video on demand, scheduled playback and video storage. Telephone companies have increased their market share in this competitive environment with fiber-to-the-home distribution networks, enabling them to provide traditional cable television, expanded video services and high-speed internet services, in addition to telephony offerings. Lodging and institutional markets, as well as the multiple dwelling unit (“ MDU ”) market, continue to upgrade their networks to carry HD channels in order to meet consumers’ expectations. This is a significant area of opportunity for the Company to market and sell its expanded digital product line.

 

2
 

 

The market segments that the Company serves have been focused on digital technologies, not only in broadcast, but throughout video and broadband transport. The Company has identified three significant opportunities in the digital space: encoding, IPTV and EdgeQAM. Encoding enables operators to provide standard definition (SD) or HD content delivery transported over a broadband network. IPTV enables operators to stream video over private data networks with greater reliability and content security. While already experiencing full scale commercialization in international markets, the United States market continues to increasingly embrace IPTV technology. The worldwide market now has over 100 million IPTV subscribers, and is projected to have 175 million by 2018. Service providers transport both SD and HD video content in MPEG formats over IP networks to network edge devices located in high density serving areas. The device at the edge of the transport system (i.e. close to the customer location), is commonly referred to as EdgeQAM, because it allows the conversion from IP to radio frequency (RF) via QAM modulation. These signals are then transported to the customer across a hybrid fiber-coax (HFC) network. Management of the Company estimates the market for EdgeQAM devices to be about $400 million over the next three years. In 2007 the Company began marketing and selling IPTV products, in 2008 shipped its first high quality HD encoder, in 2009 began shipping its high quality affordably priced EdgeQAM product, in 2012 began shipping its H.264 HD encoder, and in 2013 began shipping its eight channel MPEG-2 HD encoder. The Company continues to develop new versions of these products to expand their use in additional markets and alternative applications.

 

Recent Developments

 

The Company has continued to advance the implementation of its strategic plan in an effort to maximize shareholder value. The Company’s strategic plan consists of the following:

 

strengthen core business,
continue the heritage of technology development,
expand into new markets, including penetration into the multi-system operator and broadcast television markets, and
increase gross margins.

 

The Company has entered into and renewed several agreements through which it has acquired rights to use and incorporate certain proprietary technologies in its digital encoder line of products, including:

 

1. Implementation and System License Agreement with Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation (“ Dolby Labs ”) for Dolby Digital Plus Professional Encoder, 5.1 and 2 channel licensed technology.

 

2. License Agreement with Digital Transmission Licensing Administrator, LLC (“ DTLA ”) to become a full-adopter of Digital Transmission Content Protection (“ DTCP ”) license technology.

 

3. License Agreement with LG Electronics as a Pro:Idiom content Protection System Manufacturer.

 

4. Ownership from the Motion Picture Experts Group of an MPEG-2 4:2:2 Profile High Level Video Encoder IP core.

 

The Dolby Labs License Agreement grants the Company the right to manufacture, label and sell professional digital encoder products and consumer digital decoder products and to use the Dolby trademarks. This technology has a number of improvements aimed at increasing quality at a given bit rate compared with legacy Dolby Digital (AC-3). Most notably, it offers increased bit rates, support for more audio channels, improved coding techniques to reduce compression artifacts, and backward compatibility with existing AC-3 hardware.

 

The DTLA and LG Electronics license agreements provide the Company with certain technology necessary for production of EdgeQAM devices for the hospitality industry. With the DTLA agreement the Company became a full-adopter of DTCP license technology which is used to encrypt the interconnections between devices such as satellite receivers, personal computers and portable media players. Consequently, content can be transferred through and among these devices, only if incorporating this technology.

 

3
 

 

The Pro:Idiom digital technology platform provides the hospitality market with a robust, secure Digital Rights Management (“ DRM ”) system ensuring rapid, broad deployment of HD television (“ HDTV ”) and other high-value digital content to licensed users in the lodging industry. Lodging industry leaders such as World Cinema Inc., LodgeNet Entertainment Corporation and others have licensed the Pro:Idiom DRM system. A growing number of content providers have demonstrated their acceptance of Pro:Idiom by licensing their HD content for delivery to Pro:Idiom users. The Company’s revenues derived from the sale of products incorporating these technologies were $1,119,000 in 2013 and $1,911,000 in 2012.

 

The MPEG-2 Encoder IP core has a unique compression engine capable of creating HD MPEG-2 real-time encoding of a single channel of 1080i/720p/480i video. The use of this real-time encoding technique enables the Company to provide broadcast MPEG-2 HD and SD encoding. MPEG-2 is widely used as the format of digital television signals that are broadcast by terrestrial (over-the-air), cable, and direct broadcast satellite TV systems. The Company’s revenues for digital encoders were $8,160,000 in 2013 and $8,032,000 in 2012.

 

The H.264/AVC is a video compression standard that enables a compelling solution for growing IP video services. The H.264 HD Encoder core has the capability to cut the bandwidth requirement for digital video delivery in half when compared against MPEG-2 encoders. This essentially facilitates the transmission of twice the number of programs in a given bandwidth. The use of this H.264 encoding technique enables the Company to provide high quality video at higher resolutions like 720p & 1080i. H.264 is a widely used format for transmitting high quality digital television signals over IP networks. The Company started shipping the H.264 encoder in 2012.

 

In April 2010, the Company obtained a $4.1 million purchase commitment for the first member of its EdgeQAM family of products (the EQAM-400) from World Cinema Inc. (“ World Cinema” ), a supplier of free-to-guest digital and HD television to the hospitality market. These shipments were made in the second and third quarters of 2010, during which time the EQAM-400 was exclusive to World Cinema. Since then, the parties had extended the exclusivity arrangement on a number of occasions, with the most recent extension expiring at the end of 2013. In connection with the most recent extension, World Cinema committed to purchase approximately $1.5 million of EQAM-400 from the fourth quarter of 2012 through the fourth quarter of 2013. World Cinema’s purchases of this product were approximately $1,119,000 and $1,911,000 in 2013 and 2012, respectively. World Cinema did not extend this exclusivity arrangement into 2014 with further purchase commitments. Nevertheless, the Company anticipates that World Cinema will continue to purchase the EQAM-400 from Blonder as needed in the normal course of its business, but will not commit to any minimum dollar amount. The EQAM-400 accepts HD content received by satellite via its IP Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) input, adds content protection by utilizing Pro:Idiom™ encryption, and QAM modulates it for distribution over standard coax networks.

 

On February 1, 2012, the Company’s wholly-owned subsidiary, R. L. Drake Holdings, LLC (“ RLD ”), a Delaware limited liability company, acquired substantially all of the assets and assumed certain specified liabilities of R. L. Drake, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company (“ Selle r”) (the “ RLD Acquisition ”), pursuant to an Asset Purchase Agreement of even date, by and among RLD, Seller, R. L. Drake Acquisition Corporation, a Delaware corporation, and WBMK Holding Company, an Ohio corporation, as amended by a certain First Amendment to Asset Purchase Agreement dated February 3, 2012 (as so amended, the “ Asset Purchase Agreement ”). The purchase price was approximately $7,020,000, which included a working capital adjustment of approximately $545,000, plus contingent purchase price payments of up to $1,500,000 in the aggregate that may be made over the three-year period after closing if certain financial results are realized. The assets acquired from Seller include assets used in the manufacturing and delivery of electronic communications solutions for cable television systems, digital television reception, video signal distribution and digital video encoding, including equipment, supplies and other tangible personal property, inventory, accounts receivable, business records, trademarks and other intellectual property rights.

 

RLD manufactures and distributes similar products to those currently being produced by the Company. The acquisition allowed the Company to leverage the combined research and development and sales and marketing departments to shorten the development and manufacturing cycle and deliver a more complete compliment of business and product solutions for the markets the Company serves.

 

4
 

 

The Company’s manufacturing is allocated primarily between its facility in Old Bridge, New Jersey (the “ Old Bridge Facility ”) and a key contract manufacturer located in the People’s Republic of China (“ PRC ”). The Company currently manufactures most of its digital products, including the latest encoder and EdgeQAM collections at its Old Bridge Facility. Since 2007 the Company has transitioned and continues to manufacture certain high volume, labor intensive products, including many of the Company’s analog products, in the PRC, pursuant to a manufacturing agreement that governs the production of products that may from time to time be the subject of purchase orders submitted by (and in the discretion of) the Company. The Company may transition additional products to the PRC if determined by the Company to be advantageous based upon changing business and market conditions. Manufacturing products both at the Company’s Old Bridge Facility as well as in the PRC, enables the Company to realize cost reductions while maintaining a competitive position and time-to-market advantage. As a result of the RLD Acquisition, the Company assumed certain post-closing obligations for a leased manufacturing, engineering, sales and administrative facility in Franklin, Ohio at which the RLD products were being manufactured. The lease for this facility expired in November, 2012. In anticipation of such expiration, in August 2012 the Company secured an alternative smaller space in Miamisburg, Ohio, that it believes is more suitable to its continuing business activities. The Company fully transitioned the manufacture of RLD products from the Franklin, Ohio facility to the Old Bridge Facility during July 2012.

 

The Company may, from time to time, provide manufacturing, research and development and product support services for other companies’ products. In 2011, the Company entered into an agreement with XRS Corporation (formerly known as XATA Corporation) to provide manufacturing, research and development and product support to XRS for an electronic on-board recorder for the trucking industry that the Company had been producing for XRS. The Company has contract manufactured products under this agreement since 2011. XRS’ purchases of this product were approximately $3,227,000 and $1,989,000 in 2013 and 2012, respectively. During the second quarter of 2013, the Company was advised by XRS that it had undertaken a redesign of its core product through a third party. Later in 2013, XRS provided the Company with engineering details of the redesigned product and invited the Company to participate in a bidding process to provide contract manufacturing of the newly designed product. During February 2014, the Company was advised by XRS that it was not chosen to perform this manufacturing function and as such, the Company does not anticipate additional sales to XRS unless and until the Company is invited to bid for contract manufacturing of the new design and is a successful bidder. XRS has advised the Company that it may again be asked to bid to provide contract manufacturing services in connection with this newly designed product in the later part of 2014; however, there can be no assurance that the Company will be asked to bid or that if it does bid, such bid will be successful. The Company does, however, continue to provide repair services to XRS in connection with the prior design and expects that work to continue throughout 2014. While the sales attributable to such repair services are not material, they do allow the Company to maintain a continuing connection and dialog with this customer in anticipation of future contract manufacturing opportunities.

 

The Company was incorporated under the laws of the State of Delaware in November 1988 and completed its initial public offering in December 1995.

 

Strategy

 

It is a constant challenge for the Company to stay at the forefront of the technological requirements of the markets that it serves, including the cable television system, MDU, lodging/hospitality and institutional markets. Changes and developments in the manner in which information (whether video, telephony or internet) is transmitted as well as the use of alternative compression technologies, all require the Company to continue to develop innovative new products. The Company allocates its resources as needed to create innovative products that are responsive to the demand for digital signal generation and transmission. The Company’s key product lines are more thoroughly discussed under “Key Products” beginning on page 8. The ongoing evolution of the Company’s product lines focuses on the increased needs created in the digital space by digital video, IPTV and HDTV signals and the transport of these signals over state of the art broadband networks.

 

The primary end users of the Company’s product are:

 

TV broadcasters,

 

Cable system operators that design, package, install and in most instances operate, upgrade and maintain the systems they build,

 

Lodging/Hospitality video and high speed internet system operators that specialize in the Lodging/Hospitality Markets, and

 

5
 

 

Institutional system operators that operate, upgrade and maintain the systems that are in their facilities, or contractors that install, upgrade and maintain these systems in a variety of applications including schools, universities, hospitals, prisons, corporations, sports stadiums and airports.

 

A key component of the Company’s growth strategy is to leverage its reputation across a broad product line, offering one-stop-shop convenience to the cable, broadcast and professional markets and delivering products having a high performance-to-cost ratio. The Company has historically enjoyed, and continues to enjoy, a leading position in many of the markets that it serves. The Company provides integrated network solutions for operators in the multi-dwelling unit market, the lodging/hospitality market and the institutional market.

 

In response to market pressures to compete with Far East manufactured products, the Company manufactures certain high volume, labor intensive products in the PRC.

 

Markets Overview

 

The television industry has been dominated by the traditional cable operator, who subsequently expanded into high-speed internet and telephony services. The penetration of wireless and direct-broadcast satellite (“ DBS ”) (such as DIRECTV® and DISH Network®) in the TV market, continues to grow with a combined subscriber count in excess of 34 million. Telephone companies (i.e. Verizon and AT&T) also compete with cable operators for services on a national level, delivering video, high-speed internet and telephony services direct to the home or to the curb. Cable operators are deploying MPEG IP transport to the edge of their networks via fiber optic networks and converting those IP streams to RF channels so they can continue to provide conventional video services over existing two-way coax networks. Their plans are to expand the reach of fiber optic networks to take fiber closer to the customer and to the user.

 

The long term result of these activities is increased competition for the provision of services and a trend toward delivery of these services through fiber using IP technology. This continuing major market transition has resulted in increased consumer expectations, placing the lodging and institutional markets under pressure to install new infrastructure and upgrade existing networks. It is not known how long this transition will take, but to remain competitive the Company must continue to increase its product offerings for digital television, encoding and decoding and digital media applications.

 

With IPTV technology comes additional market pressures and opportunities. First, there is the matter of alternative TV services riding “Over the Top” of existing infrastructures or (OTT television), where the delivered video is not part of the service provider’s own video service. Examples include Web-video services like Netflix, Hulu, and Apple TV. An additional advent is “TV Everywhere” where video is displayed not only on the traditional television, but also on personal computers and mobile devices. Cable operators are trying to tackle not only the technology issues associated with these offerings, but content management and customer authentication. The idea that the consumer is at the center, and not the hardware or the network, is revolutionizing how video (and media) content is delivered.

 

Cable Television

 

Most cable operators, both large and small, have built networks with various combinations of fiber optic and coax cable to deliver television, internet and phone services on one drop cable. Cable television deployment of fiber optic trunk has been completed in nearly all existing systems. The HFC network architecture is employed to provide analog video, digital video, HDTV, high speed internet, Video on Demand (“ VOD ”) and digital telephone service. With the adoption of new standards by CableLabs®, the cable industry is using edge devices, node splitting and digital video switching to increase both services and subscriber capacity from each node.

 

The Company believes that most major metropolitan areas will eventually have complex networks of two or more independent operators interconnecting homes and multi-dwelling complexes. All of these networks are potential users of our Digital Video Headend Products including, Encoders, EdgeQAM and Digital Video solutions.

 

6
 

 

Lodging

 

Historically, cable operators serving the lodging market sought to provide more channels (especially in HD), VOD and enhanced interactivity in response to property owners seeking additional revenue streams and guests demanding increased in-room technology services. Initially installed in mostly large hotels, smaller hotels and motels continue to be outfitted with enhanced technology to provide a full suite of HD channels and VOD.

 

More recently, the competition among cable providers to the hospitality industry has shifted from emphasis on VOD to demand for an ever increasing number of HD programs provided free to each guest room. The Company believes that the demand for HD based headends that support free-to-guest service and, accordingly, our EdgeQAM Pro:Idiom products, will grow for several years. The rate of growth may be limited by the cost associated with replacing all televisions in a hotel with flat screen Pro:Idiom compatible televisions, although such costs have been decreasing substantially over the past several years.

 

Institutional

 

The Company defines the institutional market to include educational campus environments, correctional facilities, short or long term health service environments, sports stadiums and airport terminals. What all of these seemingly unrelated facilities have in common is that they all contain private networks that are dependent on either locally generated or externally sourced video and/or data content. As the advanced technologies of distance learning, HDTV and IPTV permeate the market, institutional facilities are embracing these technologies to achieve site specific goals. The Company traditionally benefited from a very strong share of this market with its Analog Video Headend and Distribution Products. We anticipate that we will continue to be a leader in this market with our Digital Video Headend Products, which include HD encoders, EdgeQAM, Digital Video solutions and our evolving IPTV platforms.

 

International

 

The Company has authorized distributors and sales agents in various locations outside the United States, but the Company primarily manufactures products for sale in the USA. Historically, international sales have not materially contributed to the Company’s revenue base. The Company’s international sales in Canada have increased since 2011 as a result of the RLD Acquisition. RLD maintains a physical presence in Canada, including a stock of inventory, two sales personnel and one sales support person.

 

Additional Considerations

 

The technological revolution with respect to video, internet and telephone services continues at a rapid pace. Cable TV’s QAM video is competing with DIRECTV® and EchoStar’s DBS service and cable modems compete with digital subscriber lines and fiber-to-the-home offered by regional telephone companies. Telephone companies are building national fiber networks and are now delivering video, internet and telephone services directly to the home over fiber optic cable, and digital telephone is being offered by cable companies and others in competition with traditional phone companies. The convergence of data and video communications continues, wherein computer and television systems merge. This merging of technologies is extending services to mobile smart phone devices and tablet computers with over the air data delivery competing with cable delivered services.

 

Larger multiple system operators (“ MSO s”) have transitioned or are in the process of transitioning to an all-digital platform; however much of the installed base of United States television sets are still analog sets (not digital). Satellite DBS television, digitally compressed programming and IP delivery require headend products or set-top decoding receivers or Digital Terminal Adapters (“ DTAs ”) to convert the transmitted signals back to analog so that they may be viewed on analog television sets. The replacement of substantially all analog television sets with digital sets remains costly (although such costs have decreased substantially over the past several years) and will still take years to complete. The split of analog and digital offerings provided to customers varies as a function of the size of the operator and their deployment strategy. For example, the majority of private cable and other smaller service providers continue to deliver an analog television signal on standard channels to subscribers’ television sets using headend products at some distribution point in their networks or employ set top boxes or DTAs at each television set.

 

7
 

 

Key Products

 

Blonder Tongue’s products can be separated according to function and technology. Three key categories account for the majority of the Company’s revenue (Digital Video Headend, Analog Video Headend, and HFC Distribution):

 

•               Digital Video Headend Products are used by a system operator for acquisition, processing and manipulation of digital video signals. The headend is the system signal processing center of a digital television signal distribution system. It is the central location where multiple channels are initially received, and through additional processing, allocated to specific channels for digital distribution. Blonder Tongue continues to expand its Digital Product offerings to meet the changing needs of its customers. The latest additions include the EdgeQAM collection and the HD encoder collection which includes a line of HD and SD MPEG-2 and H.264 encoders and multiplexers. This trend is expected to be continued in 2014 with the addition of EdgeIP solutions. Among the other digital products provided by Blonder Tongue are: Quadrature Phase Shift Key (“ QPSK ”) to QAM transcoders; digital QAM up-converters and multiplexers; digital 8VSB/QAM HD television processors for delivery of HDTV programming and agile QAM Modulators.

 

Encoders accept and auto-detect various input sources (analog and/or digital) and output digitally encoded HD or SD video in various output formats such as Asynchronous Serial Interface (“ ASI ”), IP and QAM. ASI is a streaming data format which carries the MPEG-2 Transport Stream. The IP output format allows the operators to stream video over private data networks with greater reliability and content security. Whereas, the QAM outputs may be used for digital video distribution over typical private coax networks in a variety of institutional environments (i.e. sports arenas, broadcast and cable television studios, airports, hospitals, university campuses, etc.). As a complement to the encoder line, Blonder Tongue also provides digital QAM multiplexers which take multiple inputs (ASI or 8VSB/QAM) and deliver a single multiplexed QAM output thereby optimizing the HD channel lineup by preserving bandwidth.

 

EdgeQAM devices accept Ethernet input and capture MPEG over IP transport streams, decrypt service provider conditional access or content protection, and insert proprietary conditional access, such as Pro:Idiom, into the stream. These streams are then combined and modulated on to QAM RF carriers, in most cases providing multiple streams on to one 6MHz digital channel. Inputs to EdgeQAM devices can come from satellite receivers, set top boxes, network devices or video servers. The use of these devices adds flexibility for the service provider, in part, because all of this routing happens in one device. Scaling is accomplished via software and modules embedded inside the hardware. Since it is a true network device, the EdgeQAM can be managed over a traditional Ethernet network or over the Internet.

 

The QPSK to QAM transcoders (QTM Series) are used for economically deploying or adding a satellite-based digital programming tier of digital or HDTV digital programming. The unit transcodes a satellite signal’s modulation from QPSK to QAM or from 8PSK (HDTV Format) to QAM. Since QPSK and 8PSK are optimum for satellite transmission and QAM is optimum for fiber/coax distribution, precious system bandwidth is saved while the signal retains its digital information. Building upon the innovative design work that brought about the QTM transcoders, QAM up-converters and HDTV processors, the Company launched a series of ATSC/QAM demodulators. Digital Video Headend Product use continues to expand in all of the Company’s primary markets, bringing more advanced technology to consumers and operators. It is expected that this area will continue to be a major component of the Company’s business. The Company estimates that Digital Video Headend Products accounted for approximately 46% and 47% of the Company’s revenues in 2013 and 2012, respectively.

 

•               Analog Video Headend Products are used by a system operator for signal acquisition, processing and manipulation to create an analog channel lineup for further transmission. Among the products offered by the Company in this category are integrated receiver/decoders, modulators, demodulators, channel combiners and processors. Even though this market is mature, Blonder Tongue continues to develop products to maintain market share.  For example, several new analog products were launched in response to the “CALM” Act (the Commercial Advertisement Loudness Mitigation Act (CALM, H.R. 1084/S. 2847)), initially proposed in 2008 and signed into law in December 2010. The CALM Act requires the FCC to prescribe regulations limiting the volume of audio on commercials transmitted by television broadcast stations, cable operators and other multichannel video programming distributors. This law addresses a widespread consumer complaint regarding the abrupt loudness of television advertisements and mandates that the volume levels of commercial breaks be consistent with the volume level of the related programming. The Company estimates that Analog Video Headend Products accounted for approximately 21% and 22% of the Company’s revenues in 2013 and 2012, respectively.

 

8
 

 

•               HFC Distribution Products are used to transport signals from the headend to their ultimate destination in a home, apartment unit, hotel room, office or other terminal location along a fiber optic, coax or HFC distribution network. Among the products offered by the Company in this category are broadband amplifiers, directional taps, splitters and wall outlets for coax distribution and fiber optic transmitters, receivers (nodes), and couplers. In cable television systems, the HFC distribution products are either mounted on exterior utility poles or encased in pedestals, vaults or other security devices. In private cable systems the distribution system is typically enclosed within the walls of the building (if a single structure) or added to an existing structure using various techniques to hide the coax cable and devices. The non-passive devices within this category are designed to ensure that the signal distributed from the headend is of sufficient strength when it arrives at its final destination to provide high quality audio/video images. The Company estimates that HFC Distribution products accounted for approximately 16% and 17% of the Company’s revenues in 2013 and 2012, respectively.

 

              Other Products.

 

There are a variety of other products that the Company sells to a lesser degree, either to fill a customer need or where sales have reduced due to changes in Company direction, technology, or market influences. Sales of products in these categories have not contributed significantly to the Company’s revenues in 2013 and are expected to remain this way for 2014. These products include:

 

Digital Transition, providing system operators the means to adapt to the FCC mandated transition in broadcast television from analog to digital signals.

 

Addressable, controlling access to analog programming at the subscriber’s location.

 

Reception, receiving off-air broadcast television and satellite transmissions prior to headend processing.

 

High-Speed Internet, providing broadband internet access over a HFC network.

 

Technical Services, including hands-on training, system design engineering, on-site field support and complete system verification testing.

 

Miscellaneous, filling customers’ needs for satellite distribution, test equipment, and parts.

 

The Company will modify its products to meet specific customer requirements. Typically, these modifications are minor and do not materially alter product functionality. Thus, the inability of a customer to accept such products does not generally result in the Company being unable to sell such products to other customers.

 

Research and Product Development

 

The markets served by Blonder Tongue are characterized by technological change, new product introductions, and evolving industry standards. To compete effectively in this environment, the Company must engage in ongoing research and development in order to (i) create new products, (ii) expand features of existing products in order to accommodate customer demand for greater capability, (iii) license new technology, and (iv) acquire products incorporating technology that could not otherwise be developed quickly enough using internal resources. Research and development projects are often initially undertaken at the request of and in an effort to address the particular needs of the Company’s customers and customer prospects, with the expectation or promise of substantial future orders. Projects may also result from new technologies that become available, or new market applications of existing technology. In the new product development process, the vast experience of the Company’s Engineering Group is leveraged to ensure the highest level of suitability and widest acceptance in the marketplace. Products tend to be developed in a functional building block approach that allows for different combinations of blocks to generate new relevant products. Additional research and development efforts are also continuously underway for the purpose of enhancing product quality and engineering lower production costs. For the acquisition of new technologies, the Company may rely upon technology licenses from third parties. The Company will also license technology if it can obtain technology more quickly, or more cost-effectively from third parties than it could otherwise develop on its own, or if the desired technology is proprietary to a third party. There were 22 employees in the research and development department of the Company at December 31, 2013, including 8 employees located at the Company’s facility in Miamisburg, Ohio. The Company’s research and development expenses were $3,373,000 and $3,500,000 for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

 

9
 

 

Marketing and Sales

 

Blonder Tongue markets and sells its products for use in a wide range of markets including traditional cable television, MDU, lodging/hospitality, and institutional (schools, hospitals and prisons). The Company also sells into a multitude of niche markets such as sports arenas and the cruise ship industry. Sales are made directly to customers by the Company’s internal sales force, as well as through Premier Authorized Stocking Distributors (which accounted for approximately 47% and 45% of the Company’s revenues for fiscal 2013 and 2012, respectively). These distributors serve multiple markets. Direct sales to cable operators and system integrators accounted for approximately 7% and 5% of the Company’s revenues for fiscal 2013 and 2012, respectively.

 

The Company’s sales and marketing function is performed predominantly by its internal sales force. Should it be deemed necessary, the Company may retain independent sales representatives in particular geographic areas or targeted to specific customer prospects or target market opportunities. The Company’s internal sales force consists of 20 employees, which currently includes five salespersons in Old Bridge, NJ, one salesperson in Round Rock, TX, one salesperson in San Diego, CA, one salesperson in Berkley Lake, GA, two salespersons in Miamisburg, OH, two salespersons in Peterborough, Ontario, Canada, one sales support person in Peterborough, Ontario and seven sales-support personnel at the Company’s headquarters in Old Bridge, New Jersey.

 

The Company’s standard customer payment terms are 2%-10, net 30 days. From time to time, when circumstances warrant, such as a commitment to a large blanket purchase order, the Company will extend payment terms beyond its standard payment terms.

 

The Company has several marketing programs to support the sale and distribution of its products. Blonder Tongue participates in industry trade shows and conferences and also maintains a robust website. The Company publishes technical articles in trade and technical journals, distributes sales and product literature and has an active public relations plan to ensure complete coverage of Blonder Tongue’s products and technology by editors of trade journals. The Company provides system design engineering for its customers, maintains extensive ongoing communications with many original equipment manufacturer customers and provides one-on-one demonstrations and technical seminars to potential new customers. Blonder Tongue supplies sales and applications support, product literature and training to its sales representatives and distributors. The management of the Company travels extensively, identifying customer needs and meeting potential customers.

 

Customers

 

Blonder Tongue has a diverse customer base, which in 2013 consisted of approximately 235 active accounts. Approximately 57% and 56% of the Company’s revenues in fiscal years 2013 and 2012, respectively, were derived from sales of products to the Company’s five largest customers. Toner Cable Equipment, Inc. accounted for approximately 22% and 18% of the Company’s revenues in 2013 and 2012, respectively. In addition, XRS corporation accounted for approximately 12% of the Company’s revenues in 2013. In 2012, sales to World Cinema Inc. accounted for approximately 14% of the Company’s revenues. None of these customers are obligated to purchase any specified amount of products or to provide the Company with binding forecasts of product purchases for any future period. Accordingly, there can be no assurance that sales to these entities, individually or as a group, will reach or exceed historical levels in any future period, however, the Company anticipates that Toner Cable Equipment, Inc. will continue to account for a significant portion of the Company’s revenues in future periods.

 

10
 

 

During 2010, the Company renewed multi-year contracts with key distributors in its Premier Distributor Program. This program, which began in 2007, has been quite successful for the Company. Under this program, a limited group of larger distributors who stock a significant amount of the Company’s products in their inventory are given access to a special purchase incentive program allowing them to achieve volume price concessions measured on a year-to-year basis. Many of the Company’s smaller business customers, with whom the Company had formerly dealt on a direct basis, now purchase the Company’s products from these Premier Distributors.

 

In the Company’s direct sales to system integrators, the complement of leading customers tends to vary over time as the most efficient and better financed integrators grow more rapidly than others. Any substantial decrease or delay in sales to one or more of the Company’s leading customers, the financial failure of any of these entities, or the Company’s inability to develop and maintain solid relationships with the integrators that may replace the present leading customers, would have a material adverse effect on the Company’s results of operations and financial condition.

 

The Company’s revenues are derived primarily from customers in the continental United States; however, the Company also derives some revenues from customers in other geographical markets, primarily Canada and to a much more limited extent, in developing countries. Sales to customers outside of the United States represented approximately 2% and 5% of the Company’s revenues in 2013 and 2012, respectively. All of the Company’s transactions with customers located outside of the United States have historically been denominated in U.S. dollars, therefore, the Company has had no material foreign currency transactions. As a result of the RLD Acquisition, however, the Company derived certain sales from customers located in Canada during 2013 and 2012 denominated in Canadian Dollars. Transactions denominated in foreign currencies have certain inherent risks associated with them due to currency fluctuations. See “Risk Factors” below for more detail on the risks associated with foreign currency transactions.

 

Manufacturing and Suppliers

 

Blonder Tongue’s primary manufacturing operations are presently located at the Old Bridge Facility, which also serves as the Company’s headquarters. Upon consummation of the RLD Acquisition in February 2012, the Company maintained a smaller manufacturing facility in Franklin, OH until it was closed in November, 2012. As noted in “Item 2 – Properties” below , the Company thereafter opened and maintains a small sales and engineering facility in Miamisburg Ohio. The Company’s manufacturing operations are vertically integrated and consist principally of the programming, assembly, and testing of electronic assemblies built from fabricated parts, printed circuit boards and electronic devices and the fabrication from raw sheet metal of chassis and cabinets for such assemblies. Management continues to implement improvements to the manufacturing process to increase production volume and reduce product cost, including logistics modifications on the factory floor to accommodate increasingly fine pitch surface mount electronic components. The Company is capable of manufacturing assemblies of 16 layer PCBs with thousands of components including placement of 0.030x0.030mil ball grid arrays and 0402 packaged sized components, utilizing its advanced state-of-the-art automatic placement equipment as well as automated optical inspection and testing systems. Investments by the Company in these advanced manufacturing technologies is consistent with and part of the Company’s strategy to provide its customers with high performance-to-cost ratio products.

 

Since 2007, the Company has been manufacturing certain high volume, labor intensive products, including many of the Company’s analog products, in the PRC. A key contract manufacturer in the PRC produces such products (all of which are proprietary Blonder Tongue designs) as may be requested by the Company from time to time (in the Company’s discretion) through the submission of purchase orders, the terms of which are governed by a manufacturing agreement. The Company does not currently anticipate the transfer of any additional products to the PRC, however this could change if business and market conditions make it advantageous to do so. In connection with the Company’s initiatives in the PRC, the Company may have foreign currency transactions and may be subject to various currency exchange control programs related to its PRC operations. See “Risk Factors” below for more detail on the risk of foreign operations.

 

11
 

 

Outside contractors supply standard components, printed circuit boards and electronic subassemblies to the Company’s specifications. While the Company generally purchases electronic parts that do not have a unique source, certain electronic component parts used within the Company’s products are available from a limited number of suppliers and may be subject to temporary shortages because of general economic conditions and the demand and supply for such component parts. If the Company were to experience a temporary shortage of any given electronic part, the Company believes that alternative parts could be obtained or system design changes implemented. However, in such situations the Company may experience temporary reductions in its ability to ship products affected by the component shortage. On an as-needed basis, the Company purchases several products from sole suppliers for which alternative sources are not available, such as EchoStar digital receivers for delivery of DISH Network® programming, and DirecTV® digital satellite receivers for delivery of DIRECTV® programming. An inability to timely obtain sufficient quantities of certain of these components could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s operating results. The Company does not have an agreement with any sole source supplier requiring the supplier to sell a specified volume of components to the Company. See “Risk Factors” below for more detail on the risk associated with sole supplier products.

 

Blonder Tongue maintains a quality assurance program which monitors and controls manufacturing processes, and extensively tests samples throughout the process. Samples of component parts purchased are tested, as well as its finished products, on an ongoing basis. The Company also tests component and sub-assembly boards throughout the manufacturing process using commercially available and in-house built testing systems that incorporate proprietary procedures. The highest level of quality assurance is maintained throughout all aspects of the design and manufacturing process. The extensive in-house calibration program assures test equipment integrity and correlation. This program ensures that all test and measurement equipment that is used in the manufacturing process is calibrated to the same in-house reference standard on a consistent basis. When all test and measurement devices are calibrated in this manner, discrepancies are eliminated between the engineering, manufacturing and quality control departments, thus increasing operational efficiency and ensuring a high level of product quality. Blonder Tongue performs final product tests prior to shipment to customers. In 2008, the Company was certified to perform Underwriters Laboratories (UL) witness testing of products to UL International Standard 60950.

 

Competition

 

All aspects of the Company’s business are highly competitive. The Company competes with national, regional and local manufacturers and distributors, including companies larger than Blonder Tongue that have substantially greater resources. Various manufacturers who are suppliers to the Company sell directly as well as through distributors into the franchise and private cable marketplaces. The markets we serve include cable television systems, multi-dwelling units, the lodging/hospitality market and institutional systems, including hospitals, prisons and schools. Because of the convergence of the cable, telecommunications and computer industries and rapid technological developments, new competitors may seek to enter the principal markets served by the Company. Many of these potential competitors have significantly greater financial, technical, manufacturing, marketing, sales and other resources than Blonder Tongue. The Company expects that direct and indirect competition will increase in the future. Additional competition could result in price reductions, loss of market share and delays in the timing of customer orders. The principal methods of competition are product differentiation, performance, quality, price, terms, service, technical support and administrative support. The Company believes it is a leader in many of the markets that it serves and differentiates itself from competitors by consistently offering innovative products, providing excellent technical service support and delivering high performance-to-cost ratio products.

 

Intellectual Property

 

The Company currently holds several United States and foreign patents, none of which are considered material to the Company’s present operations, since they do not relate to high volume applications. Because of the rapidly evolving nature of the cable television industry, the Company believes that its market position as a supplier to cable integrators derives primarily from its ability to develop a continuous stream of new products that are designed to meet its customers’ needs and that have a high performance-to-cost ratio.

 

The Company owns a United States trademark registration for the word mark “Blonder Tongue®” and also on a “BT®” logo. RLD owns a United States trademark registration for the word mark “DRAKE®”.

 

Since 2008, the Company has obtained and renewed licenses for a variety of technologies in concert with its digital encoder line of products. The licenses are from a number of companies including Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation (expires August 2014), Digital Content Protection, LLC (expires April 30, 2014), DTLA (expires April 30, 2014), and LG Electronics (expires December 2014). These standard licenses are all non-exclusive and require payment of royalties based upon the unit sales of the licensed products. With regard to the licenses expiring in 2014, the Company expects to renew these standard licenses on similar terms to those presently in force. For additional information regarding these licenses, see “Introduction – Recent Developments” starting on page 3.

 

12
 

 

The Company relies on a combination of contractual rights and trade secret laws to protect its proprietary technologies and know-how. There can be no assurance that the Company will be able to protect its technologies and know-how or that third parties will not be able to develop similar technologies and know-how independently. Therefore, existing and potential competitors may be able to develop products that are competitive with the Company’s products and such competition could adversely affect the prices for the Company’s products or the Company’s market share. The Company also believes that factors such as the technological and creative skills of its personnel, new product developments, frequent product enhancements, name recognition and reliable product maintenance are essential to establishing and maintaining its competitive position. The industries in which the Company competes are subject to constant development of new technologies and evolution of existing technologies, many of which are the subject of existing third party patents and new patents are issued frequently.

 

Regulation

 

Private cable, while in some cases subject to certain FCC licensing requirements, is not presently burdened with extensive government regulations. The Telecommunications Act of 1996 deregulated many aspects of franchise cable system operation and opened the door to competition among cable operators and telephone companies in each of their respective industries.

 

Environmental Regulations

 

The Company is subject to a variety of Federal, state and local governmental regulations related to the storage, use, discharge and disposal of toxic, volatile or otherwise hazardous chemicals used in its manufacturing processes. The Company did not incur in 2013 and does not anticipate incurring in 2014 material capital expenditures for compliance with Federal, state and local environmental laws and regulations. There can be no assurance, however, that changes in environmental regulations will not result in the need for additional capital expenditures or otherwise impose additional financial burdens on the Company. Further, such regulations could restrict the Company’s ability to expand its operations. Any failure by the Company to obtain required permits for, control the use of, or adequately restrict the discharge of, hazardous substances under present or future regulations could subject the Company to substantial liability or could cause its manufacturing operations to be suspended.

 

The Company has authorization to discharge wastewater under the New Jersey Pollution Discharge Elimination System/Discharge to Surface Waters General Industrial Stormwater Permit, Permit No. NJ0088315. This permit will expire May 31, 2014. The Company intends to renew this permit.

 

Employees

 

As of March 15, 2014, the Company employed approximately 163 people, including 99 in manufacturing, 22 in research and development, 5 in quality assurance, 20 in sales and marketing, and 17 in a general and administrative capacity. Substantially all of these employees are full time employees. 45 of the Company’s employees are members of the International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers Union, Local 2066, which has a labor agreement with the Company that is scheduled to expire in February 2015.

 

ITEM 1A RISK FACTORS

 

The Company’s business operates in a rapidly changing environment that involves numerous risks, some of which are beyond the Company’s control. The following “Risk Factors” highlight some of these risks. Additional risks not currently known to the Company or that the Company now deems immaterial may also affect the Company and the value of its Common Stock. The risks described below, together with all of the other information included in this report, should be carefully considered in evaluating our business and prospects. The occurrence of any of the following risks could harm the Company’s business, financial condition or results of operations. Solely for purposes of the risk factors in this Item 1A, the terms “we,” “our” and “us” refer to Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. and its subsidiaries.

 

13
 

 

Any substantial decrease in sales to our largest customers may adversely affect our results of operations or financial condition.

 

In 2013 and 2012, sales to Toner Cable Equipment Inc. accounted for approximately 22% and 18% of our revenues, respectively. Sales to XRS Corporation accounted for approximately 12% of our revenues in 2013. In addition, sales to World Cinema accounted for approximately 14% of our revenues in 2012. There can be no assurance that any sales to these customers will reach or exceed historical levels in any future period. As disclosed above in “Business – Introduction - Recent Developments,” XRS Corporation has redesigned its product and we were not successful in our bid to win the initial contract for the manufacture of such product. We anticipate, however, that Toner Cable will continue to account for a significant portion of our revenues in future periods, although they are not obligated to purchase any specified amount of products (beyond outstanding purchase orders) or to provide us with binding forecasts of product purchases for any future period.

 

With respect to our direct sales to system integrators, the complement of leading customers tends to vary over time as the most efficient and better-financed integrators grow more rapidly than others. Our success with these customers will depend in part on:

 

the viability of those customers;

 

our ability to identify those customers with the greatest growth and growth prospects; and

 

our ability to maintain our position in the overall marketplace by shifting our emphasis to such customers.

 

Approximately 57% of our revenues in 2013 were derived from sales to our five largest customers. Any substantial decrease or delay in sales to one or more of our leading customers, the financial failure of any of these entities, their inability to pay their trade accounts owing to us, or our inability to develop solid relationships with integrators that may replace the present leading customers, could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.

 

An inability to reduce expenses or increase revenues may cause continued net losses.

 

We have had annual net losses each year since 2010, including a net loss of $2.82 million for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2013. In 2013, our net sales revenue of $27.9 million, less cost of goods sold of $18.6 million, did not cover our operating expenses of approximately $11.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2013. While management believes its plan to reduce expenses and increase revenues will improve profitability, there can be no assurance that these actions will be successful. Failure to reduce expenses or increase revenues could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.

 

Inventory reserves for excess or obsolete inventories may adversely affect our results of operations and financial condition.

 

We continually analyze our slow-moving, excess and obsolete inventories. Based on historical and projected sales volumes and anticipated selling prices, we establish reserves. If we do not meet our sales expectations, these reserves are increased. Products that are determined to be obsolete are written down to net realizable value. Although we believe reserves are adequate and inventories are reflected at net realizable value, there can be no assurance that we will not have to record additional inventory reserves in the future. Significant increases to inventory reserves could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.

 

An inability to develop, or acquire the rights to technology, products or applications in response to changes in industry standards or customer needs may reduce our sales and profitability.

 

Both the private cable and franchised cable industries are characterized by the continuing advancement of technology, evolving industry standards and changing customer needs. To be successful, we must anticipate the evolution of industry standards and changes in customer needs, through the timely development and introduction of new products, enhancement of existing products and licensing of new technology from third parties. This is particularly true at this time as the Company must develop and market new digital products to offset the continuing decline in demand for, and therefore sales of, analog products. Although we depend primarily on our own research and development efforts to develop new products and enhancements to our existing products, we have and may continue to seek licenses for new technology from third parties when we believe that we can obtain such technology more quickly and/or cost-effectively from such third parties than we could otherwise develop on our own, or when the desired technology has already been patented by a third party. There can, however, be no assurance that new technology or such licenses will be available on terms acceptable to us. There can be no assurance that:

 

14
 

 

we will be able to anticipate the evolution of industry standards in the cable television or the communications industry generally;

 

we will be able to anticipate changes in the market and customer needs;

 

technologies and applications under development by us will be successfully developed; or

 

successfully developed technologies and applications will achieve market acceptance.

 

If we are unable for technological or other reasons to develop and introduce products and applications or to obtain licenses for new technologies from third parties in a timely manner in response to changing market conditions or customer requirements, our results of operations and financial condition could be materially adversely affected.

 

Anticipated increases in direct and indirect competition with us may have an adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.

 

All aspects of our business are highly competitive. We compete with national, regional and local manufacturers and distributors, including companies larger than us, which have substantially greater resources. Various manufacturers who are suppliers to us sell directly as well as through distributors into the cable television marketplace. Because of the convergence of the cable, telecommunications and computer industries and rapid technological development, new competitors may seek to enter the principal markets served by us. Many of these potential competitors have significantly greater financial, technical, manufacturing, marketing, sales and other resources than we have. We expect that direct and indirect competition will increase in the future. Additional competition could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition through:

 

price reductions;

 

loss of market share;

 

delays in the timing of customer orders; and

 

an inability to increase our penetration into the cable television market.

 

Our sales and profitability may suffer due to any substantial decrease or delay in capital spending by the cable infrastructure operators that we serve in the MDU, lodging and institutional cable markets.

 

The vast majority of our revenues in fiscal years 2013 and 2012 came from sales of our products for use by cable infrastructure operators. Demand for our products depends to a large extent upon capital spending on private cable systems and specifically by private cable operators for constructing, rebuilding, maintaining or upgrading their systems. Capital spending by private cable operators and, therefore, our sales and profitability, are dependent on a variety of factors, including:

 

access by private cable operators to financing for capital expenditures;

 

demand for their cable services;

 

availability of alternative video delivery technologies; and
general economic conditions.

 

In addition, our sales and profitability may in the future be more dependent on capital spending by traditional franchise cable system operators as well as by new entrants to this market planning to over-build existing cable system infrastructures, or constructing, rebuilding, maintaining and upgrading their systems. There can be no assurance that system operators in private cable or franchise cable will continue capital spending for constructing, rebuilding, maintaining, or upgrading their systems. Any substantial decrease or delay in capital spending by private cable or franchise cable operators would have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.

 

15
 

 

We may be adversely affected by current economic and market conditions.

 

During 2013 and 2012, the U.S. economy continued to feel the effects of the significant economic downturn that began in 2008, resulting in elevated levels of financial market volatility, customer uncertainty and widespread concerns about the U.S. and world economies. The macroeconomic environment and recovery from this downturn has been challenging and inconsistent. The ongoing effects of these circumstances may continue to negatively impact the demand for our products, which may have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations. In addition, the economic crisis has had a material and direct impact on financial institutions, resulting in tighter credit standards, giving rise to a deterioration of liquidity in the capital markets, particularly as it relates to the credit needs of smaller companies that have faced challenges during this period. This liquidity crunch could adversely affect our ability and the ability of our customers to borrow funds to support operations or other liquidity needs (including the ability to finance capital expenditures) or otherwise borrow or raise capital. Moreover, our stock price could decrease if investors have concerns that our business, financial condition or results of operations will be negatively impacted by a worldwide economic downturn.

 

The terms of our credit agreement may restrict our current and future operating and financial flexibility and could adversely affect our financial and operational results.

 

As of December 31, 2013, we had approximately $5.3 million of outstanding debt under our Santander Financing, which is scheduled to expire on February 1, 2015. While we anticipate refinancing all or a portion of this debt obligation on or before February 1, 2015, there can be no assurances that financing will be available on acceptable terms or at all. Debt financing, if available, could impose additional cash payment obligations and additional covenants and operating restrictions. Our inability to refinance our debt obligation on acceptable terms (or at all) would likely have a material adverse on our results of operations and financial condition.

 

The Santander Agreement that is in effect with respect to this debt includes covenants that, among other things, may restrict our ability to:

 

engage in mergers, consolidations and asset dispositions;

 

redeem or repurchase stock;

 

create, incur, assume or guarantee additional indebtedness;

 

create, incur, assume or permit any liens on any asset;

 

make loans and investments;

 

issue additional shares of our capital stock;

 

change our organizational documents; and

 

change the nature of our business.

 

These restriction may limit our ability to engage in certain transactions that may be beneficial to us and our stockholders. In addition, the Santander Agreement also requires us to meet certain financial covenants on a quarterly basis. From time to time during the past two years, we have been unable to meet certain of such financial covenants and we may be unable to comply with certain of such covenants under our credit agreement in the future. Previously, the bank has permitted us to amend the Santander Agreement as it relates to such financial covenants when it appears that we may not be able to meet them, but no assurance can be given that the bank will permit further amendments or provide waivers of these requirements if we are unable to meet them in the future. Accordingly, a failure to comply with the financial covenants under the Santander Agreement could result in an event of default. In the event of a default our lender could elect to declare all borrowings, accrued and unpaid interest and other fees outstanding, due and payable, and require us to apply all of our available cash to repay these borrowings, which would likely have a material adverse on our results of operations and financial condition.

 

16
 

 

Any significant casualty to our facility in Old Bridge, New Jersey may cause a lengthy interruption to our business operations.

 

We primarily operate out of one manufacturing facility in Old Bridge, New Jersey (the “ Old Bridge Facility ”). While we maintain a limited amount of business interruption insurance, a casualty that results in a lengthy interruption of our ability to manufacture at, or otherwise use, that facility could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.

 

Our dependence on certain third party suppliers could create an inability for us to obtain component products not otherwise available or to do so only at increased prices.

 

We purchase several products from sole suppliers for which alternative sources are not available, such as certain components of EchoStar’s digital satellite receiver decoders, which are specifically designed to work with the DISH Network®, and certain components of Hughes Network Systems digital satellite receivers which are specifically designed to work with DIRECTV® programming. Our results of operations and financial condition could be materially adversely affected by:

 

an inability to obtain sufficient quantities of these components;

 

our receipt of a significant number of defective components;

 

an increase in component prices; or

 

our inability to obtain lower component prices in response to competitive pressures on the pricing of our products.

 

Our contract manufacturing in the PRC may subject us to the risks of unfavorable political, regulatory, legal and labor conditions in the PRC.

 

We manufacture and assemble some of our products in the PRC, under a contract manufacturing arrangement with a certain key Chinese manufacturer. Our future operations and earnings may be adversely affected by the risks related to, or any other problems arising from, having our products manufactured in the PRC, including the following risks:

 

political, economic and labor instability;

 

changes in foreign or United States government laws and regulations, including exchange control regulations;

 

increased costs related to fluctuation in foreign currency exchange rates;

 

infringement of our intellectual property rights; and

 

difficulties in managing foreign manufacturing operations.

 

Although the PRC has a large economy, its potential economic, political, legal and labor developments entail uncertainties and risks. In the event of any changes that adversely affect our ability to manufacture in the PRC after products have been successfully transitioned out of the United States, our business could suffer.

 

Shifting our operations between regions may entail considerable expense.

 

Over time we may shift additional portions of our manufacturing operations to the PRC in order to maximize manufacturing and operational efficiency. This could result in reducing our domestic operations in the future, which in turn could entail significant one-time earnings charges to account for severance, equipment write-offs or write downs and moving expenses.

 

17
 

 

Our earnings would be reduced if our goodwill or intangible assets recorded as part of the RLD Acquisition were to become impaired.

 

We recorded goodwill and identifiable intangible assets as part of the RLD Acquisition in February 2012. Goodwill is generated when the cost of an acquisition exceeds the fair value of the net tangible and identifiable intangible assets acquired. We also have certain intangible assets with indefinite lives. We assess the impairment of goodwill and indefinite lived intangible assets annually or more often if events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value may not be recoverable. We assess the impairment of acquired product rights and other finite lived intangible assets whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that their carrying amount may not be recoverable. If our goodwill or intangible assets recorded in connection with the RLD Acquisition were determined to be impaired, then we would be required to recognize a charge against our earnings, which could materially and adversely affect our results of operations during the period in which the impairment was recognized. Any potential charges for impairment related to goodwill or intangible assets would not impact cash flow, tangible capital or liquidity.

 

We may face risks relating to currency fluctuations and currency exchange.

 

  Historically the Company has had limited exposure to currency fluctuations since transactions with customers located outside the United States have generally been denominated in U.S. Dollars. As a result of the RLD Acquisition, however, the Company recognized sales in Canada in 2013 and 2012, denominated in Canadian Dollars and anticipates that it will continue to recognize sales in Canada denominated in Canadian Dollars in future periods. In addition, the Company incurs certain expenses which are denominated in Canadian Dollars in connection with the maintenance and operation of a sales and distribution facility in Canada. The Company's functional currency is the U.S. dollar. Accordingly, any revenue and expense denominated in Canadian Dollars needs to be translated into U.S. Dollars at the applicable currency exchange rate for inclusion in our consolidated financial statements. Exchange rates between the Canadian Dollar and the U.S. Dollar in recent years have fluctuated significantly and may do so in the future. We do not engage in currency hedging activities to limit the risks of currency fluctuations. The Company anticipates that sales in Canada during 2014 should be less than $2,000,000. Currency fluctuations could adversely impact our results of operations, cash flows and financial position. 

 

Competitors may develop products that are similar to, and compete with, our products due to our limited proprietary protection.

 

We possess limited patent or registered intellectual property rights with respect to our technology. We rely on a combination of contractual rights and trade secret laws to protect our proprietary technology and know-how. There can be no assurance that we will be able to protect our technology and know-how or that third parties will not be able to develop similar technology independently. Therefore, existing and potential competitors may be able to develop similar products which compete with our products. Such competition could adversely affect the prices for our products or our market share and could have a material adverse effect upon our results of operations and financial condition.

 

Patent infringement claims against us or our customers, whether or not successful, may cause us to incur significant costs.

 

While we do not believe that our products (including products and technologies licensed from others) infringe valid intellectual property rights of any third parties, there can be no assurance that infringement or invalidity claims (or claims for indemnification resulting from infringement claims) will not be asserted against us or our customers. Damages for infringement of valid intellectual property rights of third parties could be substantial, and if determined to be willful, can be trebled. Such an outcome could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s financial condition and results of operation. Regardless of the validity or the successful assertion of any such claims, we could incur significant costs and diversion of resources with respect to the defense thereof which could have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations. If we are unsuccessful in defending any claims or actions that are asserted against us or our customers, we could seek to obtain a license under a third party’s intellectual property rights. There can be no assurance, however, that under such circumstances, a license would be available under reasonable terms or at all. The failure to obtain a license to a third party’s intellectual property rights on commercially reasonable terms could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.

 

During 2012, K Tech Telecommunications, Inc. (“ K Tech ”) filed a patent infringement claim against the Company and RLD seeking an injunction and damages, as described in more detail below under Item 3 – Legal Proceedings.

 

18
 

 

Any increase in governmental regulation of the markets that we serve, including the cable television system, MDU, lodging and institutional markets, may have an adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.

 

The cable television, MDU, lodging and institutional markets within the cable industry, which represents the vast majority of our business, while in some cases subject to certain FCC licensing requirements, is not presently burdened with extensive government regulations. It is possible, however, that regulations could be adopted in the future which impose burdensome restrictions on these markets resulting in, among other things, barriers to the entry of new competitors or limitations on capital expenditures. Any such regulations, if adopted, could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.

 

Private cable system operation is not presently burdened with significant government regulation, other than, in some cases, certain FCC licensing requirements. The Telecommunications Act of 1996 deregulated many aspects of franchise cable system operation and opened the door to competition among cable operators and telephone companies in each of their respective industries. It is possible, however, that regulations could be adopted which would re-impose burdensome restrictions on franchise cable operators resulting in, among other things, the grant of exclusive rights or franchises within certain geographical areas. Any increased regulation of franchise cable could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.

 

Any increase in governmental environmental regulations or our inability or failure to comply with existing environmental regulations may cause an adverse effect on our results of operations or financial condition.

 

We are subject to a variety of federal, state and local governmental regulations related to the storage, use, discharge and disposal of toxic, volatile or otherwise hazardous chemicals used in our manufacturing processes. We do not anticipate material capital expenditures during the fiscal year ending 2014 for compliance with federal, state and local environmental laws and regulations. There can be no assurance, however, that changes in environmental regulations will not result in the need for additional capital expenditures or otherwise impose additional financial burdens on us. Further, such regulations could restrict our ability to expand our operations. Any failure by us to obtain required permits for, control the use of, or adequately restrict the discharge of, hazardous substances under present or future regulations could subject us to substantial liability or could cause our manufacturing operations to be suspended. Such liability or suspension of manufacturing operations could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.

 

Losing the services of our executive officers or our other highly qualified and experienced employees, or our inability to continue to attract and retain highly qualified and experienced employees, could adversely affect our business.

 

Our future success depends in large part on the continued service of our key executives and technical and management personnel, including James A. Luksch, Chief Executive Officer, and Robert J. Pallé, President and Chief Operating Officer. Our future success also depends on our ability to continue to attract and retain highly skilled engineering, manufacturing, marketing and managerial personnel. The competition for such personnel is intense, and the loss of key employees, in particular the principal members of our management and technical staff, could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.

 

Our organizational documents and Delaware state law contain provisions that could discourage or prevent a potential takeover or change in control of our company or prevent our stockholders from receiving a premium for their shares of our Common Stock.

 

Our board of directors has the authority to issue up to 5,000,000 shares of undesignated Preferred Stock, to determine the powers, preferences and rights and the qualifications, limitations or restrictions granted to or imposed upon any unissued series of undesignated Preferred Stock and to fix the number of shares constituting any series and the designation of such series, without any further vote or action by our stockholders. The Preferred Stock could be issued with voting, liquidation, dividend and other rights superior to the rights of the Common Stock. Furthermore, such Preferred Stock may have other rights, including economic rights, senior to the Common Stock, and as a result, the issuance of such stock could have a material adverse effect on the market value of the Common Stock. In addition, our Restated Certificate of Incorporation:

 

eliminates the right of our stockholders to act without a meeting;

 

does not provide cumulative voting for the election of directors;

 

19
 

 

does not provide our stockholders with the right to call special meetings;

 

provides for a classified board of directors; and

 

imposes various procedural requirements which could make it difficult for our stockholders to effect certain corporate actions.

 

These provisions and the Board’s ability to issue Preferred Stock may have the effect of deterring hostile takeovers or offers from third parties to acquire our company, preventing our stockholders from receiving a premium for their shares of our Common Stock, or delaying or preventing changes in control or management of our company. We are also afforded the protection of Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation Law, which could:

 

delay or prevent a change in control of our company;

 

impede a merger, consolidation or other business combination involving us; or

 

discourage a potential acquirer from making a tender offer or otherwise attempting to obtain control of our company.

 

Any of these provisions which may have the effect of delaying or preventing a change in control of our company, could have a material adverse effect on the market value of our Common Stock.

 

It is unlikely that we will pay dividends on our Common Stock.

 

We intend to retain all earnings to finance the growth of our business and therefore do not intend to pay dividends on our Common Stock in the foreseeable future. Moreover, our loan agreement with Santander Bank, N.A. prohibits the payment of cash dividends by us on our Common Stock.

 

Our Common Stock is thinly traded and subject to volatility, which may adversely affect the market price for our Common Stock.

 

Although our Common Stock is traded on the NYSE MKT, it may remain relatively illiquid, or “thinly traded,” which can increase share price volatility and make it difficult for investors to buy or sell shares in the public market without materially affecting the quoted share price. Investors may be unable to buy or sell a certain quantity of our shares in the public market within one or more trading days. If limited trading in our stock continues, it may be difficult for holders to sell their shares in the public market at any given time at prevailing prices.

 

The prevailing market price of our Common Stock may fluctuate significantly in response to a number of factors, some of which are beyond our control, including the following:

 

announcements of technological innovations or new products by us, our competitors or third parties;

 

quarterly variations in our actual or anticipated results of operations;

 

failure of revenues or earnings in any quarter to meet the investment community’s expectations;

 

market conditions for cable industry stocks in general; and

 

broader market trends unrelated to our performance.

 

Our share ownership is highly concentrated.

 

Our directors and officers beneficially own approximately 46% of our Common Stock and will continue to have significant influence over the outcome of all matters submitted to the stockholders for approval, including the election of our directors.

 

20
 

 

Delays or difficulties in negotiating a labor agreement or other difficulties in our relationship with our union employees may cause an adverse effect on our manufacturing and business operations.

 

All of our direct labor employees located at the Old Bridge, New Jersey facility are members of the International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers Union, Local 2066 (the “ Union ”), under a collective bargaining agreement, which expires in February 2015. In connection with any renewal or renegotiation of the labor agreement upon its termination, there can be no assurance that work stoppages will not occur or that we will be able to agree upon terms for future agreements with the Union. Any work stoppages could have a material adverse effect on our business operations, results of operations and financial condition.

 

ITEM 1B. UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

 

Not applicable to smaller reporting companies.

 

ITEM 2. PROPERTIES

 

The Company’s principal manufacturing, engineering, sales and administrative facilities consist of one building totaling approximately 130,000 square feet located on approximately 20 acres of land in Old Bridge, New Jersey (the “ Old Bridge Facility ”) which is owned by the Company. The Old Bridge Facility is encumbered by a mortgage held by Santander Bank, NA in the principal amount of $3,983,000 as of December 31, 2013. In addition, the Company leases an engineering and sales facility consisting of one building totaling approximately 9,200 square feet in Miamisburg, Ohio. The lease for this facility expires in October, 2015. The total lease obligation will be approximately $57,000 during 2014. The Company also leases an approximately 3,200 square foot sales and distribution facility in Peterborough, Ontario Canada. The lease for this facility expires in December, 2014 and has an annual rental of approximately $20,000. Management believes that these facilities are adequate to support the Company’s anticipated needs in 2014.

 

ITEM 3. LEGAL PROCEEDINGS

 

The Company is a party to certain proceedings incidental to the ordinary course of its business, none of which, in the current opinion of management, is likely to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s business, financial condition, results of operations or cash flows.

 

In addition, on June 19, 2012, K Tech Telecommunications, Inc. (“ K Tech ”) filed a patent infringement complaint against the Company and RLD in the U.S. District Court for the Central District of California (the “ District Court ”), captioned as K Tech v. Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. and R.L. Drake Holdings, LLC , CV12-05316 (the “ Litigation ”). K Tech subsequently filed an amended complaint to add Seller as an additional defendant. The Litigation alleged that the Company and RLD infringe one or more claims of U.S. Patent Nos. 6,785,903, 7,487,533, 7,761,893, and 7,984,469 (the “ K Tech Patents ”) and sought (a) a finding of patent infringement; (b) an injunction against the Company and RLD from further alleged infringement; (c) an award of actual damage suffered by K Tech; and (d) an award of costs relating to the Litigation. The Litigation complaint alleged that Company products DQMx-01, DQMx-02, DQMx-03, DQMx-04, DQMx-10, DQMx-11, DQMx-12, DQMx-13, DQMx-20, DQMx-21, DQMx-22, DQMx-30, DQMx-31, DQMx-40, and MUX-2D-QAM infringe one or more of the K Tech Patents, and alleges that RLD products MQM6000l, MQM10000, DQT1000, and MEQ1000 infringe one or more of the K Tech Patents. All of the aforementioned products are part of the Company’s digital headend product category. On August 29, 2013, the District Court ruled in the Company’s and RLD’s favor on their motion for summary judgment. In particular, the District Court held that three of K Tech’s patents relating to systems and methods for updating the channel information contained in digital television signals, U.S. Patent Nos. 6,785,903, 7,481,533 and 7,761,893 (the “ Specified Patents ”), were invalid because they were rendered obvious by prior art. The District Court agreed with the Company’s and RLD’s argument that all of the patent claims K Tech had asserted under the Specified Patents were invalid by reason of the prior art of, among others, Zenith Electronics Corporation and DiviCom, Inc. (both of which companies had offered for sale products capable of modifying PSIP data prior to the date of K Tech’s earliest patent priority date of April 5, 2000).

 

The Company and RLD are seeking payment from K Tech of their attorney fees and expenses incurred in defending the action. K Tech has appealed the District Court’s ruling to the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Federal Circuit.

 

21
 

 

As of December 31, 2013, the Company’s Chief Executive Officer was indebted to the Company in the amount of $117,000, for which no interest has been charged. This indebtedness arose from a series of cash advances made to the Chief Executive Officer, the latest of which was advanced in February, 2002. This debt was being repaid at the rate of $1,000 per month, all of which represented principal payments on the indebtedness, until November 2008 when the Chief Executive Officer and his spouse filed a voluntary petition under Chapter 11 of the United States Bankruptcy Code. At the time of filing, payments on this indebtedness became subject to the automatic stay provisions of the United States Bankruptcy Code. On July 29, 2009 a plan of reorganization in connection with the Chief Executive Officer's bankruptcy case was confirmed by the United States Bankruptcy Court for the District of New Jersey. Under the confirmed plan of reorganization, the Chief Executive Officer will be obligated to pay a pro-rata share, with all other unsecured pre-petition obligations, of the excess, if any, of his disposable income after the payment of all administrative claims and other expenses. The actual amount that the Company may expect to receive pursuant to the confirmed plan and the date on which required payments would commence are not presently determinable. Since May 2010, however, the Chief Executive Office has made modest elective payments to the Company. Such elective payments aggregated $24,000 through December 31, 2013.

 

ITEM 4. MINE SAFETY DISCLOSURES

 

Not applicable.

 

PART II

 

ITEM 5. MARKET FOR REGISTRANT’S COMMON EQUITY AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS

 

The Company’s Common Stock has been traded on NYSE MKT (formerly American Stock Exchange) since the Company’s initial public offering on December 14, 1995. The following table sets forth for the fiscal quarters indicated, the high and low sale prices for the Company’s Common Stock on NYSE MKT.

 

Market Information

 

Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2013:   High     Low  
             
First Quarter   $ 1.69     $ 1.05  
Second Quarter     1.25       .95  
Third Quarter     1.15       .85  
Fourth Quarter     1.12       .81  

 

Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2012:   High     Low  
             
First Quarter   $ 1.56     $ 1.16  
Second Quarter     1.40       .94  
Third Quarter     1.20       .85  
Fourth Quarter     1.25       .90  

 

The Company’s Common Stock is traded on NYSE MKT under the symbol “BDR.”

 

Holders

 

As of March 1, 2014, the Company had 49 holders of record of the Common Stock. Since a portion of the Company’s common stock is held in “street” or nominee name, the Company is unable to determine the exact number of beneficial holders.

 

22
 

 

Dividends

 

The Company currently anticipates that it will retain all of its earnings to finance the operation of its business, and therefore does not intend to pay dividends on its Common Stock in the foreseeable future. Since its initial public offering, the Company has never declared or paid any cash dividends on its Common Stock. Any determination to pay dividends in the future is at the discretion of the Company’s Board of Directors and will depend upon the Company’s financial condition, results of operations, capital requirements, limitations contained in loan agreements and such other factors as the Board of Directors deems relevant. The Company’s credit agreement with Santander Bank, N.A. prohibits the payment of cash dividends by the Company on its Common Stock.

 

ITEM 6. SELECTED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA

 

Not applicable to smaller reporting companies.

 

ITEM 7. MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

The following discussion and analysis of the Company’s historical results of operations and liquidity and capital resources should be read in conjunction with the consolidated financial statements of the Company and notes thereto appearing elsewhere herein. The following discussion and analysis also contains forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties. Our actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in these forward-looking statements as a result of various factors. See “Forward Looking Statements” that precedes Item 1 above.

 

Overview

 

The Company was incorporated in November, 1988, under the laws of Delaware as GPS Acquisition Corp. for the purpose of acquiring the business of Blonder-Tongue Laboratories, Inc., a New Jersey corporation, which was founded in 1950 by Ben H. Tongue and Isaac S. Blonder to design, manufacture and supply a line of electronics and systems equipment principally for the private cable industry. Following the acquisition, the Company changed its name to Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. The Company completed the initial public offering of its shares of Common Stock in December, 1995.

 

Today the Company is a technology-development and manufacturing company that delivers television signal encoding, transcoding, digital transport and broadband product solutions for a broad range of applications. The markets served include cable television systems, multi-dwelling units, the lodging/hospitality market, and institutional systems including hospitals, prisons and schools. The technology requirements of these markets change rapidly and the Company’s research and development team is continually delivering high performance-lower cost solutions to meet customers’ needs.

 

The Company’s strategy is focused on the development of products for digital signal generation and transmission and, since 2008, the Company entered into and renewed various agreements for technologies in concert with the new digital encoder and EdgeQAM line of products. As a result, the Company continues to significantly expand its digital product lines. The continuing evolution of the Company’s product lines will focus on the increased needs created in the digital space by IPTV, digital SD and HD video content and the transport of these signals over state of the art broadband networks.

 

The Company has seen a continuing shift in product mix from analog products to digital products and expects this shift to continue. Accordingly, any substantial decrease in sales of analog products without a related increase in digital products could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s results of operations, financial condition and cash flows. Sales of digital video headend products were $12,930,000 and $14,384,000 and sales of analog video headend products were $5,818,000 and $6,875,000 in 2013 and 2012, respectively.

 

In April 2010, the Company obtained a $4.1 million purchase commitment for the first member of its EdgeQAM family of products (the EQAM-400) from World Cinema Inc. (“ World Cinema” ), a supplier of free-to-guest digital and HD television to the hospitality market. These shipments were made in the second and third quarters of 2010, during which time the EQAM-400 was exclusive to World Cinema. Since then, the parties had extended the exclusivity arrangement on a number of occasions, with the most recent extension expiring at the end of 2013. In connection with the most recent extension, World Cinema committed to purchase approximately $1.5 million of EQAM-400 from the fourth quarter of 2012 through the fourth quarter of 2013. World Cinema’s purchases of this product were approximately $1,119,000 and $1,911,000 in 2013 and 2012, respectively. World Cinema did not extend this exclusivity arrangement into 2014 with further purchase commitments. Nevertheless, the Company anticipates that World Cinema will continue to purchase the EQAM-400 from Blonder as needed in the normal course of its business, but will not commit to any minimum dollar amount. The EQAM-400 accepts HD content received by satellite via its IP Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) input, adds content protection by utilizing Pro:Idiom™ encryption, and QAM modulates it for distribution over standard coax networks.

 

23
 

 

On February 1, 2012, the Company’s wholly-owned subsidiary, R. L. Drake Holdings, LLC (“ RLD ”), a Delaware limited liability company, acquired substantially all of the assets and assumed certain specified liabilities of R. L. Drake, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company (“ Seller ”) (the “ RLD Acquisition ”), pursuant to an Asset Purchase Agreement of even date, by and among RLD, Seller, R. L. Drake Acquisition Corporation, a Delaware corporation, and WBMK Holding Company, an Ohio corporation, as amended by a certain First Amendment to Asset Purchase Agreement dated February 3, 2012 (as so amended, the “ Asset Purchase Agreement ”). The purchase price was approximately $7,020,000, which included a working capital adjustment of approximately $545,000, plus contingent purchase price payments of up to $1,500,000 in the aggregate that may be made over the three-year period after closing if certain financial results are realized. The assets acquired from Seller include assets used in the manufacturing and delivery of electronic communications solutions for cable television systems, digital television reception, video signal distribution and digital video encoding, including equipment, supplies and other tangible personal property, inventory, accounts receivable, business records, trademarks and other intellectual property rights.

 

RLD manufactures and distributes similar products to those currently being produced by the Company. The acquisition allowed the Company to leverage the combined research and development and sales and marketing departments to shorten the development and manufacturing cycle and deliver a more complete compliment of business and product solutions for the markets the Company serves.

 

The Company’s manufacturing is allocated primarily between its facility in Old Bridge, New Jersey (“ Old Bridge Facility ”) and a key contract manufacturer located in the People’s Republic of China (“ PRC ”). The Company currently manufactures most of its digital products, including the latest encoder and EdgeQAM collections at the Old Bridge Facility. Since 2007 the Company has transitioned and continues to manufacture certain high volume, labor intensive products, including many of the Company’s analog products, in the PRC, pursuant to a manufacturing agreement that governs the production of products that may from time to time be the subject of purchase orders submitted by (and in the discretion of) the Company. The Company may transition additional products to the PRC if determined by the Company to be advantageous based upon changing business and market conditions. Manufacturing products both at the Company’s Old Bridge Facility as well as in the PRC, enables the Company to realize cost reductions while maintaining a competitive position and time-to-market advantage. As a result of the RLD Acquisition, the Company assumed certain post-closing obligations for a leased manufacturing, engineering, sales and administrative facility in Franklin, Ohio at which the RLD products were being manufactured. The lease for this facility expired in November, 2012. In anticipation of such expiration, in August 2012 the Company secured an alternative smaller space in Miamisburg, Ohio, more suitable to its continuing business activities. The Company fully transitioned the manufacture of RLD products from the Franklin, Ohio facility to the Old Bridge Facility during July 2012.

 

The Company may, from time to time, provide manufacturing, research and development and product support services for other companies’ products. In 2011, the Company entered into an agreement with XRS Corporation (formerly known as XATA Corporation) to provide manufacturing, research and development and product support to XRS for an electronic on-board recorder for the trucking industry that the Company had been producing for XRS. The Company has contract manufactured products under this agreement since 2011. XRS’ purchases of this product were approximately $3,227,000 and $1,989,000 in 2013 and 2012, respectively. During the second quarter of 2013, the Company was advised by XRS that it had undertaken a redesign of its core product through a third party. Later in 2013, XRS provided the Company with engineering details of the redesigned product and invited the Company to participate in a bidding process to provide contract manufacturing of the newly designed product. During February 2014, the Company was advised by XRS that it was not chosen to perform this manufacturing function and as such, the Company does not anticipate additional sales to XRS unless and until the Company is invited to bid for contract manufacturing of the new design and is a successful bidder. XRS has advised the Company that it may again be asked to bid to provide contract manufacturing services in connection with this newly designed product in the later part of 2014; however, there can be no assurance that the Company will be asked to bid or that if it does bid, such bid will be successful. The Company does, however, continue to provide repair services to XRS in connection with the prior design and expects that work to continue throughout 2014. While the sales attributable to such repair services are not material, they do allow the Company to maintain a continuing connection and dialog with this customer in anticipation of future contract manufacturing opportunities.

 

24
 

 

Results of Operations

 

The following table sets forth, for the fiscal periods indicated, certain consolidated statement of earnings data from continuing operations as a percentage of net sales.

 

    Year Ended December 31,  
    2013     2012  
Net sales     100.0 %     100.0 %
Costs of goods sold     66.6       67.3  
Gross profit     33.4       32.7  
Selling expenses     12.1       11.0  
General and administrative expenses     18.3       18.4  
Research and development expenses     12.1       11.4  
Loss from operations     (9.1 )     (8.1 )
Other expense, net     1.0       1.1  
Loss before income taxes     (10.1 )     (9.2 )
Provision (benefit) for income taxes     -       7.6  

 

2013 Compared with 2012

 

Net Sales . Net sales decreased $2,773,000 or 9.0% to $27,870,000 in 2013 from $30,643,000 in 2012. The decrease is primarily attributed to a decrease in sales of digital video headend products, analog video headend products and HFC distribution products offset by an increase in sales of contract manufactured products. Sales of digital video headend products were $12,930,000 and $14,384,000, sales of analog video headend products were $5,818,000 and $6,875,000, sales of HFC distribution products were $4,375,000 and $5,185,000 and sales of contract manufactured products were $3,465,000 and $2,440,000 in 2013 and 2012, respectively. RLD sales were $8,335,000 and $7,760,000 in 2013 and 2012, respectively. The Company has experienced and expects to continue to experience a shift in product mix from analog products to digital products.

 

Cost of Goods Sold . Cost of goods sold decreased to $18,559,000 for 2013 from $20,625,000 in 2012 and decreased as a percentage of sales to 66.6% from 67.3%. The decrease is primarily attributed to a decrease in net sales. The decrease as a percentage of sales is attributed to a more favorable product mix offset by a decrease in the provision for inventory reserves ($285,000 and $1,422,000 in 2013 and 2012, respectively). The Company increases its provision for inventory reserves as necessary during the course of the year. The Company expects cost of goods sold as a percentage of sales to decrease throughout the first half of 2014 as manufacturing efficiencies continue to be realized and as the overall product mix is contemplated to improve.

 

Selling Expense s. Selling expenses decreased to $3,372,000 for 2013 from $3,378,000 in 2012 and increased as a percentage of sales to 12.1% for 2013 from 11.0% for 2012. This $6,000 decrease is primarily attributable to a decrease in royalty expenses of $43,000 offset by an increase in department supplies of $35,000. The Company anticipates that selling expenses will increase slightly in 2014 as compared to 2013 as a result of the Company’s continuing efforts to foster brand awareness and to achieve greater market penetration. The increase as a percentage of sales is attributed to a decrease in net sales.

 

General and Administrative Expenses . General and administrative expenses decreased to $5,111,000 in 2013 from $5,635,000 in 2012 and decreased as a percentage of sales to 18.3% for 2013 from 18.4% in 2012. The $524,000 decrease was primarily the result of a decrease in salaries and fringe benefits of $298,000 due to decreased head count and a decrease in building expenses of $128,000, primarily related to the synergies achieved with the RLD Acquisition. The decrease as a percentage of sales was primarily the result of the aforementioned decreases. The Company anticipates that general and administrative expenses will be relatively the same in 2014 compared to 2013.

 

25
 

 

Research and Development Expense . Research and development expenses decreased to $3,373,000 in 2013 from $3,500,000 in 2012, but increased as a percentage of sales to 12.1% in 2013 from 11.4% in 2012. This $127,000 decrease is primarily attributable to a decrease in salaries and fringe benefits of $100,000 due to a decreased head count and a decrease in license fees of $93,000 offset by an increase in consulting fees of $40,000 all related to the synergies achieved with the RLD Acquisition. The increase as a percentage of sales is attributed to a decrease in net sales. The Company anticipates that research and development expenses will increase in 2014 compared to 2013 as a result of increased product development costs.

 

Operating Loss . Operating loss of $(2,545,000) for 2013 represents an increase of $50,000 from the operating loss of $(2,495,000) in 2012. Operating loss as a percentage of sales increased to (9.1)% in 2013 from (8.1)% in 2012.

 

Interest expense . Interest expense decreased to $277,000 in 2013 from $330,000 in 2012. The decrease is the result of lower average borrowings. The Company anticipates an increase in its interest expense in 2014 as a result of adjustments to its cost of funds under the Santander Agreement pursuant to the Sixth Amendment.

 

Income Taxes . The provision for income taxes is zero and $2,332,000 for 2013 and 2012, respectively. The decrease in the 2013 provision is primarily attributable to the Company recording a full valuation allowance for deferred tax assets that were no longer considered to be realizable. The decision to record this valuation allowance was based on management evaluating all positive and negative evidence. The significant negative evidence included a loss for the current year, a cumulative pre-tax loss for the three years ended December 31, 2013, the inability to carryback the net operating losses, limited future reversals of existing temporary differences and the limited availability of tax planning strategies. The Company expects to continue to provide a full valuation allowance until, or unless, it can sustain a level of profitability that demonstrates its ability to utilize these assets.

 

Inflation and Seasonality

 

Inflation and seasonality have not had a material impact on the results of operations of the Company. Fourth quarter sales in 2013 as compared to other quarters were slightly impacted by fewer production days. The Company expects sales each year in the fourth quarter to be impacted by fewer production days.

 

Liquidity and Capital Resources

 

As of December 31, 2013 and 2012, the Company’s working capital was $9,499,000 and $10,471,000, respectively. The decrease in working capital is attributable primarily to the Company’s decrease in inventories of $2,344,00, offset by a decrease in the line of credit of $969,000.

 

The Company’s net cash provided by operating activities for the year ended December 31, 2013 was $1,861,000 primarily due to non-cash expenses of $1,792,000 and a reduction in inventories of $2,542,000, offset by a net loss of $2,822,000, compared to net cash provided by operating activities for the year ended December 31, 2012 of $3,640,000 primarily due to non-cash expenses of $5,664,000 and a reduction in accounts receivable of $1,543,000, offset by a net loss of $5,157,000.

 

Cash used in investing activities was $1,001,000, which was attributable primarily to capital expenditures of $154,000 and the acquisition of licenses of $847,000.

 

Cash used in financing activities was $1,246,000 for the period ended December 31, 2013, comprised primarily of net borrowings on the line of credit of $969,000 offset by the repayment of debt of $277,000.

 

On August 6, 2008, the Company entered into a Revolving Credit, Term Loan and Security Agreement with Santander Bank, N.A. (formerly known as Sovereign Bank, N.A.) through its Sovereign Business Capital division (“ Santander ”), pursuant to which the Company obtained an $8,000,000 credit facility from Santander (the “ Santander Financing ”). The Company and Santander entered into a series of amendments to the foregoing Revolving Credit, Term Loan and Security Agreement (as so amended, the “ Santander Agreement ”), including the Sixth Amendment referenced below, which, among other things, adjusted the Santander Financing to $9,350,000 consisting of (i) a $5,000,000 asset-based revolving credit facility (“ Revolver ”) and (ii) a $4,350,000 term loan facility (“ Term Loan ”), each expiring on February 1, 2015. The amounts which may be borrowed under the Revolver are based on certain percentages of Eligible Receivables and Eligible Inventory, as such terms are defined in the Santander Agreement. The obligations of the Company under the Santander Agreement are secured by substantially all of the assets of the Company and certain of its subsidiaries.

 

26
 

 

Under the Santander Agreement, the Revolver currently bears interest at a rate per annum equal to the prime lending rate announced from time to time by Santander (“Prime”) plus 01.25% or the LIBOR rate plus 4.00%. The Term Loan currently bears interest at a rate per annum equal to Prime plus 01.50% or the LIBOR rate plus 4.25%. Prime was 3.25% at December 31, 2013. LIBOR rate loans under the Santander Agreement may be borrowed for interest periods of one, three or six months. The LIBOR rates for interest periods of one-month, three-months and six-months were 0.17%, 0.25% and 0.35%, respectively, at December 31, 2013. The interest rates above are effective on April 1, 2014, pursuant to the terms of the Sixth Amendment described below.

 

On March 28, 2014, the Company entered into a Sixth Amendment to Revolving Credit, Term Loan and Security Agreement with Santander (the “ Sixth Amendment ”) to amend the Santander Financing. The Sixth Amendment (i) reduced the maximum amount available for borrowing under the Revolver from $6,000,000 to $5,000,000, (ii) increased the interest rates applicable to the Revolver and the Term Loan by three quarters of one percent, (iii) modified the Company’s fixed charge coverage ratio covenant to eliminate the testing thereof with respect to the trailing 12-month period ended as of December 31, 2013, (iv) eliminated the fixed charge coverage ratio covenant with respect to all periods after December 31, 2013, (v) modified the minimum EBITDA covenant to (a) eliminate the testing thereof with respect to the fiscal year ended December 31, 2013, (b) change the manner of calculation thereof, and (c) imposed a quarterly building minimum EBITDA covenant test, commencing with the fiscal quarter ended on March 31, 2014, and thereafter for the two fiscal quarters ending June 30, 2014, the three fiscal quarters ending September 30, 2014, the four fiscal quarters ending December 31, 2014 and thereafter quarterly on a trailing four fiscal quarter basis, (vi) reduced the advance rate applicable to Eligible Inventory (as defined in the Santander Agreement) from 50% to 35%, with a further reduction in such advance rate to 25% effective on or about June 27, 2014 and (vii) reduced the sublimit on advances against such Eligible Inventory from $3,000,000 to $2,000,000. In connection with the Sixth Amendment, the Company paid Santander an amendment fee of $45,000.

 

On November 13, 2013, the Company entered into a Fifth Amendment to Revolving Credit, Term Loan and Security Agreement with Santander (the “ Fifth Amendment ”) to amend the Santander Financing. The Fifth Amendment (i) reduced the maximum amount available for borrowing under the Revolver from $8,500,000 to $6,000,000 and (ii) modified the Company’s fixed charge coverage ratio covenant to eliminate the testing thereof with respect to the trailing 12-month period ended as of September 30, 2013.

 

On March 27, 2013, the Company entered into a Fourth Amendment to Revolving Credit, Term Loan and Security Agreement with Santander (the “ Fourth Amendment ”), to amend the Santander Financing. The Fourth Amendment (i) increased the interest rates applicable to the Revolver and the Term Loan by one half of one percent, effective as of April 1, 2013, subject to being reduced by one quarter of one percent effective as of the date on which the Company delivered to Santander its financial statements for the fiscal quarter ending June 30, 2013, evidencing compliance with the Santander Agreement and continuing compliance with the Santander Agreement through such date of delivery, and further reduced by an additional one quarter of one percent, effective as of the date on which the Company delivers to Santander its audited financial statements for the fiscal year ending December 31, 2013, evidencing compliance with the Santander Agreement and continuing compliance with the Santander Agreement through such date of delivery; (ii) retroactively effective as of December 31, 2012, eliminated the minimum net income covenant and replaced the same with a minimum EBITDA covenant tested as of and for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012 and as of and for each subsequent fiscal year ending on December 31 thereafter, (iii) modified the definition of Net Income (as defined in the Santander Agreement), retroactively effective as of December 31, 2012; and (iv) modified the fixed charge coverage ratio, effective for each of the trailing four fiscal quarters ending in 2013. The Company was in compliance with the Santander Agreement as of June 30, 2013 and, accordingly, the interest rates applicable to both the Revolver and the Term Loan were decreased by one quarter of one percent, effective as of August 14, 2013.

 

Upon termination of the Revolver, all outstanding borrowings under the Revolver are due. The outstanding principal balance of the Revolver was $1,275,000 at December 31, 2013. The Term Loan requires equal monthly principal payments of approximately $18,000 each, plus interest, with the remaining balance due at maturity. The outstanding principal balance of the Term Loan was $3,983,000 at December 31, 2013.

 

27
 

 

The Santander Agreement contains customary representations and warranties as well as affirmative and negative covenants, including certain financial covenants. The Santander Agreement contains customary events of default, including, among others, non-payment of principal, interest or other amounts when due.

 

The fair value of the debt approximates the recorded value based on the borrowing rates currently available to the Company for loans with similar terms and maturities, as evidenced by the Sixth Amendment.

 

The Company’s primary sources of liquidity are its existing cash balances, cash generated from operations and amounts available under the Sovereign Financing. As of December 31, 2013, the Company had approximately $1,275,000 outstanding under the Revolver and $3,251,000 of additional availability for borrowing under the Revolver. As a result of the implementation of the Sixth Amendment, the Company’s liquidity will be reduced. After giving effect to the Sixth Amendment, the Company’s anticipated availability for additional borrowing under the Revolver, on a pro forma basis as of March 28, 2014, would be reduced by approximately $459,000. The Company anticipates these sources of liquidity will be sufficient to fund its operating activities, anticipated capital expenditures and debt repayment obligations for the next twelve months.

 

The Company’s primary long-term obligations are for payment of interest and principal on the Company’s Revolver and Term Loan, both of which expire on February 1, 2015. The Company expects to use cash generated from operations to meet its long-term debt obligations, and anticipates refinancing its long-term debt obligations at maturity. The Company considers opportunities to refinance its existing indebtedness based on market conditions. Although the Company may refinance all or part of its existing indebtedness in the future and will be required to do so by February 1, 2015, there can be no assurances that it will do so. Changes in the Company’s operating plans, lower than anticipated sales, increased expenses, acquisitions or other events may require the Company to seek additional debt or equity financing. There can be no assurance that financing will be available on acceptable terms or at all. Debt financing, if available, could impose additional cash payment obligations and additional covenants and operating restrictions. The Company also expects to make financed and unfinanced long-term capital expenditures from time to time in the ordinary course of business, which capital expenditures were $154,000 and $177,000 in the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. The Company expects to use cash generated from operations, amounts available under its credit facility and purchase-money financing to meet any anticipated long-term capital expenditures.

 

Critical Accounting Estimates

 

The Company prepares its financial statements in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States. Preparing financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles requires the Company to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities as of the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. The following paragraphs include a discussion of some critical areas where estimates are required. You should also review Note 1 to the consolidated financial statements for further discussion of significant accounting policies.

 

Revenue Recognition

 

The Company records revenue when products are shipped. Legal title and risk of loss with respect to the products pass to customers at the point of shipment. Customers do not have a right to return products shipped. Products carry a three year warranty, which amount is not material to the Company’s operations.

 

Inventory and Obsolescence

 

The Company periodically analyzes anticipated product sales based on historical results, current backlog and marketing plans. Based on these analyses, the Company estimates and projects those products that are unlikely to be sold during the next twelve months. Inventories that are not anticipated to be sold in the next twelve months, have been classified as non-current.

 

28
 

 

Approximately 60% of the non-current inventories are comprised of finished goods. The Company has established a program to use interchangeable parts in its various product offerings and to modify certain of its finished goods to better match customer demands. In addition, the Company has instituted additional marketing programs to dispose of the slower moving inventories.

 

The Company continually analyzes its slow-moving, excess and obsolete inventories. Based on historical and projected sales volumes for finished goods, historical and projected usage of raw materials, and anticipated selling prices, the Company establishes reserves. If the Company does not meet its sales expectations these reserves are increased. Products that are determined to be obsolete are written down to net realizable value.

 

Accounts Receivable and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

 

Management periodically performs a detailed review of amounts due from customers to determine if accounts receivable balances are impaired based on factors affecting the collectability of those balances. Management’s estimates of the allowance for doubtful accounts requires management to exercise significant judgment about the timing, frequency and severity of collection losses, which affects the allowances and net earnings. As these factors are difficult to predict and are subject to future events that may alter management assumptions, these allowances may need to be adjusted in the future.

 

Long-Lived Assets

 

On a periodic basis, management assesses whether there are any indicators that the value of the Company’s long-lived assets may be impaired. An asset’s value may be impaired only if management’s estimate of the aggregate future cash flows, on an undiscounted basis, to be generated by the asset are less than the carrying value of the asset.

 

If impairment has occurred, the loss shall be measured as the excess of the carrying amount of the asset over the fair value of the long-lived asset. The Company’s estimates of aggregate future cash flows expected to be generated by each long-lived asset are based on a number of assumptions that are subject to economic and market uncertainties. As these factors are difficult to predict and are subject to future events that may alter management’s assumptions, the future cash flows estimated by management in their impairment analyses may not be achieved.

 

Valuation of Deferred Tax Assets

 

Management periodically evaluates its ability to recover the reported amount of its deferred income tax assets considering several factors, including the estimate of the likelihood that it will generate sufficient taxable income in future years in which temporary differences reverse. Due to the uncertainties related to, among other things, the extent and timing of future taxable income, which currently indicates that it was more likely than not that the Company would not realize the benefits related to the deferred tax assets, the Company recorded a valuation allowance equal to a significant portion of the net deferred tax assets as of December 31, 2013 and 2012.

 

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

 

In July 2013, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“ FASB ”) issued Accounting Standards Update (“ ASU ”) No. 2013-11, Presentation of an Unrecognized Tax Benefit When a Net Operating Loss Carryforward, a Similar Tax Loss, or a Tax Credit Carryforward Exists (“ ASU 2013-11 ”). ASU 2013-11 amends Accounting Standards Codification (“ ASC ”) 740, Income Taxes, by providing guidance on the financial statement presentation of an unrecognized benefit when a net operating loss carryforward, a similar tax loss, or a tax credit carryforward exists. The ASU does not affect the recognition or measurement of uncertain tax positions under ASC 740. ASU 2013-11 will be effective for the Company for interim and annual periods beginning after December 15, 2013, with early adoption permitted. The Company does not expect the adoption of this ASU to have a material impact on its consolidated financial statements.

 

29
 

 

In February 2013, the FASB issued ASU 2013-02 (“ ASU 2013-02 ”), “ Reporting of Amounts Reclassified Out of Other Comprehensive Income”.  ASU 2013-02 finalized the reporting for reclassifications out of accumulated other comprehensive income, which was previously deferred, as discussed below. The amendments do not change the current requirements for reporting net income or other comprehensive income in financial statements. However, they do require an entity to provide information about the amounts reclassified out of accumulated other comprehensive income by component. An entity is also required to present on the face of the financials where net income is reported or in the footnotes, significant amounts reclassified out of accumulated other comprehensive income by the respective line items of net income, but only if the amount reclassified is required under U.S. GAAP to be reclassified to net income in its entirety in the same reporting period. Other amounts need only be cross-referenced to other disclosures required that provide additional detail of these amounts. The amendments in this update are effective for reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2012, and early adoption is permitted. The adoption of this standard did not have a material impact on the Company’s financial position and results of operations.

 

The FASB, the Emerging Issues Task Force and the SEC have issued certain other accounting standards updates and regulations as of December 31, 2013 that will become effective in subsequent periods; however, management of the Company does not believe that any of those updates would have significantly affected the Company’s financial accounting measures or disclosures had they been in effect during 2013 or 2012, and does not believe that any of those pronouncements will have a significant impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements at the time they become effective.

 

ITEM 7A. QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURE ABOUT MARKET RISK

 

Not applicable to smaller reporting companies.

 

ITEM 8. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA

 

Incorporated by reference from the consolidated financial statements and notes thereto of the Company, which are attached hereto beginning on page 38.

 

ITEM 9. CHANGES IN AND DISAGREEMENTS WITH ACCOUNTANTS ON ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE

 

Not applicable.

 

ITEM 9A. CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

 

Disclosure Controls and Procedures

 

The Company maintains a system of disclosure controls and procedures designed to provide reasonable assurance that information required to be disclosed in the Company’s reports filed or submitted pursuant to the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “ Exchange Act ”), is recorded, processed, summarized and reported within the time periods specified in the rules and forms of the Securities and Exchange Commission. Disclosure controls and procedures include, without limitation, controls and procedures designed to ensure that such information is accumulated and communicated to the Company’s management, including its Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, as appropriate, to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure.  The Company carried out an evaluation, under the supervision and with the participation of management, including the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, of the design and operation of the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures as of the end of the period covered by this report.  Based on this evaluation, the Company’s Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer concluded that the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures were effective at December 31, 2013.

 

Internal Control Over Financial Reporting

 

The management of the Company is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting as defined in Rule 13a-15(f) of the Exchange Act. The Company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.

 

30
 

 

All internal control systems, no matter how well designed, have inherent limitations. Therefore, even those systems determined to be effective can provide only reasonable assurance with respect to financial statement preparation and presentation.

 

The Company’s management assessed the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2013. In making this assessment, it used the 1992 criteria set forth by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO) in Internal Control—Integrated Framework. Based on this assessment the Company believes that, as of December 31, 2013, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting is effective based on those criteria. 

 

This annual report does not include an attestation report of the Company's registered public accounting firm regarding internal control over financial reporting. Management's report was not subject to attestation by the Company's registered public accounting firm pursuant to the rules of the Securities and Exchange Commission that permit the Company to provide only management's report in this Annual Report on Form 10-K.

 

During the quarter ended December 31, 2013, there have been no changes in the Company’s internal control over financial reporting that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

ITEM 9B. OTHER INFORMATION

 

As disclosed above under the heading “Liquidity and Capital Resources,” the Company entered into the Sixth Amendment to the Santander Financing on March 28, 2014, which disclosure is incorporated into this Item 9B by reference. The description of the Sixth Amendment herein is qualified in its entirety by reference to the complete terms and conditions of the Sixth Amendment, which is filed as Exhibit 10.31 to this Annual Report on Form 10-K.

 

PART III

 

ITEM 10. DIRECTORS AND EXECUTIVE OFFICERS OF THE REGISTRANT

 

The information about the Company’s directors and executive officers is incorporated by reference from the discussion under the heading “Directors and Executive Officers” in the Company’s proxy statement for its 2014 Annual Meeting of Stockholders. The information about the Company’s Audit Committee (excluding the Audit Committee Report) and the Audit Committee’s “audit committee financial expert,” is incorporated by reference from the discussion under the heading “Corporate Governance and Board Matters” in the Company’s proxy statement for its 2014 Annual Meeting of Stockholders. Information about compliance with Section 16(a) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is incorporated by reference from the discussion under the heading “Section 16(a) Beneficial Ownership Reporting Compliance” in the Company’s proxy statement for its 2014 Annual Meeting of Stockholders.

 

Each of the Company’s directors, officers and employees are required to comply with the Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. Code of Ethics adopted by the Company. The Code of Ethics sets forth policies covering a broad range of subjects and requires strict adherence to laws and regulations applicable to the Company’s business. The Code of Ethics is available on the Company’s website at www.blondertongue.com, under the “About Us - Investor Relations - Code of Ethics” captions. The Company will post to its website any amendments to the Code of Ethics under the “About Us - Investor Relations - Code of Ethics” caption.

 

ITEM 11. EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

 

Information about director and executive officer compensation is incorporated by reference from the discussion under the headings “Directors’ Compensation” and “Executive Compensation” in the Company’s proxy statement for its 2014 Annual Meeting of Stockholders.

 

31
 

 

ITEM 12. SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS

 

Information about security ownership of certain beneficial owners and management is incorporated by reference from the discussion under the heading “Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management” in the Company’s proxy statement for its 2014 Annual Meeting of Stockholders.

 

Summary information concerning the Company’s equity compensation plans is incorporated by reference from the discussion related to Proposal 2 under the heading "Equity Compensation Plans" in the Company’s proxy statement for its 2014 Annual Meeting of Stockholders.

 

ITEM 13. CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS

 

Information about certain relationships and transactions with related parties is incorporated by reference from the discussion under the heading “Certain Relationships and Related Transactions” in the Company’s proxy statement for its 2014 Annual Meeting of Stockholders. Information about the independence of each director or nominee for director of the Company during 2013 is incorporated by reference from the discussion under the heading “Corporate Governance and Board Matters” in the Company’s proxy statement for its 2014 Annual Meeting of Stockholders.

 

ITEM 14. PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES

 

Information about procedures related to the engagement of the independent registered public accountants and fees and services paid to the independent registered public accountants is incorporated by reference from the discussion under the headings “Audit and Other Fees Paid to Independent Registered Public Accountants” and “Pre-Approval Policy for Services by Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm” in the Company’s proxy statement for its 2014 Annual Meeting of Stockholders.

 

PART IV

 

ITEM 15. EXHIBITS AND FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES

 

(a)(1) Financial Statements and Supplementary Data.

 

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm   39
     
Consolidated Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2013 and 2012   40
     
Consolidated Statements of Operations and Comprehensive Income (Loss) for the Years Ended December 31, 2013 and 2012   41
     
Consolidated Statements of Stockholders’ Equity for the Years Ended December 31, 2013 and 2012   42
     
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the Years Ended December 31, 2013 and 2012   43
     
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements   44

 

32
 

 

(a)(2) Financial Statement Schedules.

 

All schedules for which provision is made in the applicable accounting regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission are not required under the applicable instructions or are inapplicable and therefore have been omitted.

 

(a)(3) Exhibits.

 

The exhibits are listed in the Index to Exhibits appearing below and are filed herewith or are incorporated by reference to exhibits previously filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission.

 

(b) Index to Exhibits:

 

Exhibit #   Description   Location
         
2.1   Asset Purchase Agreement dated as of February 1, 2012 by and among R. L. Drake Holdings, LLC, R. L. Drake, LLC, R. L. Drake Acquisition Corporation and WBMK Holding Company   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 2.1 to Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K/A dated February 1, 2012, filed April 17, 2012.
         
2.2   First Amendment to Asset Purchase Agreement dated as of February 3, 2012 by and among R. L. Drake Holdings, LLC, R. L. Drake, LLC, R. L. Drake Acquisition Corporation and WBMK Holding Company   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 2.2 to Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K/A dated February 1, 2012, filed April 17, 2012.
         
3.1   Restated Certificate of Incorporation of Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 3.1 to Registrant’s S-1 Registration Statement No. 33-98070, originally filed October 12, 1995, as amended.
         
3.2   Restated Bylaws of Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc., as amended.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 3.2 to Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K/A for the period ending December 31, 2007, originally filed May 9, 2008.
         
4.1   Specimen of stock certificate.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 4.1 to Registrant’s S-1 Registration Statement No. 33-98070, filed October 12, 1995, as amended.
         
4.2   Warrant to Adaptive Micro-Ware, Inc.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 4.1 to Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q originally filed November 14, 2012.
         
10.1   1995 Long Term Incentive Plan.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 10.6 to Registrant’s S-1 Registration Statement No. 33-98070, filed October 12, 1995, as amended.
         
10.2   First Amendment to the 1995 Plan.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 10.5(a) to Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the period ended March 31, 1997.
         
10.3   Second Amendment to the 1995 Plan.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 4.3 to S-8 Registration Statement No. 333-52519 originally filed on May 13, 1998.

 

33
 

 

Exhibit #   Description   Location
         
10.4   Third Amendment to the 1995 Plan.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 4.4 to S-8 Registration Statement No. 333-37670, originally filed May 23, 2000.
         
10.5   Fourth Amendment to the 1995 Plan.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 4.5 to S-8 Registration Statement No. 33-96993, originally filed July 24, 2002.
         
10.6   Amended and Restated 1996 Director Option Plan.   Incorporated by reference from Appendix B to Registrant’s Proxy Statement for its 1998 Annual Meeting of Stockholders, filed March 27, 1998.
         
10.7   First Amendment to the Amended and Restated 1996 Director Option Plan.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 4.2 to S-8 Registration Statement No. 333-111367, originally filed on December 19, 2003.
         
10.8   Form of Indemnification Agreement entered into by Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. in favor of each of its Directors and Officers.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 10.1 to Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q, originally filed August 14, 2013.
         
10.9   Bargaining Unit Pension Plan.   Filed herewith.
         
10.10   Executive Officer Bonus Plan.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 10.3 to Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the period ended March 31, 1997, filed May 13, 1997.
         
10.11   Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. 2005 Employee Equity Incentive Plan   Incorporated by reference from Appendix A to the Registrant’s Definitive Proxy Statement for its 2005 Annual Meeting of               Stockholders held on May 24, 2005.
         
10.12   Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. 2005 Director Equity Incentive Plan   Incorporated by reference from Appendix B to the Registrant’s Definitive Proxy Statement for its 2005 Annual Meeting of               Stockholders held on May 24, 2005.
         
10.13   Form of Option Agreement under the 1995 Long Term Incentive Plan.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 10.33 to Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the period ending December 31, 2004, filed April 15, 2005.
         
10.14   Form of Option Agreement under the 1996 Director Option Plan.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 10.34 to Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the period ending December 31, 2004, filed April 15, 2005.
         
10.15   Form of Option Agreement under the 2005 Employee Equity Incentive Plan.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 10.3 to Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the period ending June 30, 2005, filed August 15, 2005.

 

34
 

 

Exhibit #   Description   Location
         
10.16   Form of Option Agreement under the 2005 Director Equity Incentive Plan.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 10.24 to Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the period ending December 31, 2007, filed March 31, 2008.
         
10.17   Form of Option Agreement under the 2005 Employee Equity Incentive Plan, as amended November 3, 2010.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 10.18 to Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the period ending December 31, 2010, filed March 21, 2011.
         
10.18   Form of Option Agreement under the 2005 Director Equity Incentive Plan, as amended November 3, 2010.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 10.19 to Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the period ending December 31, 2010, filed March 21, 2011.
         
10.19   Form of Option Agreement under the 2005 Employee Equity Incentive Plan, as amended May 18, 2011.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 99.1 to Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K dated May 18, 2011, filed May 20, 2011.
         
10.20   Form of Option Agreement under the 2005 Director Equity Incentive Plan, as amended May 18, 2011.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 99.2 to Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K dated May 18, 2011, filed May 20, 2011.
         
10.21   First Amendment to Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. 2005 Employee Equity Incentive Plan.   Incorporated by reference from Appendix B to Registrant’s Definitive Proxy Statement for its 2007 Annual Meeting of Stockholders held on May 23, 2007.
         
10.22   Second Amendment to Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. 2005 Employee Equity Incentive Plan, as amended.   Incorporated by reference from Appendix B to Registrant’s Definitive Proxy Statement for its 2010 Annual Meeting of Stockholders held on May 19, 2010.
         
10.23   First Amendment to Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. 2005 Director Equity Incentive Plan.   Incorporated by reference from Appendix C to Registrant’s Definitive Proxy Statement for its 2010 Annual Meeting of Stockholders held on May 19, 2010.
         
10.24   Deferred Compensation Plan for James A. Luksch, effective as of January 1, 2011, as amended and restated on February 4, 2011.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 10.23 to Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the period ending December 31, 2010, filed March 21, 2011.
         
10.25   Revolving Credit, Term Loan and Security Agreement, dated August 6, 2008, between Sovereign Business Capital and Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 99.1 to Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K dated August 6, 2008, filed August 8, 2008.
         
10.26   First Amendment to Revolving Credit, Term Loan and Security Agreement, dated January 14, 2011, between Sovereign Business Capital and Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 99.1 to Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K dated January 14, 2011, filed January 20, 2011.

 

35
 

 

Exhibit #   Description   Location
         
10.27   Second Amendment to Revolving Credit, Term Loan and Security Agreement, dated February 1, 2012, between Sovereign Business Capital and Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. and R. L. Drake Holdings, LLC.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 99.1 to Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K dated February 1, 2012, filed February 7, 2012.
         
10.28   Third Amendment to Revolving Credit, Term Loan and Security Agreement, dated August 10, 2012, between Sovereign Business Capital and Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. and R. L. Drake Holdings, LLC.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 10.1 to Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q originally filed August 14, 2012.
         
10.29   Fourth Amendment to Revolving Credit, Term Loan and Security Agreement, dated March 27, 2013, between Sovereign Business Capital and Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. and R. L. Drake Holdings, LLC.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 10.29 to Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the period ending December 31, 2012, filed April 1, 2013.
         
10.30   Fifth Amendment to Revolving Credit, Term Loan and Security Agreement, dated November 13, 2013, between Santander Bank, N.A. Capital and Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. and R. L. Drake Holdings, LLC.   Incorporated by reference from Exhibit 10.1 to Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the period ending September 30, 2013, filed November 14, 2013.
         
10.31   Sixth Amendment to Revolving Credit, Term Loan and Security Agreement, dated March 28, 2014, between Santander Bank N.A. Capital and Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. and R. L. Drake Holdings, LLC.                          Filed herewith.
         
21   Subsidiaries of Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc.   Filed herewith.
         
23.1   Consent of Marcum LLP.   Filed herewith.
         
31.1   Certification of James A. Luksch pursuant to Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.   Filed herewith.
         
31.2   Certification of Eric Skolnik pursuant to Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.   Filed herewith.
         
32.1   Certification pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.   Furnished herewith.
         
101.1*   Interactive data files.   Furnished herewith.

 

* Pursuant to Rule 406T of Regulation S-T, these interactive data files are deemed not filed or part of a registration statement or prospectus for purposes of Sections 11 or 12 of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, are deemed not filed for purposes of Section 18 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and otherwise are not subject to liability under those sections.

 

Exhibits 10.1-10.8 and 10.10-10.24 represent management contracts or compensation plans or arrangements.

 

36
 

 

(c) Financial Statement Schedules:

 

All schedules for which provision is made in the applicable accounting regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission are not required under the applicable instructions or are inapplicable and therefore have been omitted.

 

37
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

    Page
     
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm   38
     
Consolidated Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2013 and 2012   39
     
Consolidated Statements of Operations and Comprehensive Income (Loss) for the Years Ended December 31, 2013 and 2012   40
     
Consolidated Statements of Stockholders’ Equity for the Years Ended December 31, 2013 and 2012   41
     
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the Years Ended December 31, 2013 and 2012   42
     
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements   43

 

38
 

 

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

 

To the Audit Committee of the Board of Directors and Stockholders of

Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc.

 

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. and Subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of December 31, 2013 and 2012 and the related consolidated statements of operations and comprehensive income (loss), changes in stockholders’ equity and cash flows for the years then ended. These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.

 

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. The Company is not required to have, nor were we engaged to perform, an audit of its internal control over financial reporting. Our audit included consideration of internal control over financial reporting as a basis for designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

 

In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. and Subsidiaries as of December 31, 2013 and 2012, and the consolidated results of their operations and their cash flows for the years then ended in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.

 

/s/Marcum llp

 

Marcum LLP

New York, NY

March 31, 2014

 

39
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS

(In thousands)

 

 

    December 31,  
    2013     2012  
Assets                
Current assets:                
Cash   $ 67     $ 453  
Accounts receivable, net of allowance for doubtful accounts of $196     3,241       3,461  
Inventories     8,975       11,319  
Prepaid and other current assets     458       723  
Prepaid benefit costs     415       -  
Total current assets     13,156       15,956  
Inventories, net non-current     2,115       2,598  
Property, plant and equipment, net of accumulated depreciation and amortization     3,710       4,009  
License agreements, net     792       552  
Intangible assets, net     2,216       2,470  
Goodwill     493       493  
Other assets, net     159       225  
    $ 22,641     $ 26,303  
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity                
Current liabilities:                
Line of credit   $ 1,275     $ 2,244  
Current portion of long-term debt     270       277  
Accounts payable     1,493       1,825  
Accrued compensation     446       330  
Accrued benefit pension liability     -       617  
Income taxes payable     24       24  
Other accrued expenses     149       168  
Total current liabilities     3,657       5,485  
                 
Long-term debt     3,893       4,163  
Deferred income taxes     63       30  
Commitments and contingencies     -       -  
Stockholders’ equity:                
Preferred stock, $.001 par value; authorized 5,000 shares; no shares outstanding     -       -  
Common stock, $.001 par value; authorized 25,000 shares, 8,465 shares Issued     8       8  
Paid-in capital     26,190       25,918  
Retained earnings (deficit)     (3,194 )     (372 )
Accumulated other comprehensive loss     (668 )     (1,621 )
Treasury stock, at cost, 2,248 shares     (7,308 )     (7,308 )
Total stockholders’ equity     15,028       16,625  
    $ 22,641     $ 26,303  

 

See accompanying notes to the consolidated financial statements.

 

40
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS AND COMPREHENSIVE INCOME (LOSS)

(In thousands, except per share data)

 

    Year ended December 31  
    2013     2012  
             
Net sales   $ 27,870     $ 30,643  
Cost of goods sold     18,559       20,625  
Gross profit     9,311       10,018  
Operating expenses:                
Selling expenses     3,372       3,378  
General and administrative     5,111       5,635  
Research and development     3,373       3,500  
      11,856       12,513  
Loss from operations     (2,545 )     (2,495 )
                 
Other expense:                
Interest expense     (277 )     (330 )
Loss before income taxes     (2,822 )     (2,825 )
Provision for income taxes     -       2,332  
Net loss   $ (2,822 )   $ (5,157 )
Net loss per share, basic and diluted   $ (0.45 )   $ (0.83 )
Weighted average shares outstanding, basic and diluted     6,216       6,216  
Net loss   $ (2,822 )   $ (5,157 )
Changes in accumulated unrealized pension losses, net of taxes     953       321  
Comprehensive loss   $ (1,869 )   $ (4,836 )

 

See accompanying notes to the consolidated financial statements.

 

41
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY

(In thousands)

 

    Common Stock     Paid-in     Retained
Earnings
    Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
    Treasury        
    Shares     Amount     Capital     (Deficit)     Loss     Stock     Total  
Balance at January 1, 2012     8,465     $ 8     $ 25,660     $ 4,785     $ (1,942 )   $ (7,308 )   $ 21,203  
Net loss     -       -       -       (5,157 )     -       -       (5,157 )
Recognized pension loss, net of taxes     -       -       -       -       321       -       321  
Stock-based Compensation     -       -       258       -       -       -       258  
Balance at December 31, 2012     8,465       8       25,918       (372 )     (1,621 )     (7,308 )     16,625  
Net loss     -       -       -       (2,822 )     -       -       (2,822 )
Recognized pension loss, net of taxes     -       -       -       -       953       -       953  
Stock-based Compensation     -       -       272       -       -       -       272  
Balance at December 31, 2013     8,465     $ 8     $ 26,190     $ (3,194 )   $ (668 )   $ (7,308 )   $ 15,028  

 

See accompanying notes to the consolidated financial statements.

 

42
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

(In thousands)

 

    Year ended
December 31,
 
    2013     2012  
             
Cash Flows From Operating Activities:                
Net loss   $ (2,822 )   $ (5,157 )
Adjustments to reconcile net loss to cash provided by operating activities:                
Depreciation     453       505  
Amortization     861       933  
Stock-based compensation expense     272       258  
Loss on sale of fixed assets     -       55  
Provision for inventory reserves     285       1,422  
Provision for doubtful accounts     -       23  
Non cash pension expense     (79 )     157  
Deferred income taxes     33       2,311  
Changes in operating assets and liabilities:                
Accounts receivable     220       1,543  
Inventories     2,542       940  
Prepaid and other current assets     265       (294 )
Other assets     66       (29 )
Accounts payable, accrued expenses and accrued compensation     (235 )     949  
Income tax payable     -       24  
Net cash provided by operating activities     1,861       3,640  
Cash Flows From Investing Activities:                
Proceeds on sale of fixed assets     -       130  
Capital expenditures     (154 )     (102 )
Acquisition of licenses     (847 )     (576 )
Acquisition of R.L. Drake assets     -       (7,020 )
Net cash used in investing activities     (1,001 )     (7,568 )
Cash Flows From Financing Activities:                
Net borrowings on line of credit     (969 )     2,244  
Repayments of debt     (277 )     (265 )
Borrowings of debt     -       1,551  
Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities     (1,246 )     3,530  
Net decrease in cash     (386 )     (398 )
Cash, beginning of year     453       851  
Cash, end of year   $ 67     $ 453  
Supplemental Cash Flow Information:                
Cash paid for interest   $ 264     $ 321  
Cash paid for income taxes     -       -  
Non cash investing and financing activities:                
Capital expenditures financed by notes payable     -     $ 75  

 

See accompanying notes to the consolidated financial statements.

 

43
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.

AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(in thousands)

 

Note 1 - Summary of Significant Accounting Policies

 

(a) Company and Basis of Presentation

 

Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. (together with its consolidated subsidiaries, the “ Company ”) is a technology-development and manufacturing company that delivers television signal encoding, transcoding, digital transport, and broadband product solutions to the markets the Company serves, including the multi-dwelling unit market, the lodging/hospitality market and the institutional market, including hospitals, prisons and schools, primarily throughout the United States and Canada. The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. and its wholly-owned subsidiaries. Significant intercompany accounts and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation.

 

(b) Cash and Cash Equivalents

 

The Company considers all highly liquid debt instruments with a maturity of less than three months at purchase to be cash equivalents. The Company did not have any cash equivalents at December 31, 2013 and 2012. Cash balances at financial institutions are insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (“ FDIC ”). At times, cash and cash equivalents may be uninsured or in deposit accounts that exceed the FDIC insurance limit. Periodically, the Company evaluates the creditworthiness of the financial institutions and evaluates its credit exposure.

 

(c) Accounts Receivable and Allowance for Doubtful accounts

 

Accounts receivable are customer obligations due under normal trade terms. The Company sells its products primarily to distributors and private cable operators. The Company performs continuing credit evaluations of its customers’ financial condition and although the Company generally does not require collateral, letters of credit may be required from its customers in certain circumstances.

 

Senior management reviews accounts receivable on a monthly basis to determine if any receivables will potentially be uncollectible. The Company includes any accounts receivable balances that are determined to be uncollectible, along with a general reserve based on historical experience, in its overall allowance for doubtful accounts.

 

(d) Inventories

 

Inventories are stated at the lower of cost, determined by the first-in, first-out (“ FIFO ”) method, or market.

 

The Company periodically analyzes anticipated product sales based on historical results, current backlog and marketing plans. Based on these analyses, the Company anticipates that certain products will not be sold during the next twelve months. Inventories that are not anticipated to be sold in the next twelve months, have been classified as non-current.

 

The Company continually analyzes its slow-moving, excess and obsolete inventories. Based on historical and projected sales volumes and anticipated selling prices, the Company establishes reserves. Inventory that is in excess of current and projected use is reduced by an allowance to a level that approximates its estimate of future demand. Products that are determined to be obsolete are written down to net realizable value.

 

(e) Property, Plant and Equipment

 

Property, plant and equipment are stated at cost. The Company provides for depreciation generally on the straight-line method based upon estimated useful lives of 3 to 5 years for office equipment, 5 to 7 years for furniture and fixtures, 6 to 10 years for machinery and equipment, 10 to 15 years for building improvements and 40 years for the manufacturing and administrative office facility.

 

44
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.

AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(in thousands)

 

(f) Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets

 

The Company accounts for goodwill and intangible assets in accordance with ASC 350 Intangibles - Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets (“ ASC 350 ”). ASC 350 requires that goodwill and other intangibles with indefinite lives should be tested for impairment annually or on an interim basis if events or circumstances indicate that the fair value of an asset has decreased below its carrying value.

 

Goodwill represents the excess of the purchase price over the fair value of net assets acquired in business combinations. GAAP requires that goodwill be tested for impairment at the reporting unit level (operating segment or one level below an operating segment) on an annual basis and between annual tests when circumstances indicate that the recoverability of the carrying amount of goodwill may be in doubt. Application of the goodwill impairment test requires judgment, including the identification of reporting units, assigning assets and liabilities to reporting units, assigning goodwill to reporting units, and determining the fair value. Significant judgment is required to estimate the fair value of reporting units including estimating future cash flows, determining appropriate discount rates and other assumptions. Changes in these estimates and assumptions could materially affect the determination of fair value and/or goodwill impairment.

 

The Company’s business includes one goodwill reporting unit. The Company annually reviews goodwill for possible impairment by comparing the fair value of the reporting unit to the carrying value of the assets. If the fair value exceeds the carrying value of the net asset, no goodwill impairment is deemed to exist. If the fair value does not exceed the carrying value, goodwill is tested for impairment and written down to its implied fair value if it is determined to be impaired. The Company performed its annual goodwill impairment test on December 31, 2013 using both the income approach and market approach with assumptions that our management believes are appropriate in the circumstances. Based upon the results, the Company determined that goodwill was not impaired as of December 31, 2013 .

 

The Company considers its trade name to have an indefinite life and in accordance with ASC 350, will not be amortized and will be reviewed annually for impairment.

 

Intangible assets are recorded at cost except for assets acquired in a business combination, which are initially recorded at their estimated fair value. Intangible assets with finite lives include customer relationships and non-compete agreements are amortized on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful lives ranging from 5 to 10 years.

 

The components of intangible assets that are carried at cost less accumulated amortization at December 31, 2013 are as follows:

 

Description   Cost     Accumulated
Amortization
    Net Amount  
                   
Customer relationships   $ 1,365     $ 262     $ 1,103  
Proprietary technology     349       67       282  
Non-compete agreements     248       158       90  
Amortized intangible assets     1,962       487       1,475  
Non-Amortized Trade name     741       -       741  
Total   $ 2,703     $ 487     $ 2,216  

 

Amortization is computed utilizing the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of 10 years for customer relationships, 10 years for proprietary technology, and 3 years for non-compete agreements. Trade name is not amortized as it has an indefinite life. Amortization expense for intangible assets was $254 and $233 for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. Intangible asset amortization is projected to be approximately $254, $178, $171, $171 and $171 in each of the years ending December 31, 2014, 2015, 2016, 2017 and 2018, respectively.

 

45
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.

AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(in thousands)

 

(g) Long-Lived Assets

 

The Company continually monitors events and changes in circumstances that could indicate carrying amounts of the long-lived assets, including intangible assets may not be recoverable. When such events or changes in circumstances occur, the Company assesses recoverability by determining whether the carrying value of such assets will be recovered through the undiscounted expected future cash flows. If the future undiscounted cash flows are less than the carrying amount of these assets, an impairment loss is recognized based on the excess of the carrying amount over the fair value of the assets. The Company did not recognize any intangible asset impairment charges in 2013.

 

(h) Derivative Financial Instruments

 

The Company utilizes interest rate swaps at times to manage interest rate exposures. The Company specifically designates interest rate swaps as hedges of debt instruments and recognizes interest differentials as adjustments to interest expense in the period they occur. The Company did not hold an interest rate swap during the years ended December 31, 2013 or 2012. The Company does not hold or issue financial instruments for trading purposes.

 

(i) Treasury Stock

 

Treasury Stock is recorded at cost. Gains and losses on disposition are recorded as increases or decreases to additional paid-in capital with losses in excess of previously recorded gains charged directly to retained earnings.

 

(j) Significant Risks and Uncertainties

 

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. The Company’s significant estimates include stock compensation and reserves related to accounts receivable, inventory and deferred tax assets. Actual results could differ from those estimates.

 

At December 31, 2013, approximately 28% of the Company’s employees were covered by a collective bargaining agreement, that was scheduled to expire in February 2014, but was extended on the same terms and conditions for an additional one year, until February 2015.

 

The Company’s analog video headend products accounted for approximately 21% and 22% of the Company’s revenues in the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. The Company’s digital video headend products accounted for approximately 46% and 47% of the Company’s revenues in the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. Any substantial decrease in sales of analog video headend products without a related increase in digital video headend products could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s results of operations, financial condition and cash flows.

 

(k ) Royalty and License Expense

 

The Company records royalty expense, as applicable, when the related products are sold. Royalty expense is recorded as a component of selling expenses. Royalty expense was $82 and $125 for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. The Company amortizes license fees over the life of the relevant contract.

 

46
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.

AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(in thousands)

 

The components of intangible assets consisting of license agreements that are carried at cost less accumulated amortization are as follows:

 

    December 31,  
    2013     2012  
             
License agreements   $ 4,897     $ 4,050  
Accumulated amortization     (4,105 )     (3,498 )
    $ 792     $ 552  

 

Amortization of license fees is computed utilizing the straight-line method over the estimated useful life of 2 years. Amortization expense for license fees was $607 and $700 in the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. Amortization expense for license fees is projected to be approximately $550 and $292 in the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2015, respectively.

 

(l) Foreign Exchange

 

The Company uses the United States dollar as its functional and reporting currency since the majority of the Company’s revenues, expenses, assets and liabilities are in the United States and the focus of the Company’s operations is in that country. Assets and liabilities in foreign currencies are translated using the exchange rate at the balance sheet date. Revenues and expenses are translated at average rates of exchange during the year. Gains and losses from foreign currency transactions and translation for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 and cumulative translation gains and losses as of December 31, 2013 and 2012 were not material.

 

(m) Research and Development

 

Research and development expenditures for the Company’s projects are expensed as incurred.

 

(n) R evenue Recognition

 

The Company records revenues when products are shipped and the amount of revenue is determinable and collection is reasonably assured. Customers do not have a right of return. The Company provides a three year warranty on most products. Warranty expense was de minimis in the two year period ended December 31, 2013.

 

(o) Share Based Payments

 

The Company accounts for share based payments in accordance with ASC Topic 718 “Compensation – Stock Payments” (“ ASC Topic 718 ”). The statement requires companies to expense the value of employee stock options and similar awards. Under ASC Topic 718, share-based payment awards result in a cost that will be measured at fair value on the awards’ grant date based on the estimated number of awards that are expected to vest. Compensation cost for awards that vest will not be reversed if the awards expire without being exercised. Stock compensation expense under ASC Topic 718 was $272 and $258 for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

 

The Company estimates the fair value of each stock option grant by using the Black-Scholes option-pricing model with the following weighted average assumptions used for grants: expected lives of 6.5 and 6.5 years; no dividend yield; volatility at 75% and 77%, and risk free interest rate of 1.32% and 1.18% for 2013 and 2012, respectively.

 

(p) Income Taxes

 

The Company accounts for income taxes under the provisions of the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“ FASB ”) Accounting Standards Codification (“ ASC ”) Topic 740 “Income Taxes” (“ ASC Topic 740 ”). Deferred income taxes are provided for temporary differences in the recognition of certain income and expenses for financial and tax reporting purposes. Valuation allowances are established when necessary to reduce deferred tax assets to the amount expected to be realized.

 

47
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.

AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(in thousands)

 

The Company will classify as income tax expense any interest and penalties recognized in accordance with ASC Topic 740. The Company files income tax returns primarily in New Jersey, along with certain other jurisdictions.

 

(q) Earnings (loss) Per Share

 

Earnings (loss) per share are calculated in accordance with ASC Topic 260 “Earnings Per Share,” which provides for the calculation of “basic” and “diluted” earnings (loss) per share. Basic earnings (loss) per share includes no dilution and is computed by dividing net earnings by the weighted average number of common shares outstanding for the period. Diluted earnings (loss) per share reflect, in periods in which they have a dilutive effect, the effect of common shares issuable upon exercise of stock options. The diluted share base excludes incremental shares of 1,118 and 1,032 related to stock options for December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. These shares were excluded due to their antidilutive effect.

 

(r) Other Comprehensive(Loss) Income

 

Comprehensive (loss) income is a measure of income which includes both net (loss) income and other comprehensive (loss) income.  Other comprehensive (loss) income results from items deferred from recognition into the statement of operations and principally consists of unrecognized pension losses net of taxes.  Accumulated other comprehensive (loss) income is separately presented on the Company's consolidated balance sheet as part of stockholders’ equity.

 

(s) Subsequent Events

 

The Company evaluates events that have occurred after the balance sheet date but before the financial statements are issued. Based upon the evaluation, the Company did not identify any additional recognized or non-recognized subsequent events that would require adjustment to or disclosure in the consolidated financial statements.

 

(t) Recent Accounting Pronouncements

 

In July 2013, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“ FASB ”) issued Accounting Standards Update (“ ASU ”) No. 2013-11, Presentation of an Unrecognized Tax Benefit When a Net Operating Loss Carryforward, a Similar Tax Loss, or a Tax Credit Carryforward Exists (“ ASU 2013-11 ”). ASU 2013-11 amends Accounting Standards Codification (“ ASC ”) 740, Income Taxes, by providing guidance on the financial statement presentation of an unrecognized benefit when a net operating loss carryforward, a similar tax loss, or a tax credit carryforward exists. The ASU does not affect the recognition or measurement of uncertain tax positions under ASC 740. ASU 2013-11 will be effective for the Company for interim and annual periods beginning after December 15, 2013, with early adoption permitted. The Company does not expect the adoption of this ASU to have a material impact on its consolidated financial statements.

 

In February 2013, the FASB issued ASU 2013-02 (“ ASU 2013-02 ”), “ Reporting of Amounts Reclassified Out of Other Comprehensive Income”.  ASU 2013-02 finalized the reporting for reclassifications out of accumulated other comprehensive income, which was previously deferred, as discussed below. The amendments do not change the current requirements for reporting net income or other comprehensive income in financial statements. However, they do require an entity to provide information about the amounts reclassified out of accumulated other comprehensive income by component. An entity is also required to present on the face of the financials where net income is reported or in the footnotes, significant amounts reclassified out of accumulated other comprehensive income by the respective line items of net income, but only if the amount reclassified is required under U.S. GAAP to be reclassified to net income in its entirety in the same reporting period. Other amounts need only be cross-referenced to other disclosures required that provide additional detail of these amounts. The amendments in this update are effective for reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2012, and early adoption is permitted. The adoption of this standard did not have a material impact on the Company’s financial position and results of operations.

 

48
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.

AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(in thousands)

 

The FASB, the Emerging Issues Task Force and the SEC have issued certain other accounting standards updates and regulations as of December 31, 2013 that will become effective in subsequent periods; however, management of the Company does not believe that any of those updates would have significantly affected the Company’s financial accounting measures or disclosures had they been in effect during 2013 or 2012, and it does not believe that any of those pronouncements will have a significant impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements at the time they become effective.

 

Note 2 - Acquisition

 

On February 1, 2012, the Company’s wholly-owned subsidiary, R. L. Drake Holdings, LLC (“ RLD ”), a Delaware limited liability company, acquired substantially all of the assets and assumed certain specified liabilities of R. L. Drake, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company (“ Seller ”) (the “ RLD Acquisition ”), pursuant to an Asset Purchase Agreement of even date, by and among RLD, Seller, R. L. Drake Acquisition Corporation, a Delaware corporation, and WBMK Holding Company, an Ohio corporation, as amended by a certain First Amendment to Asset Purchase Agreement dated February 3, 2012 (as so amended, the “ Asset Purchase Agreement ”). The purchase price was approximately $7,020, which included a working capital adjustment of approximately $545, plus contingent purchase price payments of up to $1,500 in the aggregate that may be made over the three-year period after closing if certain financial results are realized. The assets acquired from Seller include assets used in the manufacturing and delivery of electronic communications solutions for cable television systems, digital television reception, video signal distribution and digital video encoding, including equipment, supplies and other tangible personal property, inventory, accounts receivable, business records, trademarks and other intellectual property rights.

 

The net assets acquired were:        
         
Accounts receivable   $ 542  
Inventories     3,148  
Prepaid expenses     30  
Property and equipment     670  
Intangible assets     2,703  
Goodwill     493  
Accounts payable     (529 )
Other accrued expenses     (37 )
    $ 7,020  

 

The Company accounted for the business combination using the acquisition method of accounting. The Company’s results of operations for the year ended December 31, 2012, include the revenue and expenses of the acquired business since the date of acquisition. The operations of the acquired business have been fully integrated with those of the Company and are not separately reportable. The unaudited pro forma financial results for the year ended December 31, 2012 combines the historical results of the Seller with those of the Company as if this acquisition had been completed as of the beginning of the period presented. There were no material non-recurring pro forma adjustments directly attributable to this acquisition.

 

49
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.

AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(in thousands)

 

Pro Forma Combined Statements of Operations

 

    Year Ended
December 31,
 
    2012  
Net sales   $ 31,296  
Earnings (loss) from operations     (2,263 )
Net earnings (loss)   $ (4,960 )
Basic and diluted net earnings (loss) per share   $ (0.80 )
Basic weighted average shares outstanding     6,216  
Diluted weighted average shares outstanding     6,216  

 

Note 3 – Inventories

 

Inventories, net of reserves, are summarized as follows:

 

    December 31,  
    2013     2012  
Raw materials   $ 5,351     $ 6,493  
Work in process     2,815       2,950  
Finished goods     5,394       6,659  
      13,560       16,102  
Less current inventory     (8,975 )     (11,319 )
      4,585       4,783  
Less reserve for slow moving and obsolete inventory     (2,470 )     (2,185 )
    $ 2,115     $ 2,598  

 

Note 4 - Property, Plant and Equipment

 

Property, plant and equipment are summarized as follows:

 

    December 31,  
    2013     2012  
Land   $ 1,000     $ 1,000  
Building     3,361       3,361  
Machinery and equipment     10,078       9,980  
Furniture and fixtures     412       412  
Office equipment     2,232       2,179  
Building improvements     1,039       1,036  
      18,122       17,968  
Less: Accumulated depreciation and amortization     (14,412 )     (13,959 )
    $ 3,710     $ 4,009  

 

Depreciation expense amounted to approximately $453 and $505 during the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

 

50
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.

AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(in thousands)

 

Note 5 – Debt

 

On August 6, 2008, the Company entered into a Revolving Credit, Term Loan and Security Agreement with Santander Bank, N.A. (formerly known as Sovereign Bank, N.A.) through its Sovereign Business Capital division (“ Santander ”), pursuant to which the Company obtained an $8,000 credit facility from Santander (the “ Santander Financing ”). The Company and Santander entered into a series of amendments to the foregoing Revolving Credit, Term Loan and Security Agreement (as so amended, the “ Santander Agreement ”), including the Sixth Amendment referenced below, which, among other things, adjusted the Santander Financing to $9,350 consisting of (i) a $5,000 asset-based revolving credit facility (“ Revolver ”) and (ii) a $4,350 term loan facility (“ Term Loan ”), each expiring on February 1, 2015. The amounts which may be borrowed under the Revolver are based on certain percentages of Eligible Receivables and Eligible Inventory, as such terms are defined in the Santander Agreement. The obligations of the Company under the Santander Agreement are secured by substantially all of the assets of the Company and certain of its subsidiaries.

 

Under the Santander Agreement, the Revolver currently bears interest at a rate per annum equal to the prime lending rate announced from time to time by Santander (“Prime”) plus 1.25% or the LIBOR rate plus 4.00%. The Term Loan currently bears interest at a rate per annum equal to Prime plus 1.50% or the LIBOR rate plus 4.25%. Prime was 3.25% at December 31, 2013. LIBOR rate loans under the Santander Agreement may be borrowed for interest periods of one, three or six months. The LIBOR rates for interest periods of one-month, three-months and six-months were 0.17%, 0.25% and 0.35%, respectively, at December 31, 2013. The interest rates above are effective on April 1, 2014, pursuant to the terms of the Sixth Amendment described below.

 

On March 28, 2014, the Company entered into a Sixth Amendment to Revolving Credit, Term Loan and Security Agreement with Santander (the “ Sixth Amendment ”) to amend the Santander Financing. The Sixth Amendment (i) reduced the maximum amount available for borrowing under the Revolver from $6,000 to $5,000, (ii) increased the interest rates applicable to the Revolver and the Term Loan by three quarters of one percent, (iii) modified the Company’s fixed charge coverage ratio covenant to eliminate the testing thereof with respect to the trailing 12-month period ended as of December 31, 2013, (iv) eliminated the fixed charge coverage ratio covenant with respect to all periods after December 31, 2013, (v) modified the minimum EBITDA covenant to (a) eliminate the testing thereof with respect to the fiscal year ended December 31, 2013, (b) change the manner of calculation thereof, and (c) imposed a quarterly building minimum EBITDA covenant test, commencing with the fiscal quarter ended on March 31, 2014, and thereafter for the two fiscal quarters ending June 30, 2014, the three fiscal quarters ending September 30, 2014, the four fiscal quarters ending December 31, 2014 and thereafter quarterly on a trailing four fiscal quarter basis, (vi) reduced the advance rate applicable to Eligible Inventory (as defined in the Santander Agreement) from 50% to 35%, with a further reduction in such advance rate to 25% effective on or about June 27, 2014 and (vii) reduced the sublimit on advances against such Eligible Inventory from $3,000 to $2,000. In connection with the Sixth Amendment, the Company paid Santander an amendment fee of $45.

 

On November 13, 2013, the Company entered into a Fifth Amendment to Revolving Credit, Term Loan and Security Agreement with Santander (the “ Fifth Amendment ”) to amend the Santander Financing. The Fifth Amendment (i) reduced the maximum amount available for borrowing under the Revolver from $8,500 to $6,000 and (ii) modified the Company’s fixed charge coverage ratio covenant to eliminate the testing thereof with respect to the trailing 12-month period ended as of September 30, 2013.

 

On March 27, 2013, the Company entered into a Fourth Amendment to Revolving Credit, Term Loan and Security Agreement with Santander (the “ Fourth Amendment ”), to amend the Santander Financing. The Fourth Amendment (i) increased the interest rates applicable to the Revolver and the Term Loan by one half of one percent, effective as of April 1, 2013, subject to being reduced by one quarter of one percent effective as of the date on which the Company delivered to Santander its financial statements for the fiscal quarter ending June 30, 2013, evidencing compliance with the Santander Agreement and continuing compliance with the Santander Agreement through such date of delivery, and further reduced by an additional one quarter of one percent, effective as of the date on which the Company delivers to Santander its audited financial statements for the fiscal year ending December 31, 2013, evidencing compliance with the Santander Agreement and continuing compliance with the Santander Agreement through such date of delivery; (ii) retroactively effective as of December 31, 2012, eliminated the minimum net income covenant and replaced the same with a minimum EBITDA covenant tested as of and for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012 and as of and for each subsequent fiscal year ending on December 31 thereafter, (iii) modified the definition of Net Income (as defined in the Santander Agreement), retroactively effective as of December 31, 2012; and (iv) modified the fixed charge coverage ratio, effective for each of the trailing four fiscal quarters ending in 2013. The Company was in compliance with the Santander Agreement as of June 30, 2013 and, accordingly, the interest rates applicable to both the Revolver and the Term Loan were decreased by one quarter of one percent, effective as of August 14, 2013.

 

51
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.

AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(in thousands)

 

Upon termination of the Revolver, all outstanding borrowings under the Revolver are due. The outstanding principal balance of the Revolver was $1,275 at December 31, 2013. The Term Loan requires equal monthly principal payments of approximately $18 each, plus interest, with the remaining balance due at maturity. The outstanding principal balance of the Term Loan was $3,983 at December 31, 2013.

 

The Santander Agreement contains customary representations and warranties as well as affirmative and negative covenants, including certain financial covenants. The Santander Agreement contains customary events of default, including, among others, non-payment of principal, interest or other amounts when due.

 

The fair value of the debt approximates the recorded value based on the borrowing rates currently available to the Company for loans with similar terms and maturities, as evidenced by the Fifth Amendment.

 

Long-term debt consists of the following:

 

    December 31,  
    2013     2012  
Term loan   $ 3,983     $ 4,183  
Capital leases (Note 6)     180       257  
      4,163       4,440  
Less: Current portion     (270 )     (277 )
    $ 3,893     $ 4,163  

 

Annual maturities of long term debt at December 31, 2013 are $270 in 2014, $3,851 in 2015, $35 in 2016 and $7 in 2017.

 

Note 6 – Commitments and Contingencies

 

Leases

 

The Company leases certain real estate, factory, office and automotive equipment under non-cancellable operating leases and equipment under capital leases expiring at various dates through September, 2017.

 

52
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.

AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(in thousands)

 

Future minimum rental payments, required for all non-cancellable leases are as follows:

 

    Capital     Operating  
2014   $ 78     $ 138  
2015     72       90  
2016     36       10  
2017     7       3  
2018     -       -  
Thereafter     -       -  
Total future minimum lease payments     193     $ 241  
Less: amounts representing interest     (13 )        
Present value of minimum lease payments   $ 180          

 

Property, plant and equipment included capitalized leases of $370 at December 31, 2013 and 2012, less accumulated amortization of $225 and $144 at December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

 

Rent expense was $175 and $191 for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

 

Litigation

 

The Company is a party to certain proceedings incidental to the ordinary course of its business, none of which, in the current opinion of management, is likely to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s business, financial condition, results of operations or cash flows.

 

In addition, on June 19, 2012, K Tech Telecommunications, Inc. (“ K Tech ”) filed a patent infringement complaint against the Company and RLD in the U.S. District Court for the Central District of California (the “ District Court ”), captioned as K Tech v. Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. and R.L. Drake Holdings, LLC , CV12-05316 (the “ Litigation ”). K Tech subsequently filed an amended complaint to add Seller as an additional defendant. The Litigation alleged that the Company and RLD infringe one or more claims of U.S. Patent Nos. 6,785,903, 7,487,533, 7,761,893, and 7,984,469 (the “ K Tech Patents ”) and sought (a) a finding of patent infringement; (b) an injunction against the Company and RLD from further alleged infringement; (c) an award of actual damage suffered by K Tech; and (d) an award of costs relating to the Litigation. The Litigation complaint alleged that Company products DQMx-01, DQMx-02, DQMx-03, DQMx-04, DQMx-10, DQMx-11, DQMx-12, DQMx-13, DQMx-20, DQMx-21, DQMx-22, DQMx-30, DQMx-31, DQMx-40, and MUX-2D-QAM infringe one or more of the K Tech Patents, and alleges that RLD products MQM6000l, MQM10000, DQT1000, and MEQ1000 infringe one or more of the K Tech Patents. All of the aforementioned products are part of the Company’s digital headend product category. On August 29, 2013, the District Court ruled in the Company’s and RLD’s favor on their motion for summary judgment. In particular, the District Court held that three of K Tech’s patents relating to systems and methods for updating the channel information contained in digital television signals, U.S. Patent Nos. 6,785,903, 7,481,533 and 7,761,893 (the “ Specified Patents ”), were invalid because they were rendered obvious by prior art. The District Court agreed with the Company’s and RLD’s argument that all of the patent claims K Tech had asserted under the Specified Patents were invalid by reason of the prior art of, among others, Zenith Electronics Corporation and DiviCom, Inc. (both of which companies had offered for sale products capable of modifying PSIP data prior to the date of K Tech’s earliest patent priority date of April 5, 2000).

 

The Company and RLD are seeking payment from K Tech of their attorney fees and expenses incurred in defending the action. K Tech has appealed the District Court’s ruling to the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Federal Circuit.

 

53
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.

AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(in thousands)

 

Note 7 – Benefit Plans

 

Defined Contribution Plan

 

The Company has a defined contribution plan covering all full time employees qualified under Section 401(k) of the Internal Revenue Code, in which the Company matches a portion of an employee’s salary deferral. The Company’s contributions to this plan were $217 and $205, for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

 

Defined Benefit Pension Plan

 

Substantially all union employees who met certain requirements of age, length of service and hours worked per year were covered by a Company sponsored non-contributory defined benefit pension plan. Benefits paid to retirees are based upon age at retirement and years of credited service. On August 1, 2006, the plan was frozen.

 

The following table sets forth the change in projected benefit obligation, change in plan assets and funded status of the defined benefit pension plan:

 

    2013     2012  
Change in Benefit Obligation                
Benefit obligation at beginning of year   $ 3,307     $ 3,294  
Service cost     0       0  
Interest cost     129       141  
Plan participants’ contributions     0       0  
Amendments     0       0  
Actuarial loss (gain)     (321 )     217  
Business combinations     0       0  
Divestitures     0       0  
Curtailments     0       0  
Settlements     0       (326 )
Special termination benefits     0       0  
Benefits paid     (108 )     (19 )
Currency translation adjustment     0       0  
Benefit obligation at end of year   $ 3,007     $ 3,307  
                 
Change in Plan Assets                
Fair value of plan assets at beginning of year   $ 2,690     $ 2,513  
Actual return on plan assets     640       323  
Employer contribution     200       200  
Business combinations     0       0  
Divestitures     0       0  
Settlements     0       (326 )
Plan participants’ contributions     0       0  
Benefits paid     (108 )     (19 )
Administrative Expenses Paid     0       (1 )
Currency Translation Adjustment     0       0  
Fair value of plan assets at end of year   $ 3,422     $ 2,690  
                 
Funded status   $ 415     $ (617 )
                 

 

54
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.

AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(in thousands)

 

Amounts Recognized in the Statement of Financial Position consists of:            
Noncurrent assets   $ 415     $ 0  
Current liabilities   $ 0     $ 0  
Noncurrent liabilities   $ 0     $ (617 )
Net amount recognized   $ 415     $ (617 )

 

    2013     2012  
             
Change in Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income (Loss)     -       -  
                 
Amounts Recognized in Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income (Loss) consist of:                
Net actuarial loss (gain)   $ 668     $ 1,621  
Prior service cost (credit)     -       -  
Unrecognized net initial obligation (asset)     -       -  
Total (before tax effects)   $ 668     $ 1,621  
                 
Accumulated benefit Obligation End of Year   $ 3,007     $ 3,307  
                 
      2013       2012  
Information for Pension Plans with an Accumulated Benefit Obligation in excess of Plan Assets:                
Projected benefit of obligation     N/A     $ 3,307  
Accumulated benefit obligation     N/A     $ 3,307  
Fair value of plan assets     N/A     $ 2,690  
                 
Weighted-Average Assumptions Used to Determine Benefit Obligation in Excess of Plan Assets:                
Discount Rate     4.90 %     4.00 %
Salary Scale     N/A       N/A  
                 
Components of Net Periodic Benefit Cost and Other Amounts Recognized in Other Comprehensive Income (Loss)                
Net periodic cost                
Service cost   $ 0     $ 0  
Interest cost     129       141  
Expected return on plan assets     (191 )     (175 )
Recognized prior service cost (credit)     0       0  
Recognized actuarial (gain) loss     183       230  
Recognized net initial obligation (asset)     0       0  
Recognized actuarial (gain) loss due to curtailments     0       0  
Recognized actuarial (gain) loss due to settlements     0       160  
Recognized actuarial (gain) loss due to special termination benefits     0       0  
Net periodic benefit cost   $ 121     $ 356  
                 

 

55
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.

AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(in thousands)

 

Other Changes in Plan Assets and Benefit Obligations Recognized in Other Comprehensive Income (Loss)                
Net actuarial loss (gain)   $ (770 )   $ 69  
Recognized actuarial loss (gain)     (183 )     (390 )
Prior service cost (credit)     0       0  
Recognized prior service cost (credit)     0       0  
Total net obligation     0       0  
Total recognized in other comprehensive income (before tax effects)   $ (953 )   $ (321 )
                 
Total recognized in net periodic benefit cost and other comprehensive income (loss) (before tax effects)   $ (832 )   $ 36  
                 

 

    2013     2012  
Amounts Expected to be Recognized in Net Periodic Cost in the Coming Year                
(Gain)/loss recognition   $ 47     $ 181  
Prior service cost recognition   $ 0     $ 0  
Net initial obligations/(asset) recognition   $ 0     $ 0  
                 
Weighted-Average Assumptions Used to Determine Net Periodic Cost for Fiscal Periods Ending as of December 31                
Discount rate     4.00 %     4.50 %
Expected asset return     7.00 %     7.00 %
Salary Scale     N/A       N/A  
Plan Assets                

 

Asset Category   Expected Long-
Term Return
    Target Allocation     2013     2012  
Equity securities     8.50 %     55 %     82 %     77 %
Debt securities     5.50 %     45 %     18 %     23 %
Total     7.00 %     100 %     100 %     100 %
                                 

 

Estimated Future Benefit Payments        
Expected company contributions in the following fiscal year   $ -  
Expected Benefit Payments:        
In the first year following the disclosure date   $ 69  
In the second year following the disclosure date   $ 105  
In the third year following the disclosure date   $ 117  
In the fourth year following the disclosure date   $ 81  
In the fifth year following the disclosure date   $ 136  
In the sixth year following the disclosure date   $ 737  

 

ASC Topic 820, “Fair Value Measurements and Disclosures” (“ ASC 820 ”), establishes a framework for measuring fair value. That framework provides a fair value hierarchy that prioritizes the inputs to valuation techniques used to measure fair value. This hierarchy consists of three broad levels: Level 1 inputs consist of unadjusted quoted prices in active markets for identical assets and have the highest priority, Level 2 inputs consist of observable inputs other than quoted prices for similar assets, and Level 3 inputs have the lowest priority. The plan uses appropriate valuation techniques based on the available inputs to measure the fair value of its investments. When available, the plan measures fair value using Level 1 inputs because they generally provide the most reliable evidence of fair value. Level 3 inputs were used only when Level 1 or Level 2 inputs were not available. The three levels of the fair value hierarchy under ASC 820 are described below:

 

56
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.

AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(in thousands)

 

Level 1

 

Inputs to the valuation methodology are unadjusted quoted prices for identical assets or liabilities in active markets that the plan has the ability to access.

 

Level 2

 

Inputs to the valuation methodology include:

 

Quoted prices for similar assets or liabilities in active markets

 

Quoted prices for identical or similar assets or liabilities in inactive markets

 

Inputs other than quoted prices that are observable for the asset or liability

 

Inputs that are derived principally from or corroborated by observable market data by correlation or other means

 

If the asset or liability has a specified (contractual) term, the Level 2 input must be observable for substantially the full term of the asset or liability.

 

Level 3

 

Inputs to the valuation methodology are unobservable and significant to the fair value measurement.

 

The asset’s or liability’s fair value measurement level within the fair value hierarchy is based on the lowest level of any input that is significant to the fair value measurement. Valuation techniques used need to maximize the use of observable inputs and minimize the use of unobservable inputs.

 

Following is a description of the valuation methodologies used for assets measured at fair value:

 

Pooled separate accounts: Units of pooled separate accounts that are invested mainly in short term securities, such as commercial paper; fixed securities, such as asset backed securities, residential mortgage backed securities, commercial mortgage backed securities and government bonds; and international stocks, which have observable level 1 or 2 inputs, including quoted prices for similar assets, are valued per unit using a pricing service, Interactive Data Corporation. Units of pooled separate accounts that are invested directly in mutual funds or domestic stocks which have observable level 1 inputs are used in determining the net asset value (NAV) of the pooled separate account, which is not publicly quoted.

 

The methods described above may produce a fair value calculation that may not be indicative of net realizable value or reflective of future fair values. Furthermore, while the plan believes its valuation methods are appropriate and consistent with other market participants, the use of different methodologies or assumptions to determine the fair value of certain financial instruments could result in a different fair value measurement at the reporting date.

 

The plan invests 100% in pooled separate accounts which are valued utilizing level 2 inputs.

 

Note 8 - Related Party Transactions

 

As of December 31, 2013 and 2012, the Chief Executive Officer was indebted to the Company in the amount of $117 and $123, respectively, for which no interest has been charged. This indebtedness arose from a series of cash advances, the latest of which was advanced in February 2002 and is included in other assets at December 31, 2013 and 2012. Payments on this indebtedness ceased in November 2008 when the Chief Executive Officer filed a voluntary petition under Chapter 11 of the United States Bankruptcy Code and the indebtedness became subject to the automatic stay provisions of the United States Bankruptcy Code. On July 29, 2009 a plan of reorganization in connection with the Chief Executive Officer’s bankruptcy case was confirmed by the United States Bankruptcy Court for the District of New Jersey.

 

57
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.

AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(in thousands)

 

Under the confirmed plan of reorganization, the Chief Executive Officer will be obligated to pay a pro-rata share, with all other unsecured pre-petition obligations, of the excess, if any, of his disposable income after the payment of all administrative claims and other expenses. The actual amount that the Company may expect to receive pursuant to the confirmed plan and the date on which required payments would commence are not presently determinable. Since May 2010, however, the Chief Executive Officer has made elective payments to the Company to reduce the indebtedness. Such elective payments aggregated $24.

 

Note 9 - Concentration of Credit Risk

 

Financial instruments that potentially subject the Company to significant concentrations of credit risk consist principally of cash deposits and trade accounts receivable.

 

The Company maintains cash balances at several banks located in the northeastern United States of which, at times, may exceed insurance limits and expose the Company to credit risk. As part of its cash management process, the Company periodically reviews the relative credit standing of these banks.

 

Credit risk with respect to trade accounts receivable was concentrated with three of the Company’s customers in each of 2013 and 2012. These customers accounted for approximately 55% of the Company’s outstanding trade accounts receivable at both December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. The Company performs ongoing credit evaluations of its customers’ financial condition, uses credit insurance and requires collateral, such as letters of credit, to mitigate its credit risk. The deterioration of the financial condition of one or more of its major customers could adversely impact the Company’s operations. From time to time where the Company determines that circumstances warrant, such as when a customer agrees to commit to a large blanket purchase order, the Company extends payment terms beyond its standard payment terms.

 

The Company’s largest customer accounted for approximately 22% and 18% of the Company’s sales in each of the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. This customer accounted for approximately 16% and 25% of the Company’s outstanding trade accounts receivable at December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. A second customer accounted for approximately 12% of the Company’s sales in the year ended December 31, 2013. This customer accounted for approximately 15% and 14% of the Company’s outstanding trade accounts receivable at December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. A third customer accounted for approximately 14% of the Company’s sales in the year ended December 31, 2012. This customer accounted for approximately 23% and 17% of the Company’s outstanding accounts receivable at December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. The Company had sales outside the United States of approximately 5% and 5% in each of years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, respectively.

 

Note 10 – Stock Repurchase Program

 

On July 24, 2002, the Company commenced a stock repurchase program to acquire up to $300 of its outstanding common stock (the “ 2002 Program ”). The stock repurchase was funded by a combination of the Company’s cash on hand and borrowings against its revolving line of credit. On February 13, 2007, the Company announced a new stock repurchase program to acquire up to an additional 100 shares of its outstanding common stock (the “ 2007 Program ”). As of December 31, 2013, the Company can purchase up to $72 of its common stock under the 2002 Program and up to 100 shares of its common stock under the 2007 Program. The Company may, in its discretion, continue making purchases under the 2002 Program up to its limits, and thereafter to make purchases under the 2007 Program. During 2013 and 2012, the Company did not purchase any of its Common Stock under the 2002 Program or 2007 Program.

 

58
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.

AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(in thousands)

  

Note 11 – Preferred Stock

 

The Company is authorized to issue 5,000 shares of preferred stock with such designations, voting and other rights and preferences as may be determined from time to time by the Board of Directors. At December 31, 2013 and 2012, there were no outstanding preferred shares.

 

Note 12 – Stock Option Plans

 

In October, 1995, the Company’s Board of Directors and stockholders approved the 1995 Long Term Incentive Plan (the “ 1995 Plan ”). The 1995 Plan provided for grants of “incentive stock options” or nonqualified stock options, and awards of restricted stock, to executives and key employees, including officers and employee Directors. The 1995 Plan is administered by the Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors, which determines the optionees and the terms of the options granted under the 1995 Plan, including the exercise price, number of shares subject to the option and the exercisability thereof, as well as the recipients and number of shares awarded for restricted stock awards; provided, however, that no employee may receive stock options or restricted stock awards which would result, separately or in combination, in the acquisition of more than 100 shares of Common Stock of the Company under the 1995 Plan. The exercise price of incentive stock options granted under the 1995 Plan must be equal to at least the fair market value of the Common Stock on the date of grant. With respect to any optionee who owns stock representing more than 10% of the voting power of all classes of the Company’s outstanding capital stock, the exercise price of any incentive stock option must be equal to at least 110% of the fair market value of the Common Stock on the date of grant, and the term of the option may not exceed five years. The term of all other incentive stock options granted under the 1995 Plan may not exceed ten years. The aggregate fair market value of Common Stock (determined as of the date of the option grant) for which an incentive stock option may for the first time become exercisable in any calendar year may not exceed $100. The exercise price for nonqualified stock options is established by the Compensation Committee, and may be more or less than the fair market value of the Common Stock on the date of grant.

 

Stockholders have previously approved a total of 1,150 shares of common stock for issuance under the 1995 Plan, as amended to date. The 1995 Plan expired by its terms on November 30, 2005.

 

In May, 1998, the stockholders of the Company approved the Amended and Restated 1996 Director Option Plan (the “ Amended 1996 Plan ”). Under the Amended 1996 Plan, Directors who were not then currently employed by the Company or any subsidiary of the Company and had not been so employed within the preceding six months were eligible to receive options from time to time to purchase the number of shares of Common Stock determined by the Board in its discretion; provided, however, that no Director was permitted to receive options to purchase more than 5 shares of Common Stock in any one calendar year. The exercise price for such shares was the fair market value thereof on the date of grant, and the options vested as determined in each case by the Board of Directors. Options granted under the Amended 1996 Plan must be exercised within 10 years from the date of grant. A maximum of 200 shares of Common Stock are subject to issuance under the Amended 1996 Plan, as amended. The plan is administered by the Board of Directors. The Amended 1996 Plan expired by its terms on January 2, 2006.

 

In May 2005, the stockholders of the Company approved the 2005 Employee Equity Incentive Plan (the “ Employee Plan ”), which initially authorized the Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors (the “ Committee ”) to grant a maximum of 500 shares of equity based and other performance based awards to executive officers and other key employees of the Company. In May 2007, the stockholders of the Company approved an amendment to the Employee Plan to increase the maximum number of equity based and other performance awards to 1,100. In May 2010, the stockholders of the Company approved an amendment to the Employee Plan to increase the maximum number of equity based and other performance awards to 1,600. The Committee determines the recipients and the terms of the awards granted under the Employee Plan, including the type of awards, exercise price, number of shares subject to the award and the exercisability thereof.

 

In May 2005, the stockholders of the Company approved the 2005 Director Equity Incentive Plan (the “ Director Plan ”). The Director Plan authorizes the Board of Directors (the “ Board ”) to grant a maximum of 200 shares of equity based and other performance based awards to non-employee directors of the Company. In May 2010, the stockholders of the Company approved an amendment to the Director Plan to increase the maximum number of equity based and other performance awards to 400. The Board determines the recipients and the terms of the awards granted under the Director Plan, including the type of awards, exercise price, number of shares subject to the award and the exercisability thereof.

 

59
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.

AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(in thousands)

  

The following tables summarize information about stock options outstanding for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012:

  

    1995
Plan (#)
    Weighted-
Average
Exercise
Price ($)
    1996
Plan (#)
    Weighted-
Average
Exercise Price
($)
    2005
Employee
Plan (#)
    Weighted-
Average
Exercise
Price ($)
    2005
Director
Plan (#)
    Weighted-
Average
Exercise
Price ($)
 
Shares under option:                                                                
Options outstanding at January 1, 2012     61       3.84       80       3.10       1,001       1.86       277       1.51  
Granted     -       -       -       -       288       1.05       52       1.05  
Exercised     -       -       -       -       -       -       -       -  
Forfeited     -       -       (50 )     3.16       (64 )     1.88       (80 )     1.55  
Options outstanding at December 31, 2012     61       3.84       30       3.00       1,225       1.67       249       1.40  
Granted     -       -       -       -       300       1.00       50       1.00  
Exercised     -       -       -       -       (1 )     0.76       -       -  
Forfeited     -       -       (10 )     2.05       (42 )     0.99       -       -  
Options outstanding at December 31, 2013     61       3.84       20       3.48       1,482       1.56       299       1.34  
Options exercisable at December 31, 2013     61       3.84       20       3.48       926       1.81       249       1.40  
Weighted-average fair value of options granted during:                                                                
2012     -               -             $ 0.72             $ 0.72          
2013     -               -             $ 0.67             $ 0.67          

 

Total options available for grant were 219 and 501 at December 31, 2013 and December 31, 2012, respectively.

 

    Options Outstanding           Options Exercisable  
Range of Exercise
Prices ($)
  Number of
Options
Outstanding
at 12/31/13
    Weighted-
Average
Remaining
Contractual
Life
    Weighted-
Average
Exercise Price
($)
    Number
Exercisable
at 12/31/13
    Weighted-
Average
Exercise Price
($)
 
                               
1995 Plan: 3.84     61       1.2       3.84       61       3.84  
                                         
1996 Plan: 2.05 to 3.85     20       0.9       3.48       20       3.48  
                                         
2005 Employee Plan: 0.76 to 3.84     1,482       5.8       1.56       926       1.81  
                                         
2005 Director Plan: 0.76 to 1.98     299       6.5       1.34       249       1.40  

 

60
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.

AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(in thousands)

 

The exercisable options under each of the Plans at December 31, 2013 had an intrinsic value of $0.

 

In August 2012, the Company issued a warrant to purchase 100 shares of common stock of the Company to Adaptive Micro-Ware, Inc., an Indiana corporation (“ AMW ”). The warrant was granted as partial consideration in connection with a commercial licensing and manufacturing agreement between the Company and AMW. The warrant is exercisable at $1.09 per share, and the warrant vested one-third (1/3) on May 23, 2013 and vests another one-third (1/3) on each of May 23, 2014 and 2015. The fair value of the warrant was not deemed to be material.

 

Note 13 - Income Taxes

 

The following summarizes the provision (benefit) for income taxes:

 

    2013     2012  
Current:                
Federal     (9 )        
State and local   $ 87     $ 24  
    $ 78     $ 24  
Deferred:                
Federal     (936 )     (699 )
State and local     (368 )     (342 )
      (1,304 )     (1,041 )
Valuation allowance     1,226       3,349  
Provision (benefit) for income taxes   $ -     $ 2,332  

 

The provision (benefit) for income taxes differs from the amounts computed by applying the applicable Federal statutory rates due to the following:

 

    2013     2012  
Provision (benefit) for Federal income taxes at the statutory rate   $ (959 )   $ (961 )
State and local income taxes, net of Federal benefit     (153 )     (139 )
Permanent differences:                
Stock compensation     92       88  
Other     24       21  
Net operating loss true up     -       (162 )
Change in valuation allowance     1,226       3,349  
Other     (230 )     136  
Provision (benefit) for income taxes   $ -     $ 2,332  

 

61
 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.

AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(in thousands)

  

 

Significant components of the Company’s deferred tax assets and liabilities are as follows:

 

    December 31,  
    2013     2012  
Deferred tax assets:                
Allowance for doubtful accounts   $ 79     $ 83  
Inventories     1,478       1,176  
Intangible     97       137  
Net operating loss carry forward     7,645       6,683  
Other     85       85  
Total deferred tax assets     9,384       8,164  
Deferred tax liabilities:                
Depreciation     (58 )     (64 )
Indefinite life intangibles     (63 )     (30 )
Total deferred tax liabilities     (121 )     (94 )
      9,263       8,070  
Valuation allowance     (9,326 )     (8,100 )
Net   $ (63 )   $ (30 )

 

For the years ended December 31, 2013, the Company had approximately $19,671 and $15,495 of federal and state net operating loss carryovers ("NOL"), respectively, which begin to expire in 2023.

  

The change in the valuation allowance for the years ended December 31, 2013 and December 31, 2012 was $1,226 and $3,349, respectively.

  

In assessing the realization of deferred tax assets, management considers whether it is more likely than not that some portion or all of the deferred tax assets will be realized. The ultimate realization of the deferred tax assets is dependent upon the generation of future taxable income during the periods in which those temporary differences become deductible. Management considers the scheduled reversal of deferred tax liabilities, projected future taxable income and taxing strategies in making this assessment. The deferred tax liability related to indefinite life intangible assets cannot be used in this determination. Therefore, the deferred tax liability related to indefinite life intangibles acquired in 2012 cannot be considered when determining the ultimate realization of deferred tax assets. The decision to record this valuation allowance was based on management evaluating all positive and negative evidence.  The significant negative evidence includes a loss for the current year, a cumulative pre-tax loss for the three years ended December 31, 2013, the inability to carryback the net operating losses, limited future reversals of existing temporary differences and the limited availability of tax planning strategies.  The Company expects to continue to provide a full valuation allowance until, or unless, it can sustain a level of profitability that demonstrates its ability to utilize these assets.

 

The Company had no change in its liability for uncertain tax position during 2013 and no liabilities for uncertain tax positions as of December 31, 2013. ASC 740 discusses the classification of related interest and penalties on income taxes. The Company’s policy is to record interest and penalties incurred in connection with income taxes as a component of income tax expense. No interest or penalties were recorded during the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012.

 

The Company is required to file U.S. federal and state income tax returns. These returns are subject to audit by tax authorities beginning with the year ended December 31, 2010.

  

62
 

  

SIGNATURES

 

Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the Registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.

 

  BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.
     
Date: March 31, 2014 By: / s / James A. Luksch
     James A. Luksch
     Chief Executive Officer
     
  By: /s/ Eric Skolnik
     Eric Skolnik
     Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer

 

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the Registrant and in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

 

Name   Title   Date
         
/s/ James A. Luksch   Director and Chief Executive Officer   March 31, 2014
James A. Luksch   (Principal Executive Officer)    
         
/s/ Eric Skolnik   Senior Vice President and Chief   March 31, 2014
Eric Skolnik   Financial Officer (Principal Financial    
    Officer and Principal Accounting Officer)    
         
/s/ Robert J. Pallé, Jr.   Director, President, Chief Operating   March 31, 2014
Robert J. Pallé, Jr.   Officer and Secretary    
         
/s/ Anthony Bruno   Director   March 31, 2014
Anthony Bruno        
         
/s/ James F. Williams   Director   March 31, 2014
James F. Williams        
         
/s/ Charles E. Dietz   Director   March 31, 2014
Charles E. Dietz        
         
/s/ Gary P. Scharmett   Director   March 31, 2014
Gary P. Scharmett        
         
/s/ Steven L. Shea   Director   March 31, 2014
Steven L. Shea        

 

63

 

 

BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.

 

BARGAINING UNIT PENSION PLAN

 

AND

 

TRUST AGREEMENT

 

AMENDED AND RESTATED

 

EFFECTIVE

 

FEBRUARY 1, 2011

 

 
 

 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

ARTICLE I – DEFINITION OF TERMS 1
ARTICLE II – FUNDING POLICY FOR PLAN BENEFITS 15
2.01 Funding Method 15
2.02 Funding Standard Account 15
2.03 Investment Policy 15
2.04 Insurance Contracts 15
2.05 Investment Fund 15
2.06 Nontransferability of Annuity Contracts 16
2.07 Power to Purchase Keyman Insurance 16
2.08 Predecessor Plan Assets 16
ARTICLE III – ELIGIBILITY AND PARTICIPATION 17
3.01 Age and Service Requirements 17
3.02 Plan Administrator to Furnish Eligibility Information 17
3.03 Information to be Provided by Employee 17
3.04 Reclassification Out of or Into the Excluded Class 17
3.05 Breaks in Service 18
3.06 Re-employment and Commencement of Participation 18
3.07 Election Not To Participate 18
3.08 Effect of Participation 18
ARTICLE IV – ELIGIBILITY FOR RETIREMENT BENEFITS 19
4.01 Normal Retirement 19
4.02 Early Retirement 19
4.03 Postponed Retirement 19
4.04 Disability Retirement 19
ARTICLE V – AMOUNT OF RETIREMENT BENEFITS 21
5.01 Normal Retirement Benefit 21
5.02 Early Retirement Benefit 21
5.03 Postponed Retirement Benefit 21
5.04 Disability Retirement Benefit 22
ARTICLE VI – FORMS AND PAYMENT OF RETIREMENT BENEFITS 23
6.01 Normal Form of Retirement Benefit 23
6.02 Automatic Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity 23
6.03 Optional Forms of Retirement Benefit 23
6.04 Payment of Small Amounts 24
6.05 Restrictions on Forms of Retirement Benefits 25
6.06 Notice and Election of Form of Retirement Benefit 25
6.07 Consent of Spouse 26
6.08 Required Distributions 27
6.09 When Benefits Are Payable: 29
6.10 Manner of Providing Benefits 31
6.11 Direct Rollovers 31
ARTICLE VII – DEATH BENEFITS PRIOR TO RETIREMENT 34
7.01 General 34
7.02 Qualified Pre-retirement Survivor Annuity 34

 

 
 

 

7.03 Payment of Death Benefits 35
7.04 Required Distributions 35
ARTICLE VIII – TERMINATION OF EMPLOYMENT AND VESTING 38
8.01 Vesting of Benefits 38
8.02 Vesting Schedule 38
8.03 Amendments to the Vesting Schedule 38
8.04 Distribution of Vested Accrued Benefit 39
8.05 Accrued Benefit Upon Re-employment 39
8.06 Repayment of Distribution 40
8.07 Breaks in Service and Vesting 40
8.08 Effect of Social Security Changes 41
8.09 Disposition of Non-Vested Benefits 41
ARTICLE IX – CONTRIBUTIONS BY PARTICIPANTS 42
9.01 Mandatory Participant Contributions 42
9.02 Voluntary Contributions by Participants 42
9.03 Rollover Contributions by Participants 42
ARTICLE X – LOANS TO PARTICIPANTS 43
10.01 Availability of Loans 43
ARTICLE XI – RESTRICTIONS TO PREVENT DISCRIMINATION 44
11.01 Restrictions to Prevent Discrimination 44
11.02 Repayment of Restricted Benefits 44
ARTICLE XII - FIDUCIARY DUTIES 46
12.01 General Fiduciary Duty 46
12.02 Allocation of Responsibilities 46
12.03 Delegation of Responsibilities 46
12.04 Liability for Allocation or Delegation of Responsibilities 46
12.05 Liability for Co-Fiduciaries 47
12.06 Same Person May Serve in More than One Capacity 47
ARTICLE XIII - THE PLAN ADMINISTRATOR 48
13.01 Appointment of Plan Administrator 48
13.02 Acceptance by Plan Administrator 48
13.03 Signature of Plan Administrator 48
13.04 Appointment of an Investment Manager 48
13.05 Duties of the Plan Administrator 48
13.06 Claims Procedure 49
13.07 Claims Review Procedure: 50
13.08 Compensation and Expenses of Plan Administrator 53
13.09 Removal or Resignation 53
13.10 Records of Plan Administrator 53
13.11 Other Responsibilities 53
ARTICLE XIV – THE TRUSTEE 54
14.01 Appointment of Trustee 54
14.02 Acceptance by Trustee 54
14.03 Signature of Trustee 54
14.04 Co-Trustees 54
14.05 Allocation of Responsibilities 54

 

 
 

 

14.06 Removal or Resignation 54
14.07 Action by Trustee 55
14.08 Records and Statement 55
14.09 Responsibility for Plan Assets 55
14.10 Investment Powers and Duties of the Trustee 55
14.11 Other Powers of the Trustee 56
14.12 Duties of the Trustee Regarding Payments 59
14.13 Compensation and Expenses of Trustee 59
14.14 Payment of Expenses 59
14.15 Indemnification of Trustee 59
ARTICLE XV – THE EMPLOYER AND PLAN SPONSOR 1
15.01 Notification 1
15.02 Record Keeping 1
15.03 Bonding 1
15.04 Signature of Employer 1
15.05 Plan Counsel and Expenses 1
15.06 Other Responsibilities 1
15.07 Employer Contributions 2
ARTICLE XVI – AMENDMENT OF PLAN 3
16.01 Power to Amend 3
16.02 Limitations on Amendments 3
16.03 Method of Amendment 4
16.04 Notice of Amendment 4
ARTICLE XVII – TERMINATION OF PLAN 5
17.01 Right to Terminate 5
17.02 Effect of Termination 5
17.03 Manner of Distribution 8
17.04 Residual Amounts 8
17.05 Termination of an Employer 8
17.06 Partial Termination 8
17.07 Effect of Partial Termination 8
ARTICLE XVIII - THE INSURER 9
18.01 Actions Consistent with Terms of Contracts 9
18.02 Insurer not a Party to Plan 9
18.03 Signature of Trustee 9
18.04 Validity of Contracts 9
ARTICLE XIX – LIMITATIONS ON BENEFITS 10
19.01 Special Definitions 10
19.02 Limitations Applicable to this Plan 14
19.03 Aggregation of Plans 21
19.04 Formerly Affiliated Plans of the Employer 21
19.05 Plans of a Predecessor Employer 21
19.06 Benefits Under Terminated Plans 22
19.07 Benefits Transferred From the Plan 22
19.08 Special Rules 22
ARTICLE XX – TOP-HEAVY PROVISIONS 23

 

 
 

 

20.01 Application 23
20.02 Special Definitions 23
20.03 Top-Heavy Minimum Accrued Benefit: For any Plan Year in which the Plan is Top-Heavy 27
20.04 Nonforfeitability of Minimum Accrued Benefit 28
20.05 Minimum Vesting Provision 28
ARTICLE XXI – MISCELLANEOUS 29
21.01 Participant’s Rights 29
21.02 Alienation 29
21.03 Actions Consistent with Terms of Plan 30
21.04 Performance of Duties 31
21.05 Validity of Plan 31
21.06 Legal Action 31
21.07 Gender and Number 31
21.08 Uniformity 31
21.09 Headings 31
21.10 Receipt and Release for Payments 31
21.11 Payments of Minors, Incompetents 32
21.12 Missing Persons 32
21.13 Merger or Consolidation 32
21.14 Prohibition Against Diversion of Funds 33
21.15 Period of the Trust 33
21.16 Misstatement of Age 33
21.17 Return of Contributions to the Employer 33
21.18 Counterparts 34
21.19 Limitations Based on Funded Status of the Plan 34
21.20 Limitations on Unpredictable Contingent Event Benefit 36

 

 
 

 

ESTABLISHMENT AND ADOPTION

 

THIS AGREEMENT AND DECLARATION OF TRUST is signed and executed on the day set forth below, but effective for all purposes as of February 1, 2011 by and between Blonder-Tongue Laboratories, Inc., a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of New Jersey, with principal offices located at One Jake Brown Road, Old Bridge, New Jersey, hereinafter referred to as the “Plan Sponsor”, and James Luksch and Robert Palle, hereinafter collectively referred to as the “Trustee”.

 

WITNESSETH

 

WHEREAS, effective as of January 1, 1976, Electrocomp, Inc. (a predecessor employer) established the Electrocomp Inc. Bargaining Unit Pension Plan (“Prior Plan”) and executed a Trust Agreement to provide retirement benefits for eligible Employees; and

 

WHEREAS, Blonder-Tongue Laboratories, Inc. became the successor Employer and Local No. 2066, IBEW the successor Union under said plan; and

 

WHEREAS, the Prior Plan and Trust Agreement was subsequently amended and restated as of February 1, 1984; February 1, 1987; February 1, 2001 and February 1, 2006; and

 

WHEREAS, Blonder-Tongue Laboratories, Inc. now wishes to amend and restate the Prior Plan and Trust Agreement for the benefit of its Employees who shall meet the eligibility requirements hereinafter set forth and for the benefit of the beneficiaries of such Employees, respectively, as hereinafter provided; and

 

WHEREAS, it is intended that this Plan and Trust meet all the requirements of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 and the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 and the Plan and Trust shall be interpreted, wherever possible, to comply with the terms of the Code and ERISA and all formal regulations and rulings issued thereunder; and

 

WHEREAS, the provisions of this agreement shall apply only to persons who are, or who become, Participants in this Plan on or after the effective date of this agreement. Except as specifically provided in this agreement, the provisions of the Prior Plan will continue to apply to persons who are Former Participants on the effective date of this agreement, unless and until such time as such persons may again become Participants in this Plan.

 

THEREFORE, in consideration of the premises, it is hereby agreed as set forth below.

 

( i )
 

 

ARTICLE I – DEFINITION OF TERMS

 

As used in this Plan and Trust Agreement the following terms shall have the following meanings unless a different meaning is plainly required by the context:

 

1.01        “Accrued Benefit” shall mean, as of any given date, a monthly amount payable at a Participant’s Normal Retirement Date, on the Normal Form of Retirement Benefit, equal to the Normal Retirement Benefit which a Participant would be entitled to at his Normal Retirement Age, based on the Participant’s Years of Credited Service as of the given date. In no event shall the amount of a Participant’s Accrued Benefit be less than his Accrued Benefit under the terms of the Prior Plan as of January 31, 1987.

 

The Accrued Benefit shall be frozen effective August 1, 2006 and shall not increase thereafter.

 

1.02        “Actuarial Equivalent” shall mean an amount or series of amounts whose actuarial present value is equal to the actuarial present value of a given amount or series of amounts, determined on the basis of the Unisex Pension 1984 Mortality Table, set back 3 years, and interest at the rate of 6% per year, compounded annually.

 

Provided that, for purposes of determining whether a benefit shall be paid as a single lump sum payment under the automatic cash-out provisions of Section 6.04, and for purposes of determining the amount of any distribution of an Accrued Benefit paid as a single lump sum payment or as an annuity payable for a period other than the life of the Participant or the joint lives of the Participant and spouse, the actuarial present values shall be determined based on the Applicable Mortality Table and the Applicable Interest Rate.

 

1.03        “Affiliated Service Group” shall mean a group of corporations, partnerships, or other organizations which is an affiliated service group as defined in Code Section 414(m).

 

1.04        “Age” shall mean a person’s attained age.

 

1.05        “Alternate Payee” shall mean any spouse, former spouse, child or other dependent of a Participant or Former Participant who is recognized by a Qualified Domestic Relations Order as having a right to receive all, or a portion of, the benefits payable under this Plan with respect to such Participant or Former Participant.

 

1.06        “Annual Compensation” shall mean the amount of compensation used for purposes of compliance with Code Section 415, as defined in Paragraph (c) of Section 19.01, during the calendar year that ends within a given Plan Year.

 

However, for any Self-Employed Individual, Annual Compensation shall mean Earned Income.

 

1
 

 

Notwithstanding the above, for purposes of determining a Participant’s Accrued Benefit in any Plan Year beginning on or after January 1, 2002, the Annual Compensation taken into account for any year shall not exceed two hundred thousand dollars ($200,000), as adjusted by the Commissioner for increases in the cost of living after 2002 in accordance with Code Section 401(a)(17)(B). In determining benefit accruals in Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2001, the annual compensation limit for determination periods beginning before January 1, 2002 shall be $200,000. The cost of living adjustment in effect on January 1 of any calendar year shall apply to any determination period beginning in such calendar year. For this purpose, the “determination period” is any period not exceeding twelve (12) months over which compensation is determined. For any period of less than twelve (12) months, the limit on Annual Compensation in this paragraph shall be multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of months in the period, and the denominator of which is twelve (12).

 

Effective October 13, 1996, Annual Compensation shall include imputed compensation during an Employee’s Qualified Military Service. An Employee’s imputed compensation during Qualified Military Service shall be:

 

(a) The compensation the Employee would have received but for his Qualified Military Service; or

 

(b) If such compensation is not reasonably certain, the compensation the Employee would have received had he received compensation during his Qualified Military Service at his average rate during the twelve (12) months immediately preceding his Qualified Military Service or, if shorter, his entire period of employment preceding his Qualified Military Service.

 

1.07        “Annuity Starting Date” shall mean the first day of the first period for which an amount is payable as an annuity. In the case of a benefit not payable in the form of an annuity, the Annuity Starting Date shall be the date on which such benefit is actually paid or begins to be paid.

 

1.08        “Applicable Interest Rate” shall mean, with respect to determining the amount of a benefit with an Annuity Starting Date on or after February 1, 2008, the interest rate prescribed under Code Section 417(e)(3)(C) (as it reads effective on and after the first day of the 2008 Plan Year) as in effect for the first calendar month preceding the Plan Year in which the distribution is made.

 

1.09        “Applicable Mortality Table” shall mean, with respect to determining the amount of a benefit with an Annuity Starting Date on or after February 1, 2008, the mortality table prescribed under Code Section 417(e)(3)(B) (as it reads effective on and after the first day of the 2008 Plan Year)

 

1.10        “Average Monthly Compensation” shall mean Average Annual Compensation divided by twelve (12).

 

1.11        “Beneficiary” shall mean any person, persons, or trust designated by a Participant in such form as the Plan Administrator may prescribe to receive any death benefit that may be payable hereunder if such person or persons survive the Participant. This designation may be revoked at any time in similar manner and form. In the event of the death of the designated Beneficiary prior to the death of the Participant, the Contingent Beneficiary shall be entitled to receive any death benefit.

 

2
 

 

1.12        “Board of Directors” shall mean the Board of Directors of Blonder-Tongue Laboratories, Inc.

 

1.13        “Code” shall mean the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

 

1.14        “Contingent Beneficiary” shall mean the person, persons, or trust duly designated by the Participant to receive any death benefit from the Plan in the event the designated Beneficiary does not survive the Participant.

 

1.15        “Controlled Group” shall mean a group of corporations which constitutes a controlled group of corporations as defined in Code Section 414(b).

 

1.16        “Domestic Relations Order” shall mean any judgment, decree, or order (including approval of a property settlement agreement) which:

 

(a) Relates to the provision of child support, alimony payments, or marital property rights to a spouse, child, or other dependent of a Participant or Former Participant; and

 

(b) Is made pursuant to a state domestic relations law (including a community property law).

 

1.17        “Earliest Retirement Age” shall mean the Age of a Participant on the earliest date on which such Participant could elect to receive a Retirement Benefit pursuant to Article IV.

 

1.18        “Earned Income” shall mean an individual’s net earnings from self-employment in the trade or business of the Employer, for which personal services of the individual are a material income-producing factor. Net earnings shall be determined without regard to items not included in gross income and the deductions allocable to such items. Net earnings shall be reduced by contributions by the Employer to this Plan or any other qualified plan to the extent deductible under Code Section 404.

 

1.19        “Effective Date” shall mean February 1, 2011, the Effective Date of this Plan. The Effective Date of the Prior Plan is January 1, 1976.

 

1.20        “Employee” shall mean any person who is employed by the Employer or by any entity which, together with the Employer, is a member of a Controlled Group, Group Under Common Control or Affiliated Service Group or which is required to be Aggregated with the Employer under Code Section 414(o) in a capacity other than solely as a director or independent contractor. The term “Employee” shall include an individual who is a Self-Employed Individual.

 

3
 

 

The term “Employee” shall also include a leased employee of the recipient Employer, but contributions or benefits provided by the leasing organization which are attributable to services performed for the recipient Employer shall be treated as provided by the recipient Employer. If such leased employees constitute not more than twenty percent (20%) of the Employer’s non-highly compensated work force within the meaning of Code Section 414 (n)(5)(C)(ii), the preceding sentence shall not apply to any leased employee who is covered by a money purchase pension plan providing:

 

(a) A non-integrated employer contribution rate of at least ten percent (10%) of compensation; and

 

(b) Immediate participation with respect to any person who has received compensation from the leasing organization of at least one thousand dollars ($1,000) in any one of the four most recent plan years of such plan; and

 

(c) Full and immediate vesting.

 

For purposes of this paragraph, the term “leased employee” means any person who is not an Employee of the recipient Employer who, pursuant to an agreement between the recipient Employer and any other person or organization (leasing organization), has performed services for the recipient Employer (or for the Employer and related persons determined in accordance with Code Section 414(n)(6)) on a substantially full time basis for a period of at least one (1) year and such services are performed under the primary direction or control of the recipient Employer.

 

1.21        “Employer” shall mean the Plan Sponsor and any other entity which, with the authorization of the Plan Sponsor, may adopt this Plan. All such entities shall be treated as a single Employer for all purposes under this Plan, except when otherwise specifically provided.

 

Solely for purposes of determining Years of Eligibility Service, Years of Vesting Service and One Year Breaks in Service, any entity not adopting this Plan which, together with the Plan Sponsor, is a member of a Controlled Group, Group Under Common Control, or Affiliated Service Group shall also be treated as an Employer for the period of time during which such entity was a member of such group.

 

1.22        “Employment Commencement Date” shall mean the date on which the Employee first performs an Hour of Service for the Employer.

 

1.23        “Entry Date” shall mean the date an Employee became or becomes a Participant in the Plan or became a Participant under the Prior Plan. Entry Dates occur on the first day of each Plan Year.

 

1.24        “ERISA” shall mean the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended.

 

1.25        “Excluded Employee” shall mean the following class of Employees who are not eligible to participate in this Plan:

 

4
 

 

(a) Employees whose employment is not governed by the terms of a collective bargaining agreement between Employee representatives and the Employer under which retirement benefits were the subject of good faith bargaining between said Employee representatives and the Employer, for whom coverage under this Plan is provided.

 

1.26        “Fiduciary” shall mean and include the Trustee, Plan Administrator, Plan Sponsor, Investment Manager, and any other person or corporation who –

 

(a) Exercises any discretionary authority or discretionary control respecting management of the Plan or exercises any authority or control respecting management or disposition of its assets;

 

(b) Renders investment advice for a fee or other compensation, direct or indirect, with respect to any moneys or other property of the Plan, or has any authority or responsibility to do so;

 

(c) Has any discretionary authority or discretionary responsibility in the administration of the Plan; or

 

(d) Is described as a “fiduciary” in Sections 3(14) or (21) of ERISA or is designated to carry out fiduciary responsibilities pursuant to this Agreement to the extent permitted by Section 405(c)(1)(B) of ERISA.

 

1.27        “Former Participant” means a person who was a Participant and is retaining a Vested Accrued Benefit under the Plan.

 

1.28        “Group Under Common Control” shall mean a group of trades or businesses (whether or not incorporated) which are under common control as defined in Code Section 414(c).

 

1.29        “Hour of Service” shall mean and be determined as follows:

 

(a) Each hour for which an Employee is paid, or entitled to payment, for the performance of duties for the Employer. These hours shall be credited to the Employee for the year or years in which the duties are performed.

 

(b) Each hour for which an Employee is paid, or entitled to payment, by the Employer on account of a period of time during which no duties are performed (irrespective of whether the employment relationship has terminated) due to vacation, holiday, illness, incapacity (including disability), layoff, jury duty or Leave of Absence. No more than 501 Hours of Service shall be credited under this paragraph for any single continuous period (whether or not such period occurs in a single year). Hours under this paragraph shall be calculated and credited pursuant to Sections 2530.200b-2 of the Department of Labor Regulations which are incorporated herein by this reference.

 

5
 

 

(c) Each hour for which back pay, irrespective of mitigation of damages, is either awarded or agreed to by the Employer. The same Hours of Service shall not be credited both under paragraph (a) or paragraph (b), as the case may be, and under this paragraph (c). These hours shall be credited to the Employee for the year or years to which the award or agreement pertains rather than the year in which the award, agreement or payment is made.

 

(d) Hours of Service shall be determined on the basis of actual hours for which an Employee is paid, entitled to payment or for which back pay is awarded or agreed to.

 

(e) Where the Employer maintains the plan of a predecessor employer, service for such predecessor employer shall be treated as service for the Employer.

 

(f) In the case of an Employee who is absent from work for any period:

 

(1) By reason of the pregnancy of the Employee;

 

(2) By reason of the birth of a child of the Employee;

 

(3) By reason of the placement of a child with the Employee in connection with the adoption of such child by such Employee; or

 

(4) For purposes of caring for such child for a period beginning immediately following such birth or placement;

 

Hours of Service, solely for purposes of determining whether a One-Year Break in Service has occurred, shall include:

 

(1) The Hours of Service which otherwise would normally have been credited to such Employee but for such absence; or

 

(2) In any case in which the Plan is unable to determine the hours described in clause (1), eight (8) Hours of Service per day of such absence,

 

except that the total number of hours treated as Hours of Service under this Section by reason of any such pregnancy or placement shall not exceed five hundred and one (501) hours less the number of Hours of Service credited to an Employee pursuant to Subsections (a) through (e) above, for an absence described in this Subsection (f). The hours described in this Subsection (f) shall be treated as Hours of Service only in the computation period in which the absence from work begins, if an Employee would be prevented from incurring a One-Year Break in Service in such computation period solely because the period of absence is treated as Hours of Service as provided herein; or in any other case, in the immediately following computation period. Notwithstanding the foregoing, no credit will be given pursuant to this Subsection (f) unless the Employee furnishes to the Plan Administrator such timely information as the Plan Administrator may reasonably require to establish that the absence from work is for reasons referred to herein, and the number of days for which there was such an absence.

 

6
 

 

(g) Effective October 13, 1996, an Employee’s Qualified Military Service shall be treated as service for the Employer. An Employee’s imputed Hours of Service during Qualified Military Service shall be:

 

(1) The Hours of Service the Employee would have worked but for his Qualified Military Service; or

 

(2) If such Hours of Service is not reasonably certain, the Hours of Service the Employee would have worked had he worked during his Qualified Military Service at his average rate during the twelve (12) months immediately preceding his Qualified Military Service or, if shorter, his entire period of employment preceding his Qualified Military Service.

 

(h) The Plan Administrator shall determine an Employee’s Hours of Service from records of hours for which the Employee is paid or entitled to payment or for which payment is otherwise due from the Employer. The Plan Administrator may use any records to determine Hours of Service which it considers an accurate reflection of the facts.

 

1.30        “Insurance Contract” shall mean an individual contract, or allocated coverage under a group contract, of life insurance issued by an Insurer.

 

1.31        “Insurer” shall mean any legal reserve life insurance company that may issue insurance or annuity contracts under this Plan.

 

1.32        “Investment Fund” shall mean any assets of the Trust Fund not applied by the Trustee to purchase Insurance Contracts or annuity contracts.

 

1.33        “Investment Manager” shall mean any Fiduciary (other than a Trustee or Named Fiduciary) who:

 

(a) Has the power to manage, acquire or dispose of any asset of the Plan;

 

(b) Is (i) registered as an investment advisor under the Investment Advisors Act of 1940; (ii) a bank as defined in that Act; or (iii) is an insurance company qualified to perform services described in Subsection (a) above under the laws of more than one state; and

 

(c) Has acknowledged in writing that he is a Fiduciary with respect to the Plan.

 

1.34        “Limitation Year” shall mean the Plan Year.

 

7
 

 

1.35        “Month of Employment” shall mean a calendar month during which an Employee is employed by the Employer.

 

1.36        “Named Fiduciary” shall mean the Plan Administrator.

 

1.37        “Normal Retirement Age” shall mean the Age of a Participant on his sixty-fifth (65th) birthday.

 

1.38        “Normal Retirement Date” shall mean the first day of the month coincident with or next following a Participant’s Normal Retirement Age.

 

1.39        “One Year Break in Service” shall mean a twelve (12) consecutive month period during which an Employee has not completed more than five hundred (500) Hours of Service. For purposes of eligibility, such twelve (12) consecutive month period shall be the same as that used to determine Years of Eligibility Service. For purposes of vesting, such twelve (12) consecutive month period shall be the same as that used to determine Years of Vesting Service. However, the following types of absence shall not constitute a One-Year Break in Service:

 

(a) Temporary leave of absence granted by the Employer for sickness, or extended vacation, provided that persons under similar circumstances shall be treated alike;

 

(b) Absence due to illness or accident while regular remuneration is paid;

 

(c) Absence for Qualified Military Service.

 

1.40        “Participant” shall mean any Employee who on or after the Effective Date meets the requirements for participation hereunder. An Employee who satisfies such requirements shall remain a Participant until his death, Disability or Retirement or until the earlier of his receiving a distribution of his Vested Accrued Benefit or his incurring a One Year Break in Service following any other Termination of Employment.

 

1.41        “PBGC” shall mean the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation, a corporate body established under the provisions of Title IV of ERISA.

 

1.42        “Plan” shall mean Blonder-Tongue Laboratories Inc. Bargaining Unit Pension Plan, as stated herein and as may be amended from time to time.

 

1.43        “Plan Administrator” shall mean the person, persons, or corporation administering this Plan as provided in Article XIII hereof, and any successor or successors thereto.

 

1.44        “Plan Anniversary” shall mean the first day of the Plan Year.

 

1.45        “Plan Sponsor” shall mean Blonder-Tongue Laboratories, Inc.

 

1.46        “Plan Year” shall mean the one year period commencing February 1 and ending January 31.

 

8
 

 

1.47        “Prior Plan” shall mean the Electrocomp Inc. Bargaining Unit Pension Plan.

 

1.48        “Qualified Domestic Relations Order” shall mean:

 

(a) Any Domestic Relations Order which meets the following requirements:

 

(1) Creates or recognizes the existence of an Alternate Payee’s right to, or assigns to an Alternate Payee the right to, receive all or a portion of the benefits payable with respect to a Participant or Former Participant under this Plan;

 

(2) Specifies the name and the last known mailing address (if any) of the Participant or Former Participant and the name and mailing address of each Alternate Payee covered by the order;

 

(3) Specifies the amount or percentage of the Participant’s or Former Participant’s benefits to be paid to each Alternate Payee therein named, or the manner in which such amount or percentage is to be determined;

 

(4) Specifies the number of payments or period to which such order applies;
   
(5) Specifies each plan to which such order applies;
   
(6) Does not require this Plan to provide any type or form of benefit, or any option, not otherwise provided under this Plan;
   
(7) Does not require this Plan to provide increased benefits (determined on the basis of actuarial value); and
   
(8) Does not require the payment of benefits to an Alternate Payee which are required to be paid to another Alternate Payee under another judgment, decree, or order previously determined to be a Qualified Domestic Relations Order.

 

(b) A Domestic Relations Order shall not be treated as failing to satisfy the requirements of Subsection (a)(6) of this Section, solely because such Domestic Relations Order requires that payment of benefits be made to an Alternate Payee:

 

(1) On or after the date on which the Participant or Former Participant attains (or would have attained) his Earliest Retirement Age;

 

(2) As if the Participant or Former Participant had retired on the date on which such payment is to begin under such order (but taking into account only the Actuarial Equivalent value of the benefits actually accrued and not taking into account the Actuarial Equivalent value of any Employer subsidy for early retirement); or

 

9
 

 

(3) In any form in which such benefits may be paid under this Plan to the Participant or Former Participant (other than in the form of a joint and survivor annuity with respect to the Alternate Payee and his or her subsequent spouse).

 

Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the Participant dies before attaining his Earliest Retirement Age, benefits shall be paid to the Alternate Payee only if the order requires survivor benefits to be paid to such Alternate Payee.

 

(c) A Domestic Relations Order shall not be treated as failing to meet the requirements of Subsection (a)(2) of this Section merely because the Domestic Relations Order does not specify the current mailing address of the Participant or Former Participant or Alternate Payee, if the Plan Administrator has reason to know such address or addresses independently of the Domestic Relations Order.

 

(d) A Domestic Relations Order shall not be treated as failing to meet the requirements of Subsection (a) of this Section merely because the Domestic Relations Order provides that survivor benefits required to be paid to a spouse be paid to an Alternate Payee who is a former spouse of the Participant or Former Participant and who was married to such Participant or Former Participant for at least one (1) year.

 

(e) No Domestic Relations Order entered before January 1, 1985 shall be treated as a Qualified Domestic Relations Order except that:

 

(1) If the Trust is paying benefits on January 1, 1985 pursuant to a Domestic Relations Order which complies with Subsection (a), then such order shall be deemed a Qualified Domestic Relations Order; and

 

(2) The Plan Administrator may, in its sole discretion, treat any order entered before January 1, 1985 as a Qualified Domestic Relations Order even though such order does not comply with the requirements of Subsection (a).

 

(f) No Domestic Relations Order shall be treated as a Qualified Domestic Relations Order if payments to an Alternate Payee under the Domestic Relations Order are contingent on the survival of the Alternate Payee, unless the payments to the Alternate Payee are under a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity or a Qualified Pre-retirement Survivor Annuity.

 

To the extent provided in any Qualified Domestic Relations Order, the former spouse of a Participant shall be treated as a surviving spouse for purposes of this Plan.

 

10
 

 

1.49        “Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity” shall mean an immediate annuity which provides monthly payments to the Participant for his lifetime and continuing thereafter to his spouse, if surviving at the Participant’s death, for the spouse’s lifetime, in an amount not less than fifty percent (50%), nor more than one hundred percent (100%), of the amount which had been payable to the Participant. The term “Automatic Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity” shall mean a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity which provides a survivor benefit to the spouse equal to fifty percent (50%) of the amount which had been payable to the Participant. For purposes of this Section, the spouse of the Participant on his Annuity Starting Date shall be considered to continue to be his spouse notwithstanding any subsequent divorce or remarriage of the Participant.

 

1.50        “Qualified Pre-retirement Survivor Annuity” shall mean an immediate annuity payable to the spouse of a Participant or Former Participant for the life of the spouse in monthly amounts equal to the monthly amount the spouse would have received under the Automatic Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity if:

 

(a) In the case of a Participant or Former Participant who dies after the date on which the Participant or Former Participant attained his Earliest Retirement Age, such Participant or Former Participant had retired with an immediate Automatic Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity on the day before such Participant’s or Former Participant’s death; or

 

(b) In the case of a Participant or Former Participant who dies before the date on which the Participant or Former Participant would have attained his Earliest Retirement Age, such Participant or Former Participant had

 

(1) Separated from service on the date of his death (unless such Participant or Former Participant had already separated from service);

 

(2) Survived to his Earliest Retirement Age;

 

(3) Retired with an immediate Automatic Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity at his Earliest Retirement Age; and

 

(4) Died on the day after the day on which such Participant or Former Participant would have attained his Earliest Retirement Age.

 

For purposes of the above, if a Participant has elected a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity other than the Automatic Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity and dies before his Annuity Starting Date, the elected Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity shall be treated as the Automatic Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity.

 

Payment of the Qualified Pre-retirement Survivor Annuity shall commence, unless otherwise elected by the surviving spouse, not later than as soon as administratively feasible following the later of the date of the Participant’s death, or the date on which the Participant would have attained his Earliest Retirement Age.

 

11
 

 

1.51        “Qualified Military Service” shall mean any service by an Employee in the uniformed services of the United States (as defined in chapter 43 of title 38, United States Code), provided:

 

(a) The Employee provides the Employer advance notice of such service, when such notice is practical;

 

(b) The Employee is not dishonorably discharged;

 

(c) The Employee is reemployed by the Employer within thirty (30) days following the completion of such service or any longer period during which his right to re-employment is protected by law; and

 

(d) The cumulative length of the Employee’s absence from employment due to such service does not exceed five (5) years.

 

1.52        “Re-employment Commencement Date” shall mean the date on which an Employee, who has incurred both a Termination of Employment and a One Year Break in Service as a result of that termination, first performs an Hour of Service for the Employer following such Break in Service.

 

1.53        “Self-Employed Individual” shall mean an individual who has Earned Income for the taxable year from the trade or business of the Employer, or who would have had Earned Income but for the fact that the trade or business of the Employer had no net profits for the taxable year.

 

1.54        “Termination of Employment” shall mean, with respect to any Employee or Participant, the Employee’s or Participant’s separation from service with the Employer due to resignation; discharge; death; disability; retirement; failure to return to active service with the Employer at the end of an authorized leave of absence or the authorized extension(s) thereof; failure to return to active service with the Employer when duly called following a temporary layoff; failure to return to active service with the Employer within thirty (30) days (or any longer period during which his right to re-employment is protected by law) following the completion of Qualified Military Service; or any other event which, under the then current policy of the Employer, results in the termination of the employer-employee relationship. Termination of Employment shall not occur merely because of a transfer between the Plan Sponsor and an adopting Employer or between two adopting Employers.

 

1.55        “Trust” shall mean Blonder-Tongue Laboratories, Inc. Bargaining Unit Pension Trust, as stated herein.

 

1.56        “Trustee” shall mean that bank, trust company or other corporation possessing trust powers under applicable State or Federal law, or one or more individuals, or any combination thereof named as parties hereto, or any successor Trustee or Trustees hereunder.

 

1.57        “Trust Fund” shall mean all cash, securities, annuity contracts, Insurance Contracts, real estate and any other property held by the Trustee pursuant to the terms of this Agreement, together with investment earnings or losses thereon, less any applicable expenses of the Plan and Trust.

 

12
 

 

1.58        “Vested Accrued Benefit” or “Vested Interest” shall mean that portion of a Participant’s Accrued Benefit which is non-forfeitable.

 

1.59        “Year of Credited Service” prior to February 1, 1976 shall be equal to the number of years and completed months elapsed from the Participant’s Employment Commencement Date through January 31, 1976.

 

Beginning February 1, 1976, Credited Service shall be based on Hours of Service within Plan Years as follows:

 

Hours

of Service

 

Credited

Future Service

     
1,800 or More   1 Year
1,350 to 1,799   3/4 Year
1,000 to 1,349   1/2 Year
Less than 1,000   0

 

Years of Credited Service shall be frozen effective August 1, 2006 and shall not increase thereafter.

 

1.60        “Year of Eligibility Service” shall mean an Eligibility Computation Period during which an Employee has completed at least one thousand (1,000) Hours of Service. For this purpose, the Employee’s initial Eligibility Computation Period shall be the twelve (12) consecutive month period which begins on the Employee’s Employment Commencement Date or Re-employment Commencement Date; and subsequent Eligibility Computation Periods shall be the Plan Year beginning within the initial Eligibility Computation Period or the Plan Year which begins on the day following the initial Eligibility Computation Period, and succeeding Plan Years. An Employee who is credited with one thousand (1,000) Hours of Service in both his Initial Eligibility Computation Period and his first Subsequent Eligibility Computation Period shall be credited with two Years of Eligibility Service.

 

1.61        “Year of Participation” shall mean a Plan Year which includes or is subsequent to a Participant’s Entry Date, during which the Participant has completed not less than one thousand (1,000) Hours of Service. Years of Participation shall include Years of Participation under the Prior Plan of which this Plan is an amendment and restatement.

 

13
 

 

1.62        “Year of Vesting Service” shall mean a Vesting Computation Period during which an Employee has completed at least one thousand (1,000) Hours of Service. For this purpose, the Employee’s Vesting Computation Periods shall be Plan Years. Notwithstanding, the Vesting Computation Period for any year prior to the Effective Date of the Plan (and for the first Plan Year if such first Plan Year is a Short Plan Year) shall be a twelve (12) consecutive month period which ends on the same day of the year as did the Plan’s initial Plan Year. Further, if there is a change in the period covered by the Plan Year, the Vesting Computation Period shall change to cover a corresponding period. The first day of the new twelve (12) consecutive month Vesting Computation Period shall begin within the prior Vesting Computation period, so that the new period overlaps the prior period. In this overlapping period, any Employee will be credited with: one (1) Year of Vesting Service if he accrues one thousand (1,000) Hours of Service in only the prior Vesting Computation Period; one (1) Year of Vesting Service if he accrues one thousand (1,000) Hours of Service in only the new Vesting Computation Period; and two (2) Years of Vesting Service if he accrues one thousand (1,000) Hours of Service in each of the two overlapping Vesting Computation Periods.

 

A Participant’s Years of Vesting Service shall be determined based on all periods of employment with the Employer, including periods as an Excluded Employee, except for periods of employment prior to the Effective Date of the Plan.

 

To the extent not otherwise provided under the Plan, effective January 1, 2007, if an individual who was an Employee dies while performing Qualified Military Service, such individual’s period of time in Qualified Military Service through the date he died shall be counted as Years of Vesting Service.

 

14
 

 

ARTICLE II – FUNDING POLICY FOR PLAN BENEFITS

 

2.01 Funding Method

 

The benefits provided by this Plan shall be funded by contributions of the Employer. Such contributions shall be determined by an Enrolled Actuary using an accepted actuarial cost method.

 

2.02 Funding Standard Account

 

A Funding Standard Account shall be maintained for this Plan. Each Plan Year the Funding Standard Account shall be charged with the amount determined under Section 2.01 and credited with the applicable contributions made for such Plan Year. In addition, the Funding Standard Account will be charged or credited with other amounts as may be required by the Code or ERISA including, but not necessarily limited to, amounts resulting from plan amendments, actuarial assumption changes, actuarial gains and losses and approved waived funding deficiencies. If the charges under the Funding Standard Account exceed the credits thereto a funding deficiency will exist. Such deficiencies shall be eliminated as required by law or regulation.

 

2.03 Investment Policy

 

This Plan has been established for the sole purpose of providing benefits to the Participants and their Beneficiaries. In determining its investments hereunder, the Trustee shall take account of the advice provided by the Plan Administrator as to funding policy and the short and long-range needs of the Plan based on the evident and probable requirements of the Plan as to the time benefits shall be payable and the requirements therefor. Benefits may be provided through any combination of investment media designed to provide the requisite liquidity, growth and security appropriate to this Plan.

 

Benefits for Participants may be provided through any investment media offered by the Insurer, or through the purchase of shares in any regulated investment company as defined in Code Section 851(a), or through any investment proper and appropriate to be made by the Trustee in accordance with Article XIV, or through any combination of such investments.

 

2.04 Insurance Contracts

 

Except as provided in Section 2.07, no Insurance Contracts shall be purchased by the Trustee on the life of any Participant.

 

2.05 Investment Fund

 

The Employer shall contribute to an Investment Fund, which shall be established by the Trustee to provide such additional benefits, in addition to the proceeds or surrender values of any allocated annuity contracts, for Participants and their Beneficiaries provided by this Plan.

 

15
 

 

2.06 Nontransferability of Annuity Contracts

 

In the event the assets of the Trust Fund include annuity contracts, all incidents of ownership in such contracts may be exercised by the Trustee, as directed by the Plan Administrator, except to the extent any death benefits payable thereunder may be paid to the Beneficiary designated by the Participant. All such contracts shall provide that the owner may not change the ownership of the contract, nor may it be sold, assigned or pledged as collateral for a loan, as security for the performance of an obligation, or for any other purpose to anyone. This shall not, however, prevent assignment of applicable annuity contracts to a Participant as a distribution from the Plan.

 

2.07 Power to Purchase Keyman Insurance

 

The Trustee, if so instructed by the Plan Administrator, shall purchase keyman life insurance on the life of any Employee of the Employer (whether or not a Participant) who is considered essential to the successful operation of the Employer. Any such keyman life insurance policy shall be purchased as an investment of the Trust and not for the benefit or account of any particular Participant thereunder, and the entire death benefit under any such policy shall be made payable to the Trustee. Any insurance proceeds received by the Trustee as a result of such Employee’s death shall be treated as investment income to the Trust.

 

2.08 Predecessor Plan Assets

 

Prior to the adoption of this Plan, the Plan Sponsor maintained the Electrocomp Inc. Bargaining Unit Pension Plan, hereinafter referred to as the “Predecessor Plan,” which has been terminated. The Trustee shall receive and invest the assets of the Predecessor Plan from the trustee of such Predecessor Plan as long as each participant in such plan, if a Participant hereunder, would (if the Plan terminates) receive a benefit immediately following the date of transfer equal to or greater than the benefit he would have been entitled to receive under the Predecessor Plan. Such amounts shall be credited to the Predecessor Plan Account established by the Plan Administrator for each affected Participant. The establishment of such Accounts is for recordkeeping purposes only, and a physical segregation of assets shall not be required. Such Accounts shall be in addition to other benefits provided by this Plan.

 

Such Accounts shall be commingled and invested with other Trust assets, and shall be credited (charged) with a proportionate share of investment earnings (losses) and appreciation (depreciation) on the total assets of the Trust Fund, charged with any specific or proportionate share of expenses incurred by the Trustee in investing or administering such Accounts, and charged with any withdrawals or payments therefrom.

 

A Participant shall at all times be one hundred percent (100%) vested in his Predecessor Plan Account. The value of such Predecessor Plan Account may however, upon distribution, be more or less than the value of such assets immediately following receipt by the Trustee.

 

A Participant who incurs a Termination of Employment shall receive a distribution of the balance in his Predecessor Plan Account, if any, in the manner and form provided, in the case of retirement, in Article VI; in the case of death, in Article VII; and, in the case of Termination of Employment for any other reason, in Section 8.04. Such distribution shall be the Actuarial Equivalent of the balance in such Account. To the extent not already provided under the terms of this Plan, and notwithstanding any other provisions to the contrary, this Plan guarantees to each Participant the right to receive any distribution from his Predecessor Plan Account in any optional form of benefit available under the Predecessor Plan (including time, manner and method of distribution) protected under Code Section 411(d)(6).

 

16
 

 

ARTICLE III – ELIGIBILITY AND PARTICIPATION

 

3.01 Age and Service Requirements

 

An Employee who is not an Excluded Employee shall become a Participant in this Plan on the first Entry Date coincident with or next following the date on which he has first earned an Hour of Service with the Employer, unless he has terminated employment with the Employer prior to such Entry Date. Notwithstanding the eligibility requirements stated above, any Employee who was a Participant under the provisions of the Prior Plan shall be eligible to participate in this amended and restated Plan.

 

Participation in the Plan shall be frozen effective August 1, 2006. No Employee shall become a Participant on or after August 1, 2006.

 

3.02 Plan Administrator to Furnish Eligibility Information

 

As soon as practicable after the Effective Date, and not less than thirty (30) days prior to each subsequent Entry Date, the Plan Administrator shall determine which Employees become eligible on such date, and shall notify each such Employee of his eligibility, and of any application or other requirements for participation.

 

3.03 Information to be Provided by Employee

 

At the request of the Plan Administrator, each Employee eligible to become a Participant shall furnish such information as is not available from the Employer and execute such forms as reasonably required by the Plan Administrator to carry out his duties under the Plan, within a reasonable period of time after receiving notification of eligibility pursuant to Section 3.02.

 

3.04 Reclassification Out of or Into the Excluded Class

 

Any Employee, whether or not he has previously participated in the Plan, who was a member of the Excluded Class and is reclassified out of the Excluded Class shall be considered to have entered the Plan on the Entry Date immediately preceding the date of his reclassification if he had satisfied the requirements of Section 3.01 on such Entry Date.

 

Any Participant who is reclassified into the Excluded Class and who, prior to the reclassification, completed one thousand (1,000) Hours of Service in the Plan Year in which such reclassification occurred, shall be treated for purposes of determining his Years of Participation and Years of Credited Service as though the reclassification had not occurred until the first day of the following Plan Year.

 

Subject to the above, an Employee shall not be credited with any Years of Participation while a member of the Excluded Class. An Employee shall be credited with Years of Vesting Service and Years of Eligibility Service while a member of the Excluded Class.

 

17
 

 

3.05 Breaks in Service

 

If an Employee terminated employment prior to becoming a Participant and incurred a One Year Break in Service, or if an Employee who was a Participant incurred a One Year Break in Service prior to becoming entitled to a Vested Accrued Benefit derived from Employer contributions, his Years of Eligibility Service prior to such One Year Break in Service shall be disregarded if his number of consecutive One Year Breaks in Service equals or exceeds the greater of five (5) or his number of Years of Eligibility Service prior to such One Year Break in Service. Any Employee to whom this Section applies shall be treated as a new Employee as of his Re-employment Commencement Date and be required to again satisfy the requirements of Section 3.01.

 

Notwithstanding the previous paragraph, an Employee’s Years of Eligibility Service prior to the first Plan Year beginning after December 31, 1984 shall be disregarded if such Years of Eligibility Service would have been disregarded under the provisions of the Plan and Code Section 410(a)(5)(D) (as in effect on August 22, 1984) as of the day preceding the first day of such Plan Year.

 

3.06 Re-employment and Commencement of Participation

 

Subject to Section 3.05, an Employee who had met all the requirements of Section 3.01 but terminated employment prior to his Entry Date shall become a Participant on the date he is re-employed by the Employer. Subject to Section 3.05, an Employee who was a Participant shall again become a Participant on the date he is re-employed by the Employer.

 

3.07 Election Not To Participate

 

At any time after the Plan Administrator notifies an Employee of his eligibility to participate in this Plan, the eligible Employee may elect in writing not to participate; provided, however, that no such election may be made if the effect thereof is either to prohibit initial qualification or to disqualify the Plan under Code Section 410(b)(1). Such electing Employee may later become a Participant effective for the Plan Year immediately after the Plan Year during which the Employee elects to participate, if the Employee then meets the requirements for participation under this Article III. During the time an Employee elects not to participate in the Plan, he shall not accrue any benefits hereunder nor shall he be credited with any Years of Credited Service or Years of Participation.

 

3.08 Effect of Participation

 

A Participant shall be conclusively deemed to have assented to this Plan and Trust Agreement and to any subsequent amendments, and shall be bound thereby with the same force and effect as if he had formally executed this Plan and Trust Agreement.

 

18
 

 

ARTICLE IV – ELIGIBILITY FOR RETIREMENT BENEFITS

 

4.01 Normal Retirement

 

A Participant shall be eligible to receive his Normal Retirement Benefit, as specified in Section 5.01, upon attaining his Normal Retirement Date. Payment of the Normal Retirement Benefit shall commence as of his Normal Retirement Date, unless the Participant elects to postpone the commencement of his retirement benefit as provided in Section 4.03.

 

4.02 Early Retirement

 

A Participant who incurs a Termination of Employment prior to his Normal Retirement Date shall be eligible for an Early Retirement Benefit, as specified in Section 5.02, on the first day of the calendar month coincident with or next following the date he satisfies all of the following requirements:

 

(a) Attained the Age of forty-five (45) (“Early Retirement Age”), and

 

(b) Completed fifteen (15) Years of Credited Service; or

 

(c) Completed ten (10) Years of Vesting Service, and

 

(d) Is within ten (10) years of his Normal Retirement Date.

 

Payment of the Early Retirement Benefit shall commence as of the first day of the calendar month coincident with or next following the date the requirements for Early Retirement are satisfied, or as of the first day of any subsequent calendar month, as elected by the Participant. As to a Participant receiving an Early Retirement Benefit, that benefit shall be in lieu of all other benefits provided under this Plan.

 

4.03 Postponed Retirement

 

A Participant may continue his employment beyond his Normal Retirement Date. Payment of a Participant’s Postponed Retirement Benefit shall commence as of his Postponed Retirement Date, which shall be the first day of the calendar month coincident with or next following his Termination of Employment.

 

4.04 Disability Retirement

 

A Participant who terminates employment due to total and permanent disability, as defined herein, and who has attained Age forty (40), completed ten (10) Years of Vesting Service, and who qualifies for Social Security Disability Benefits shall be eligible for a Disability Retirement Benefit as specified in Section 5.04. A Participant shall be considered totally and permanently disabled when he has been unable to perform his normal job functions for a period of at least six (6) months by reason of sickness, injury or the like, and it is expected that the inability to perform his normal job functions will be permanent. To the extent permitted by law, total and permanent disability shall exclude disabilities arising from:

 

19
 

 

(a) Chronic or excessive use of intoxicants, drugs, or narcotics; or

 

(b) Intentionally self-inflicted injury or intentionally self-induced sickness; or

 

(c) An unlawful act or enterprise on the part of the Participant; or

 

(d) Military Service where the Participant is eligible to receive a government-sponsored military disability pension.

 

The Plan Administrator shall determine (in a uniform and non-discriminatory manner for all Participants) if a Participant is totally and permanently disabled and may rely on the certification of a licensed physician selected by the Participant and approved by the Employer.

 

Payment of the Disability Retirement Benefit shall commence as of the first day of the calendar month coincident with or next following the date the requirements for Disability Retirement are satisfied, or as of the first day of any subsequent calendar month, as elected by the Participant. As to a Participant receiving a Disability Retirement Benefit, that benefit shall be in lieu of all other benefits provided under this Plan.

 

20
 

 

ARTICLE V – AMOUNT OF RETIREMENT BENEFITS

 

5.01 Normal Retirement Benefit

 

The annual amount of Normal Retirement Benefit payable to a Participant on the Normal Form of Retirement Benefit shall be equal to the applicable Unit Benefit in effect multiplied by the Participant’s Credited Service in the applicable period, according to the following table:

 

Period of Credited Service   Unit Benefit  
       
Hire to 2/5/82   $ 42.00  
2/6/82 – 2/5/83     54.00  
2/6/83 – 2/5/85     66.00  
2/6/85 – 2/5/86     78.00  
2/6/86 – 2/5/88     90.00  
2/6/88 – 2/5/89     102.00  
2/6/89 – 2/5/90     114.00  
2/6/90 – 2/5/91     144.00  
2/6/91 – 2/5/94     150.00  
2/6/94 – 2/5/95     168.00  
2/6/95 – 2/5/97     186.00  
2/6/97 – 2/5/98     198.00  
2/6/98 – 2/5/04     210.00  
2/6/04 – and After     222.00  

 

Further provided that no Credited Service in excess of thirty (30) years shall be included. In the event a Participant has earned Credited Service in excess of thirty (30) years, the benefit will be computed using the applicable Unit Benefit in effect in the thirty (30) years immediately preceding termination of employment. The amount of Normal Retirement Benefit determined under the above formula shall be rounded to the nearest whole dollar.

 

5.02 Early Retirement Benefit

 

The monthly amount of Early Retirement Benefit payable to a Participant on the Normal Form of Retirement Benefit shall be equal to his Vested Accrued Benefit, as of his date of Termination of Employment, reduced actuarially using the assumptions in Section 1.02 for each month by which the commencement of the Early Retirement Benefit precedes the Participant’s Normal Retirement Date.

 

5.03 Postponed Retirement Benefit

 

The monthly amount of Postponed Retirement Benefit payable to a Participant on the Normal Form of Retirement Benefit shall be equal to the Actuarial Equivalent, as of his Postponed Retirement Date, of the Normal Retirement Benefit which would have been payable at his Normal Retirement Date. In no event, however, shall the monthly amount of a Participant’s Postponed Retirement Benefit be less than the monthly amount of the Normal Retirement Benefit determined under Section 5.01, based on the Participant’s Years of Credited Service to his Postponed Retirement Date. If a Participant’s Postponed Retirement Date is after the April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the Participant attains Age seventy and one-half (70 1/2), his Postponed Retirement Benefit shall not be less than the Actuarial Equivalent of the Participant’s Postponed Retirement Benefit had his benefit commenced on that date; plus the Actuarial Equivalent of any additional benefits the Participant accrued after that date; reduced by the Actuarial Equivalent of any distributions the Participant received after that date.

 

21
 

 

5.04 Disability Retirement Benefit

 

The monthly amount of Disability Retirement Benefit payable to a Participant on the Normal Form of Retirement Benefit shall be equal to his Vested Accrued Benefit as of his Termination of Employment.

 

22
 

 

ARTICLE VI – FORMS AND PAYMENT OF RETIREMENT BENEFITS

 

6.01 Normal Form of Retirement Benefit

 

The Normal Form of Retirement Benefit shall be an annuity which provides monthly payments to the Participant or Former Participant, beginning on his Normal, Early, Postponed or Disability Retirement Date, as applicable, and continuing for his lifetime and terminating with the last payment due prior to the death of the Participant.

 

Subject to Section 6.02, a Participant shall receive his benefits on the Normal Form of Retirement Benefit, unless he elects otherwise as provided in Section 6.06.

 

6.02 Automatic Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity

 

Notwithstanding the Normal Form of Retirement Benefit, a Participant or Former Participant who is married on his Annuity Starting Date shall receive his Vested Accrued Benefit in the form of an Automatic Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity, unless he elects otherwise as provided in Section 6.06. The monthly amount of the Automatic Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity shall be the Actuarial Equivalent of the monthly amount of benefit payable to the Participant in the Normal Form of Retirement Benefit on the date his benefits commence.

 

A Participant or Former Participant who is not married on his Annuity Starting Date shall receive his Vested Accrued Benefit in the form of a Life Annuity (as described in Subsection 6.03(a)), unless he elects otherwise as provided in Section 6.06. In the case of such an unmarried Participant or Former Participant, for purposes of the notice and election requirements of Section 6.06, the term Automatic Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity shall mean such Life Annuity.

 

For purposes of this section, the Annuity Starting Date is any date on or after a Participant’s earliest retirement date on which the Participant elects to receive his benefits.

 

6.03 Optional Forms of Retirement Benefit

 

Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 6.01 or Section 6.02, a Participant may elect to receive his benefits in an Optional Form of Retirement Benefit. Such election shall be made as provided in Section 6.06 and subject to the provisions of Section 6.07. The amount payable on an Optional Form of Retirement Benefit shall be the Actuarial Equivalent of the monthly amount of benefit payable to the Participant in the Normal Form of Retirement Benefit on his Annuity Starting Date.

 

The Optional Forms of Retirement Benefit shall include:

 

(a) Life Annuity: This Optional Form of Retirement Benefit shall provide monthly payments to the Participant, continuing for his lifetime and terminating with the last payment due prior to the death of the Participant.

 

23
 

 

(b) Life Annuity With Period Certain : This Optional Form of Retirement Benefit shall provide monthly payments to the Participant for a guaranteed period certain of sixty (60) months, one hundred twenty (120) months or one hundred eighty (180) months, and continuing thereafter for his lifetime, and terminating with the last payment due prior to the death of the Participant. If the Participant dies before having received payments for the specified period certain, the payments for the remainder of such period certain shall be paid to his Beneficiary.

 

(c) Joint and Survivor Annuity : This Optional Form of Retirement Benefit shall provide monthly payments to the Participant for his lifetime and continuing thereafter to his spouse, if surviving at the Participant’s death, for the spouse’s lifetime in an amount equal to fifty percent (50%), seventy-five percent (75%) or one hundred percent (100%), as elected by the Participant, of the amount which had been payable to the Participant. For purposes of this paragraph, the spouse of a Participant on his Annuity Starting Date shall be considered to continue to be his spouse notwithstanding any subsequent divorce or remarriage of the Participant.

 

(d) Lump Sum Settlement : This Optional Form of Retirement Benefit shall only be available upon attainment of Early, Normal, or Postponed Retirement Age and shall provide a single lump sum payment to the Participant in cash or kind. If the Participant dies before actually receiving the lump sum payment, the lump sum payment shall be paid to his Beneficiary.

 

(e) Modified Cash Refund Annuity : This Optional Form of Retirement Benefit shall provide reduced monthly payments to the Participant for his lifetime. After the Participant’s death, the Participant’s beneficiary shall receive a payment equal to the difference between the Actuarial Equivalent of the Participant’s benefit as of the Participant’s Annuity Starting Date and the total payments actually made to the Participant. This benefit shall be in the form of a single lump sum payment to the Beneficiary in cash; however, the Participant’s beneficiary can elect to receive this benefit in Actuarially Equivalent annual installments over a period not to exceed five (5) years.

 

6.04 Payment of Small Amounts

 

If monthly payments otherwise payable to the Participant under this Plan are less than twenty-five dollars ($25.00), such payments shall be made on an equivalent bi-monthly, quarterly or semi-annual basis, whichever yields the smallest payments not less than twenty-five dollars ($25.00), or, if all such payments are less than twenty-five dollars ($25.00), on an equivalent annual basis. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Plan, if the lump sum Actuarial Equivalent of any benefit otherwise payable to a Participant is not greater than one thousand dollars ($1,000) upon the Participant’s Early Retirement Date, or not greater than five thousand dollars ($5,000) upon the Participant’s Normal or Postponed Retirement Date or upon the Participant’s death, such benefit shall be paid as a single lump sum payment which is the Actuarial Equivalent of the benefit otherwise payable. Notwithstanding the above, such a single lump sum payment shall not be made to a Participant after his Annuity Starting Date unless such Participant and his spouse, if any, consent in writing to such payment.

 

24
 

 

If the single sum Actuarial Equivalent of the Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit at the date of distribution exceeds one thousand dollars ($1,000) but does not exceed the amount permitted to be cashed out without consent by Code Section 417(e) upon the Participant’s Early Retirement Date, the Participant may elect, within such election period as prescribed by the Plan Administrator, to be paid the Actuarial Equivalent of such benefit in a single sum or to allow such benefit to remain undistributed. The spousal consent rules of Code section 401(a)(11) and 417 do not apply. If such Participant reaches the date on which he must begin receiving his benefit under the Plan without having first received a distribution under this Section and the lump sum Actuarial Equivalent of any benefit otherwise payable to the Participant is not greater than the amount permitted to be cashed out without consent by Code Section 417(e), such benefit shall be paid as a single lump sum payment which is the Actuarial Equivalent of the benefit otherwise payable.

 

6.05 Restrictions on Forms of Retirement Benefits

 

Notwithstanding any other provision of this Article, no Optional Form of Retirement Benefit may be elected unless such Optional Form of Retirement Benefit complies with the provisions of Section 6.08.

 

6.06 Notice and Election of Form of Retirement Benefit

 

Each Participant or Former Participant shall be provided a written notification by the Plan Administrator. The notification shall be in non-technical language and shall include:

 

(a) A general description or explanation of the terms and conditions of the Automatic Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity;

 

(b) The circumstances in which it will be provided unless the Participant elects otherwise;

 

(c) The Participant’s right to make, and the effect of, an election to waive the Automatic Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity form of benefit;

 

(d) The rights of the Participant’s spouse under Section 6.07;

 

(e) The right to make, and the effect of, a revocation of an election to waive the Automatic Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity form of benefit;

 

(f) A general explanation of the relative financial effect of the election on a Participant’s benefits, the right to defer distribution and including the consequences of failing to defer distribution; and

 

(g) A general explanation of the eligibility conditions and other material features of the Optional Forms of Retirement Benefit and sufficient additional information to explain the relative values of the Optional Forms of Retirement Benefit.

 

25
 

 

The notification shall also inform the Participant that a specific written explanation in non-technical language of the terms and conditions of the Automatic Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity and the financial effect upon the particular Participant’s benefits of making an election against the Automatic Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity is available upon written request by the Participant. Such notification shall be provided not less than thirty (30) days nor more than ninety (90) days before the Annuity Starting Date. Notwithstanding, the minimum thirty (30) day waiting period after the notification is provided until the Annuity Starting Date may be shortened to not less than seven (7) days if the Plan Administrator informs the Participant and the Participant’s spouse, if any, of their right to the full minimum thirty (30) day waiting period, and the Participant and the Participant’s spouse, if any, elect in writing to waive the minimum thirty (30) day waiting period. If the Participant requests a specific written explanation, such explanation shall be provided within thirty (30) days of the Participant’s request. The Plan Administrator need not comply with more than one such request made by a particular Participant.

 

During the Joint and Survivor Election Period, as hereinafter defined, a Participant eligible to make the election to waive the Automatic Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity of Section 6.02 shall be eligible to elect to receive his benefits in an Optional Form of Retirement Benefit as provided in Section 6.03. The election shall be in writing and may be revoked at any time during the Joint and Survivor Election Period. New elections and revocations may be made any number of times during the Joint and Survivor Election Period after a previous election or revocation. For purposes of this paragraph, the term “Joint and Survivor Election Period” shall mean the ninety (90) day period ending on the Annuity Starting Date.

 

6.07 Consent of Spouse

 

Notwithstanding any other provision of this Article, any election after December 31, 1984 by a Participant or Former Participant to waive the Automatic Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity pursuant to Section 6.06 shall not be given effect unless:

 

(a) The Participant elects an Optional Form of Retirement Benefit which is a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity; or

 

(b) (1)          The spouse of the Participant consents in writing to such election;

 

(2) The spouse acknowledges the Optional Form of Retirement Benefit elected by the Participant and, if applicable, the Beneficiary designated by the Participant, or the spouse relinquishes the right to specify the Optional Form of Retirement Benefit and name the Beneficiary; and

 

(3) The spouse’s consent acknowledges the effect of such election and is witnessed by the Plan Administrator (or representative thereof) or a Notary Public; or

 

(c) It is established to the satisfaction of the Plan Administrator that the consent required under (b) above may not be obtained because there is no spouse, because the spouse cannot be located, or because of such other circumstances as the Secretary of the Treasury may by Regulation prescribe; or

 

26
 

 

(d) The lump sum Actuarial Equivalent of the benefit otherwise payable to the Participant is less than five thousand hundred dollars ($5,000) and a lump sum payment will be made pursuant to Section 6.04.

 

A waiver of the Automatic Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity made pursuant to Section 6.06 shall be automatically revoked upon the marriage of the Participant, prior to his Annuity Starting Date, to a person who has not consented to the waiver pursuant to Subsection (b) or from whom consent was not required by reason of Subsection (c); or upon a change in the Optional Form of Retirement Benefit or in the Beneficiary designated by the Participant pursuant to Subsection (b)(2), unless the spouse has relinquished the right to specify the Optional Form of Retirement Benefit and to name the Beneficiary.

 

If the requirements of the preceding paragraphs are not satisfied, the Participant shall receive his benefits in the form of the Automatic Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity.

 

6.08 Required Distributions

 

(a) Except as otherwise provided with respect to the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity requirements, the provisions of this Section will apply to any distribution of a Participant's interest and will take precedence over any inconsistent provisions of this Plan. However, this Section is not intended to provide an optional form of distribution or commencement date not otherwise allowed under the Plan unless the timing or amount of payments to be made under the applicable provisions of the Plan, without regard to this Section, would be later than the latest commencement date or less than the required minimum provided under this Section.

 

(b) General Rule: Payment of benefits under this Plan shall commence not later than April 1 of the calendar year following the later of:

 

(1) The calendar year in which the Participant attains Age seventy and one-half (70 1/2); or

 

(2) The earlier of:

 

(i) The calendar year in which the Participant retires or otherwise terminates employment with the Employer; or

 

(ii) The calendar year in which the Participant becomes a Five Percent Owner (as defined in Section 20.02); or

 

(3) The calendar year in which this Plan is first subject to the requirements of this Section.

 

27
 

 

Item (2) above shall not apply in the case of a Participant who is a Five Percent Owner (as defined in Section 20.02) with respect to the Plan Year ending in the calendar year in which the Participant attains Age seventy and one-half (70 1/2) or the four (4) preceding Plan Years or in the case of any Participant who attains Age seventy and one-half (70 1/2) after December 31, 1987. Notwithstanding the foregoing, effective February 1, 2005, a Participant who is not a Five Percent Owner but who has reached the date on which benefits would otherwise commence under this Section may elect to defer commencement of his or her benefit to a date no later than the April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the Participant retires or otherwise terminates employment with the Employer.

 

On or before the April 1 determined above (but not earlier than the January 1 immediately preceding such date, unless otherwise permitted under the terms of this Plan) the entire Vested Accrued Benefit of the Participant shall be distributed to the Participant:

 

(1) In the form of a lump sum payment; or

 

(2) In the form of installment payments, beginning not later than such April 1, over a period not extending beyond the life expectancy of such Participant, or the joint life expectancy of such Participant and his Beneficiary; or

 

(3) In the form of an annuity for the life of such Participant, or the joint lives of such Participant and his Beneficiary.

 

(c) Transitional Rule: Notwithstanding (a) above, payment of benefits to a Participant, including a Participant who is a Five Percent Owner, may be made in accordance with the following requirements regardless of when such payment of benefits commences:

 

(1) The distribution is one which would not have disqualified the Plan under Code Section 401(a)(9) as in effect prior to January 1, 1984;

 

(2) The distribution is in accordance with a method of distribution designated by the Participant or, if the Participant is deceased, the Beneficiary of the Participant;

 

(3) Such designation was in writing, was signed by the Participant or Beneficiary, and was made prior to January 1, 1984;

 

(4) The Participant had an Accrued Benefit under the Plan as of December 31, 1983; and

 

(5) The method of distribution designated by the Participant or Beneficiary specifies the time at which distribution will commence, the period over which the distribution will be made, and in the case of any distribution upon the Participant’s death, the Beneficiaries of the Participant listed in order of priority.

 

28
 

 

For any distribution which commenced before January 1, 1984, but continues after December 31, 1983, the Participant, or the Beneficiary, to whom such distribution is being made, will be presumed to have designated the method of distribution under which the distribution is being made if the method of distribution was specified in writing and the distribution satisfies the requirements in Items (1) and (5) above.

 

If such a designation is revoked, any subsequent distribution must satisfy the requirements of Subsection (a) above. Any changes in the designation will be considered to be a revocation of the designation. However, the mere substitution or addition of another Beneficiary (one not named in the designation) under the designation will not be considered to be a revocation of the designation, so long as such substitution or addition does not alter the period over which distributions are to be made under the designation, directly or indirectly (for example, by altering the relevant measuring life).

 

(d) All distributions required under this Section shall be determined and made in accordance with Code Section 401(a)(9) and the regulations thereunder, including the incidental death benefit requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9)(G) and Treasury Regulation 1.401(a)(9)-6, Q&A 2. With respect to distributions commencing under the Plan on and after February 1, 2001 and before February 1, 2006 the Plan shall apply the minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9) in accordance with Proposed Treasury Regulations issued July 27, 1987 thereunder. With respect to distributions commencing after December 31, 2005, the Plan shall apply the minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9) in accordance with the Final Treasury Regulations issued June 15, 2004 thereunder.

 

For purposes of this Section, any distribution required under the incidental death benefit requirements of Code Section 401(a) shall be treated as a distribution required under Code Section 401(a)(9).

 

6.09 When Benefits Are Payable:

 

(a) Payment of benefits under this Plan shall commence upon the event giving rise to such benefit, but no later than sixty (60) days after the last day of the Plan Year in which the latest of the following events occur:

 

(1) The attainment by the Participant of Age sixty-five (65) or, if earlier, his Normal Retirement Age; or

 

(2) The tenth (10th) anniversary of the Participant’s Entry Date; or

 

(3) The date the Participant terminates employment with the Employer.

 

29
 

 

If the amount of the payment required to commence on the date determined above cannot be ascertained by such date, or if it is not possible to make such payment on such date because the Plan Administrator has been unable to locate the Participant after making reasonable efforts to do so, a payment retroactive to such date may be made no later than sixty (60) days after the earliest date on which the amount of such payment can be ascertained or the date the Participant is located, whichever is applicable.

 

Notwithstanding any other provision in this Article VI to the contrary, no payment shall be made to a Participant prior to the later of his Normal Retirement Age or Age sixty-two (62) unless such Participant consents in writing to such payment not more than ninety (90) days prior to such payment, except as provided in Section 6.04 or 6.08.

 

(b) Effective February 1, 2004, if (i) circumstances exist under which the Participant’s Annuity Starting Date is permitted under subsection (c) to precede the distribution notice required by Code section 417(a)(3); (ii) the desired Annuity Starting Date is permissible under the terms of the Plan; (iii) the Participant and his or her Spouse consent in writing on forms provided by the Plan Administrator; and (iv) the Participant properly completes his or her benefit election forms and returns them to the Plan Administrator on a timely basis in accordance with rules established by the Plan Administrator, the Participant’s benefits will commence in the form elected by the Participant as of the first day of the month affirmatively elected by the Participant in accordance with the terms of the Plan and the Plan’s Administrative rules, provided that the requirements of subsection (d) are satisfied. Such first day of the month shall be his or her Retroactive Annuity Starting Date.

 

(c) Effective February 1, 2004, a Retroactive Annuity Starting Date is permitted in the following circumstances:

 

(1) Through no fault of the Participant, the Plan Administrator delays providing the distribution notice until after the date designated as the Participant’s desired Annuity Starting Date; or

 

(2) The distribution notice is not provided prior to the Normal Retirement Date because the Participant’s whereabouts are unknown and the Participant later comes forward and requests a benefit commencing at the Normal Retirement Date; or

 

(3) Retroactive payments are permitted under subsection (a) above.

 

(d) This subsection shall apply to benefits commencing on and after February 1, 2004. If, in accordance with the provisions of subsections (a) and (b), the Participant elects an Annuity Starting Date that is before the date of the distribution notice (a Retroactive Annuity Starting Date), the benefit payable as of such Retroactive Annuity Starting Date is subject to the following:

 

30
 

 

(1) Amount of Payment: The amount payable as of the date the Participant’s benefit begins shall be the Participant’s Accrued Benefit, determined as of the Retroactive Annuity Starting Date, plus a catch-up payment increased by interest accrued at a reasonable rate for the period commencing as of the Retroactive Annuity Starting Date or the due date of any periodic payment owed under the relevant annuity option and ending on the on the date benefits begin to be paid.

 

(2) Consent: A Participant’s spouse shall be required to consent to the designation of a Retroactive Annuity Starting Date hereunder; provided, however, that the Participant’s spouse shall not be required to consent if the survivor annuity payments under the form of benefit payable hereunder equal or exceed the survivor annuity payments payable under a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity calculated as of the date benefit payments to the Participant actually commence and not as of the Retroactive Annuity Starting Date.

 

(3) Other Limitations. In no event shall any amount paid hereunder exceed the limitations imposed under Section IX hereof, determined as of the date the Participant’s benefits begin to be paid.

 

6.10 Manner of Providing Benefits

 

Any benefits payable under this Plan may be provided by direct payments from the Trust, payments by an Insurer pursuant to a group annuity contract issued to the Trustee, or the purchase by the Trustee of a single-premium nontransferable individual annuity contract from an Insurer. Any annuity contract purchased by the Trustee and distributed to a Participant or Beneficiary must comply with the requirements of this Plan and Trust.

 

6.11 Direct Rollovers

 

Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, any Participant or Former Participant, any surviving spouse of a Participant or Former Participant, or any alternate payee under a Qualified Domestic Relations Order who receives an Eligible Distribution from the Plan on or after January 1, 1993 may elect to have any portion of his distribution paid directly to an Eligible Retirement Plan specified by the payee as a Direct Rollover. For this purpose, a distribution from the Plan is an Eligible Distribution unless:

 

(a) The distribution is one of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than annually) made for the life (or life expectancy) of the payee or the joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of the payee and the payee’s designated beneficiary, or for a specified period of ten (10) years or more; or

 

(b) The distribution is made in accordance with Section 6.08 of the Plan.

 

31
 

 

Each payee who receives an Eligible Distribution from the Plan shall be provided a written notification by the Plan Administrator, not less than thirty (30) days nor more than ninety (90) days before the Annuity Starting Date. Notwithstanding, the minimum thirty (30) day waiting period after the notification is provided until the Annuity Starting Date may be disregarded if the Plan Administrator informs the Participant of his right to the full minimum thirty (30) day waiting period, and the Participant elects in writing to waive the minimum thirty (30) day waiting period. The notification shall be in non-technical language and shall include:

 

(a) A description of the types of distribution eligible to be paid in the form of a Direct Rollover;

 

(b) An explanation of a Direct Rollover;

 

(c) An explanation of mandatory and voluntary withholding from payments not made in the form of a Direct Rollover;

 

(d) The special rules which apply to surviving spouses, alternate payees and other beneficiaries; and

 

(e) Instructions on how to obtain additional information regarding distributions from the Plan.

 

A payee who receives an Eligible Distribution shall be eligible to elect, during the ninety (90) day period ending on the Annuity Starting Date, to receive his benefit in the form of a Direct Rollover, provided:

 

(a) The amount of the Direct Rollover must be at least two hundred dollars ($200);

 

(b) If a payee elects a Direct Rollover of only a portion of his distribution, the amount of the Direct Rollover must be at least five hundred dollars ($500); and

 

(c) The payee may not elect a Direct Rollover to two or more Eligible Retirement Plans from a single distribution.

 

If a payee fails to elect a Direct Rollover, the distribution shall be paid directly to the payee. In the case of a series of periodic payments, each of which is an Eligible Distribution, a payee’s election regarding any payment shall apply to all subsequent payments until the payee changes his election.

 

If a payee elects a Direct Rollover of all or a portion of an Eligible Distribution to an Eligible Retirement Plan, the Plan Administrator shall direct the Trustee to pay the amount of the Direct Rollover to the Eligible Retirement Plan specified by the payee. The Trustee may execute such Direct Rollover by any means permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary, including wire transfer, check mailed to the Eligible Retirement Plan or check mailed to the payee payable to the Eligible Retirement Plan.

 

32
 

 

For purposes of the above, an Eligible Retirement Plan is a qualified plan described in Code Section 401(a), an individual retirement account described in Code Section 408(a), and individual retirement annuity described in Code Section 408(b), a Roth IRS described in Code Section 408A, an annuity plan described in Code Section 403(a), an annuity contract described in Code Section 403(b), or an eligible plan under Code Section 457(b) which is maintained by a state, political subdivision of a state, or any agency or instrumentality of a state or political subdivision of a state and which agrees to separately account for amounts transferred into such plan from this plan.

 

Notwithstanding any provision of this Section to the contrary, effective as of January 1, 2010, a non-Spouse Beneficiary of a deceased Participant may elect, at the time and in the manner prescribed by the Plan Administrator, to directly roll over any portion of a distribution that would constitute an eligible rollover distribution if it were made to a Participant, Surviving Spouse, or alternate payee, provided such direct rollover is made to an individual retirement account described in Code Section 408(a), an individual retirement annuity described in Code Section 408(b), or a Roth IRA described in Code Section 408A (collectively, “IRA”) that is established on behalf of the non-Spouse Beneficiary and that will be treated as an inherited IRA pursuant to the provisions of Code Sections 402(c)(11) and 408(d)(3)(C)(ii)..

 

33
 

 

ARTICLE VII – DEATH BENEFITS PRIOR TO RETIREMENT

 

7.01 General

 

If a Participant or Former Participant who has not received a distribution of his Vested Accrued Benefit dies prior to his Annuity Starting Date, there shall be no death benefit payable other than, if applicable, the Qualified Pre-retirement Survivor Annuity of Section 7.02.

 

7.02 Qualified Pre-retirement Survivor Annuity

 

If a Participant or Former Participant who has a Vested Accrued Benefit dies prior to his Annuity Starting Date and is survived by a spouse, a Qualified Pre-retirement Survivor Annuity shall be paid to the surviving spouse in accordance with, and except as otherwise provided by, the following provisions:

 

(a) Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, a surviving spouse entitled to a benefit under this Section, may elect to receive the Actuarial Equivalent of the Qualified Pre-retirement Survivor Annuity in a lump sum. Upon request, the Plan Administrator shall furnish the spouse with an explanation of the Qualified Pre-retirement Survivor Annuity and with information concerning the financial effect of receiving benefits in any form selected. An election under this Subsection must be filed with the Plan Administrator before benefit payments commence, unless the Plan Administrator determines otherwise.

 

(b) Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, a surviving spouse may delay the commencement of benefit payments pursuant hereto, provided such delay satisfies the requirement of Article VI by deeming the surviving spouse to be the Participant.

 

(c) This Section shall not result in a duplication of benefits to a surviving spouse who is also eligible to receive a survivor benefit under the provisions of Section 6.02. Such a spouse shall receive only the greater of the benefit under this Section or the benefit under Section 6.02.

 

(d) This Section shall not apply to a Former Participant who terminated employment prior to August 23, 1984 unless:

 

(1) Such Former Participant had at least one (1) Hour of Service in the first Plan Year beginning on or after January 1, 1976;

 

(2) Such Former Participant had at least ten (10) Years of Vesting Service under the Plan;

 

(3) As of August 23, 1984, such Former Participant's Annuity Starting Date had not occurred; and

 

(4) Such Former Participant was alive on August 23, 1984.

 

34
 

 

7.03 Payment of Death Benefits

 

Subject to any other applicable provisions of this Article, the Beneficiary or surviving spouse of a Participant may elect to receive any death benefits payable hereunder in any Optional Form of Payment available under Section 6.03 except a Joint and Survivor Annuity. The election shall be in writing and shall be filed with the Plan Administrator at least thirty (30) days prior to the Annuity Starting Date. Nevertheless, the minimum thirty (30) day waiting period after the election until the Annuity Starting Date may be disregarded if the Plan Administrator informs the Beneficiary or surviving spouse of his right to the full minimum thirty (30) day waiting period, and the Beneficiary or surviving spouse elects in writing to waive the minimum thirty (30) day waiting period. The amount payable in the Optional Form of Payment shall be the Actuarial Equivalent of the benefit otherwise payable to the Beneficiary or spouse on the Annuity Starting Date; however, if the Participant elected the Modified Cash Refund Annuity under Section 6.03(e), the amount payable shall be the Actuarial Equivalent of the Participant’s benefit as of the Participant’s Annuity Starting Date reduced by the total payments actually made to the Participant prior to his death. Payment of death benefits shall also be subject to the provisions of Section 6.04 concerning payment of small amounts.

 

A Beneficiary or surviving spouse may elect to receive his benefits as a single lump sum payment that is the Actuarial Equivalent of the benefit otherwise payable. Payment of death benefits shall also be subject to the provisions of Section 6.04 concerning the payment of small amounts.

 

7.04 Required Distributions

 

Notwithstanding any other provisions of this Article, payment of death benefits shall be subject to the following:

 

(a) General Rules : If payments have commenced to a Participant or Former Participant in accordance with Article VI and such Participant dies before his entire Vested Accrued Benefit has been distributed to him, the death benefit payable to his Beneficiary or surviving spouse shall be distributed at least as rapidly as under the method of distribution under which such payments were being made as of the date of his death.

 

If a Participant or Former Participant dies before payment of his Vested Accrued Benefit has commenced, the entire death benefit payable to the Beneficiary or spouse shall be distributed no later than the date specified below:

 

(1) Payments of any portion of such interest to the Participant's surviving Spouse shall be made over the life or life expectancy of such surviving Spouse commencing no later than December 31 of the calendar year in which the Participant would have attained age seventy and one half (70 1/2) or, if later, December 31 of the calendar year containing the first anniversary of the Participant's death except to the extent an election is made to receive a distribution of the surviving Spouse's entire interest no later than December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant's death.

 

35
 

 

(2) Distribution of the entire interest, if any, of a Beneficiary other than the Participant's surviving Spouse shall be made no later than December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant's death except to the extent an election is made to receive distributions over the life or life expectancy of such designated Beneficiary commencing no later than December 31 of the calendar year containing the first anniversary of the Participant's death;

 

Such election must be made by the Participant (or his designated Beneficiary or surviving Spouse, if the Participant dies without having made such an election) on or before the earlier of the date by which distribution must commence absent such election and the date distribution must commence assuming such election has been made.

 

If the Spouse dies before payments begin, subsequent distributions are required under this subsection (except for subsection (e)(2)) as if the surviving Spouse was the Participant.

 

For the purpose of this Section, distribution of a Participant's interest is considered to begin on the Participant's required beginning date (or, if the last sentence of subsection (e) applies, the date distribution is required to begin to the surviving Spouse pursuant to subsection (e)). If distribution in the form of an annuity irrevocably commences to the Participant before the required beginning date, distribution is considered to commence on the date it actually commences.

 

Any amount paid to a child shall be treated as if it had been paid to the surviving Spouse if such amount will become payable to the surviving Spouse when the child reaches the age of majority.

 

(b) Transitional Rule : Notwithstanding (a) above, payment of benefits to a Beneficiary or surviving spouse may be made in accordance with the following requirements regardless of when such payment of benefits commences or the manner in which payments are made:

 

(1) The distribution is one which would not have disqualified the Plan under Code Section 401(a)(9) as in effect prior to January 1, 1984;

 

(2) The distribution is in accordance with a method of distribution designated by the Participant or, if the Participant is deceased, the Beneficiary or spouse of the Participant;

 

(3) Such designation was in writing, was signed by the Participant, spouse, or Beneficiary and was made prior to January 1, 1984;

 

36
 

 

(4) The Participant had an Accrued Benefit under the Plan as of December 31, 1983; and

 

(5) The method of distribution designated by the Participant, spouse, or Beneficiary specifies the time at which distribution will commence, the period over which the distribution will be made, and in the case of any distribution upon the Participant's death, the Beneficiaries of the Participant listed in order of priority.

 

A distribution upon death will not be covered by this transitional rule unless the information in the designation contains the required information described above with respect to the distribution to be made upon the death of the Participant.

 

For any distribution which commenced before January 1, 1984, but continues after December 31, 1983, the Participant, spouse, or Beneficiary, to whom such distribution is being made, will be presumed to have designated the method of distribution under which the distribution is being made if the method of distribution was specified in writing and the distribution satisfies the requirements in Items (1) and (5) above.

 

If such a designation is revoked, any subsequent distribution must satisfy the requirements of Subsection (a) above. Any changes in the designation will be considered to be a revocation of the designation. However, the mere substitution or addition of another Beneficiary (one not named in the designation) under the designation will not be considered to be a revocation of the designation, so long as such substitution or addition does not alter the period over which distributions are to be made under the designation, directly or indirectly (for example, by altering the relevant measuring life).

 

37
 

 

ARTICLE VIII – TERMINATION OF EMPLOYMENT AND VESTING

 

8.01 Vesting of Benefits

 

Prior to his Normal Retirement Age, a Participant shall have a Vested Accrued Benefit in accordance with the vesting schedule and provisions of Section 8.02. Upon attaining Normal Retirement Age, a Participant shall be automatically one hundred percent (100%) vested in his Accrued Benefit.

 

8.02 Vesting Schedule

 

A Participant’s Vested Accrued Benefit as of any given date shall be equal to his Accrued Benefit at such date multiplied by the applicable percentage from the following schedule, based on his number of Years of Vesting Service at such date:

 

Years of
Vesting Service
  Vesting
Percentage
 
       
Less than 10     0 %
10 or More     100 %

 

Notwithstanding the above, if a Participant is credited with at least one (1) Hour of Service in a Plan Year beginning after December 31, 1988, such Participant’s Vested Accrued Benefit as of any given date shall be equal to his Accrued Benefit at such date multiplied by the applicable percentage from the following schedule, based on his number of Years of Vesting Service at such date:

 

Years of
Vesting Service
  Vesting
Percentage
 
       
Less than 5     0 %
5 or More     100 %

 

Notwithstanding the above schedule, a Participant who terminates employment due to Early Retirement as provided in Section 4.02 or Disability Retirement as provided in Section 4.04, shall be one hundred percent (100%) vested in his Accrued Benefit.

 

8.03 Amendments to the Vesting Schedule

 

No amendment to the vesting schedule or provisions of Section 8.02, or to this Plan which directly or indirectly affects the computation of a Participant’s Accrued Benefit, shall decrease the vesting percentage of a Participant or deprive a Participant of a vested right to the benefits accrued to the effective date of the amendment. Furthermore, if the vesting schedule or provisions of Section 8.02 are amended, each Participant with at least three (3) Years of Vesting Service (determined as of the later of the date the amendment is adopted or the date the amendment is effective) may elect to have his vesting percentage computed under the Plan without regard to such amendment. The period during which the election may be made shall commence with the date the amendment is adopted and shall end on the latest of:

 

38
 

 

(a) Sixty (60) days after the amendment is adopted;

 

(b) Sixty (60) days after the amendment becomes effective; or

 

(c) Sixty (60) days after the Participant is issued written notice of the amendment by the Employer or the Plan Administrator.

 

In the absence of any written notice under (c) above, any Participant who has at least three (3) Years of Vesting Service (as determined above) shall at all times receive a vested interest under whichever vesting schedule provides the greatest vested interest.

 

8.04 Distribution of Vested Accrued Benefit

 

If a Participant terminates employment for reasons other than Retirement, as provided in Article IV, or death, payment of the Participant’s Vested Accrued Benefit shall be deferred to a date no later than the date determined under Section 6.08 and then distributed in accordance with the provisions of Article VI. If a Participant or Former Participant terminated employment prior to his Early Retirement Age and had satisfied the other requirements for Early Retirement specified in Section 4.02, he shall be eligible to elect an Early Retirement Benefit upon attainment of his Early Retirement Age, provided he has not received a distribution of his Vested Accrued Benefit prior to such time.

 

If the Participant is to receive a deferred payment of his Vested Accrued Benefit, but dies or incurs a Disability before his Annuity Starting Date, the Plan Administrator, upon notice of the death or Disability, shall direct the Trustee to make payment of the Participant’s Vested Accrued Benefit to him (or to his surviving spouse or Beneficiary if the Participant is deceased) in accordance with the provisions of Article VII in the case of death, or Section 5.04 in the case of Disability.

 

Notwithstanding the above, if a terminated Participant is re-employed by the Employer prior to distribution of his Vested Accrued Benefit, such distribution shall not be made until his employment is again terminated.

 

Payment of vested accrued benefits shall also be subject to the provisions of Section 6.04 concerning payment of small amounts. In the event a Participant’s Vested Accrued Benefit is distributed in the form of a single lump sum payment, payment of such benefit shall be made not later than as soon as administratively feasible after the last day of the Plan Year in which the Participant incurs a One Year Break in Service.

 

8.05 Accrued Benefit Upon Re-employment

 

If a Former Participant is re-employed by the Employer and again becomes a Participant in this Plan, Years of Credited Service and Years of Participation for which he received a lump sum distribution shall be disregarded in computing such Participant’s Normal Retirement Benefit and Accrued Benefit after re-entry into the Plan, unless the Participant may and does repay such distribution as provided in Section 8.06. If such a Participant does repay such distribution as provided in Section 8.06, his Years of Credited Service and Years of Participation prior to his Termination of Employment shall be fully restored in determining his future Normal Retirement Benefit and Accrued Benefit.

 

39
 

 

If such a Participant was to receive a deferred Vested Accrued Benefit as provided in Section 8.04(b), his Years of Credited Service and Years of Participation prior to his Termination of Employment shall be fully restored in determining his future Normal Retirement Benefit and Accrued Benefit, and his previous deferred Vested Accrued Benefit shall be cancelled.

 

8.06 Repayment of Distribution

 

A Former Participant as described in Section 8.05 who received a lump sum distribution of less than one hundred percent (100%) of his Accrued Benefit shall be entitled to repay the amount so distributed. Such repayment must be made not later than the earlier of:

 

(a) The date on which the Participant incurs five (5) consecutive One Year Breaks in Service after the date of distribution.

 

(b) The end of the five (5) year period beginning with the date the Participant is re-employed by the Employer.

 

In the case of any other withdrawal the repayment must be made five (5) years after the date of the withdrawal.

 

The repayment must be for the full amount of such distributions plus interest at five percent (5%) per annum compounded annually, or such other rate of interest as the Secretary of the Treasury or his delegate may prescribe, computed from the date of such distribution to the date of repayment.

 

8.07 Breaks in Service and Vesting

 

If a Participant has a One Year Break in Service, the Participant’s Years of Vesting Service before the One Year Break in Service shall not be included in computing Years of Vesting Service until the Participant shall have completed one Year of Vesting Service after the One Year Break in Service. If an Employee terminated employment prior to becoming a Participant and incurred a One Year Break in Service, or if a Participant did not have any Vested Accrued Benefit derived from Employer contributions prior to a One Year Break in Service, Years of Vesting Service before a One Year Break in Service shall not be included in Years of Vesting Service calculated after the Participant’s One Year Break in Service if the number of consecutive One Year Breaks in Service equals or exceeds the greater of five (5) or the aggregate number of such Years of Vesting Service before the One Year Break in Service. All other Years of Vesting Service shall be aggregated for determining a Participant’s Vesting Percentage under Section 8.02.

 

Notwithstanding the previous paragraph, an Employee’s Years of Vesting Service prior to the first Plan Year beginning after December 31, 1984 shall be disregarded if such Years of Vesting Service would have been disregarded under the provisions of the Plan and Code Section 411(a)(6)(D) (as in effect on August 22, 1984) as of the day preceding the first day of such Plan Year.

 

40
 

 

8.08 Effect of Social Security Changes

 

If a Participant terminates employment with the Employer and does not subsequently resume participation in the Plan, the benefits payable under this Plan shall not be decreased as a result of any increase in the benefit level or taxable wage base under Title II of the Social Security Act effective after the date the Participant terminates his employment with the Employer. If a Participant terminates employment with the Employer and subsequently resumes participation in the Plan, any increase in the benefit level or taxable wage base under Title II of the Social Security Act effective during his separation from service shall not have the effect of reducing the benefit to which a Participant would have been entitled if he had not returned to service after Termination of Employment with the Employer.

 

8.09 Disposition of Non-Vested Benefits

 

Any non-vested Accrued Benefit forfeited under this Plan pursuant to this Article VIII shall become a general asset of this Plan and Trust and shall not be used to increase any benefits payable under this Plan. Any such non-vested Accrued Benefit shall be used to reduce future Employer contributions to the Plan.

 

41
 

 

ARTICLE IX – CONTRIBUTIONS BY PARTICIPANTS

 

9.01 Mandatory Participant Contributions

 

No contributions are required of an Employee to become or remain a Participant in this Plan.

 

9.02 Voluntary Contributions by Participants

 

No voluntary contributions by Participants are permitted to be made to this Plan and Trust.

 

9.03 Rollover Contributions by Participants

 

No rollover contributions by Participants are permitted to be made to this Plan and Trust.

 

42
 

 

ARTICLE X – LOANS TO PARTICIPANTS

 

10.01 Availability of Loans

 

No loans to Participants shall be permitted under this Plan.

 

43
 

 

ARTICLE XI – RESTRICTIONS TO PREVENT DISCRIMINATION

 

11.01 Restrictions to Prevent Discrimination

 

Benefit payments under this Plan shall be restricted as follows:

 

(a) If the Plan is terminated, the benefit of any highly compensated employee or highly compensated former employee, as defined in Code Section 414(q), shall be limited to a benefit that is non-discriminatory under Code Section 401(a)(4).

 

(b) The benefit of any highly compensated employee or highly compensated former employee who is among the 25 employees who received the highest Compensation in the current or any prior year shall be limited to a benefit equal in each year to payments that would be made on behalf of the employee under:

 

(i) A straight life annuity that is the Actuarial Equivalent of the Accrued Benefit and other benefits to which the employee is entitled under the Plan, other than a Social Security supplement; and

 

(ii) Any Social Security supplement.

 

However, the restrictions in this paragraph (b) shall not apply if any one of the following requirements is satisfied with respect to an affected employee:

 

(i) After payment of all benefits to the affected employee, the value of Plan assets equals or exceeds one hundred ten percent (110%) of the value of current liabilities, as defined in Code Section 412(l)(7) (for Plan Years beginning before 2008; Code Section 430(g) for Plan Years beginning after 2007) ; or

 

(ii) The value of all benefits payable to the affected employee is less than one percent (1%) of the value of current liabilities; or

 

(iii) The value of all benefits payable to the affected employee does not exceed the amount described in Code Section 411(a)(11)(A).

 

11.02 Repayment of Restricted Benefits

 

Notwithstanding the above, the Plan Administrator may authorize the Trustee to pay a Participant’s benefit as a single lump sum payment, provided that:

 

(a) The Participant enters into an agreement with the Trustee providing for repayment of the amount which would be restricted under the provisions of this Article XI; and

 

(b) The Participant guarantees such repayment either:

 

44
 

 

(i) By holding in an acceptable depository property having a fair market value equal to at least one hundred twenty-five percent (125%) of the amount which would have to be repaid if the Plan were terminated on the date the lump sum payment was made; or

 

(ii) By securing repayment by posting a bond or obtaining a bank letter of credit for such amount;

 

Until notified by the Plan Administrator that the repayment obligation has lapsed. If the fair market value of property deposited pursuant to (i) above declines to less than one hundred ten percent (110%) of the amount to be repaid, the Participant shall deliver additional property to the depository such that the value of all property so deposited equals at least one hundred twenty-five percent (125%) of the amount to be repaid. For purposes of the above, the amount to be repaid may be adjusted from time to time to take into account any decrease in the amount of the restricted benefit due to passage of time.

 

45
 

 

ARTICLE XII - FIDUCIARY DUTIES

 

12.01 General Fiduciary Duty

 

A Fiduciary, whether or not a Named Fiduciary, shall discharge his duties solely in the interest of the Participants and their Beneficiaries hereunder. All assets of this Plan shall be devoted to the exclusive purpose of providing benefits to Participants and their Beneficiaries and defraying the reasonable expenses of administering the Plan. Each Fiduciary, whether or not a Named Fiduciary, shall discharge his duties with the care, skill, prudence and diligence under the circumstances then prevailing that a prudent man acting in a like capacity and familiar with such matters would use in the conduct of an enterprise of a like character and with like aims. Each such Fiduciary shall also discharge his duties in a manner consistent with the documents and instruments governing the Plan to the extent such documents and instruments are consistent with law. No Fiduciary, whether or not a Named Fiduciary, shall engage in any of the prohibited transactions with disqualified persons or parties-in-interest as those terms and transactions are defined by ERISA, as passed and as it may be amended, and regulations thereunder.

 

12.02 Allocation of Responsibilities

 

Each Named Fiduciary shall have only those duties and responsibilities expressly allocated under the terms of this Plan. No other duties or responsibilities shall be implied.

 

12.03 Delegation of Responsibilities

 

Each Named Fiduciary may delegate the fiduciary responsibilities other than Trustee responsibilities allocated to such Fiduciary under this Plan to any person other than a Named Fiduciary. If any duties or responsibilities are delegated under this Section, the person to whom such duties or responsibilities are delegated shall acknowledge the fact in writing and shall specify in writing the duties and responsibilities so delegated. All other duties and responsibilities shall be deemed not to have been delegated.

 

12.04 Liability for Allocation or Delegation of Responsibilities

 

A Named Fiduciary shall not be liable for the acts or omissions of a person to whom responsibilities or duties are allocated or delegated in accordance with Section 12.02 or Section 12.03 except to the extent such Named Fiduciary breaches his obligation under Section 12.01:

 

(a) With respect to the allocation or delegation;

 

(b) With respect to establishing or implementing a procedure for allocation or delegation; or

 

(c) By continuing the allocation or delegation.

 

Nothing in this Section shall relieve a Fiduciary from liability incurred under Section 12.05.

 

46
 

  

12.05 Liability for Co-Fiduciaries

 

In addition to the liability a Fiduciary may incur for the breach of his duty under Section 12.01 or 12.04, a Fiduciary shall be liable for a breach of Fiduciary duty committed by another Fiduciary in the following circumstances:

 

(a) If he participates knowingly in, or knowingly undertakes to conceal, an act of omission of such other Fiduciary knowing such act or omission is a breach;

 

(b) If, by his failure to comply with Section 12.01 of this Plan, he has enabled such other Fiduciary to commit a breach;

 

(c) If he has knowledge of a breach by such other Fiduciary, unless he makes reasonable efforts under the circumstances to remedy the breach.

 

12.06 Same Person May Serve in More than One Capacity

 

Nothing herein shall prevent any person from serving in more than one Fiduciary capacity.

 

47
 

 

ARTICLE XIII - THE PLAN ADMINISTRATOR

 

13.01 Appointment of Plan Administrator

 

The Plan Sponsor shall appoint the Plan Administrator or, in the absence of appointment, shall be the Plan Administrator. If more than one person has been appointed Plan Administrator, the persons so appointed shall comprise the Administrative Committee and all references in the Plan to the Plan Administrator shall be deemed to refer to the Administrative Committee. The Administrative Committee shall act by majority vote except that they shall act by unanimous vote at any time when there are only two members comprising the Administrative Committee. If the Plan Sponsor is the Plan Administrator, action on behalf of the Plan Sponsor may be taken by its Board of Directors, Corporate President, or any other Corporate Officer or Committee duly authorized by the Board of Directors.

 

13.02 Acceptance by Plan Administrator

 

The Plan Administrator shall accept his appointment by joining with the Employer and the Trustee in the execution of this Agreement.

 

13.03 Signature of Plan Administrator

 

All persons dealing with the Plan Administrator may rely on any document executed by the Plan Administrator; or, in the event more than one person has been designated as Plan Administrator, such persons may rely on any document executed by at least one member of the Administrative Committee as being the act of the Plan Administrator; or, in the event the Plan Sponsor is Plan Administrator, such persons may rely on any document executed by the Employer’s Corporate President, or any other individual duly authorized by the Board of Directors.

 

13.04 Appointment of an Investment Manager

 

The Plan Administrator may appoint an Investment Manager or Managers to manage, acquire and dispose of any assets of the Plan. If more than one person has been appointed Investment Manager, the persons so appointed shall comprise the Investment Committee and all references in the Plan to the Investment Manager shall be deemed to refer to the Investment Committee. The Investment Manager shall accept his appointment by written agreement executed by the Plan Administrator and the Investment Manager or, in the case of an Investment Committee, each of its members. This written agreement shall specify the Plan assets for which the Investment Manager is responsible and such written instrument shall be kept with the other documents governing the operation of the Plan. The Trustee shall be entitled to rely on written instructions from the Investment Manager and shall be under no obligation to invest or otherwise manage any asset of the Plan subject to the management of such Investment Manager.

 

13.05 Duties of the Plan Administrator

 

The Plan Administrator shall be responsible for the general administration of the Plan including, but not limited to, the following:

 

(a) To prepare an annual report, summary plan description and modifications thereto, and summary annual report;

 

48
 

 

(b) To complete and file the various reports and tax forms with the appropriate government agencies as required by law;

 

(c) To distribute to Plan Participants and/or their Beneficiaries the summary plan description and reports sufficient to inform such Participants or Beneficiaries of their Accrued Benefit and their Vested Accrued Benefit as required by law;

 

(d) To determine annually, or more frequently if necessary, which Employees are eligible to participate in the Plan;

 

(e) To determine, or have determined, the contributions necessary to maintain the Plan on a sound actuarial basis and to satisfy the minimum funding standards established by law;

 

(f) To determine the benefits to which Participants and their Beneficiaries are entitled;

 

(g) To provide Plan Participants with a written explanation of the effect of electing an Optional Form of Benefit;

 

(h) To retain copies of all documents or instruments under which the Plan operates in its own office, the principal place of business of the Plan Sponsor and such other place as the Secretary of Labor or his delegate may by regulation prescribe; to make all such documents and instruments governing the operation of the Plan available for inspection by Plan Participants and/or their Beneficiaries; and to furnish copies of such documents or instruments to Plan Participants and/or their Beneficiaries on request, charging only the cost thereof as prescribed by regulation of the Secretary of Labor or his delegate;

 

(i) To provide, with complete and total discretion, interpretations of the Plan provisions when requested or needed; and

 

(j) To act as the Plan’s Agent for Service of Legal Process, unless another agent is designated by the Plan Sponsor, and to act on behalf of the Plan in all matters in which the Plan is or may be a party.

 

13.06 Claims Procedure

 

The claims procedure shall be as follows:

 

(a) Claim . A Participant or Beneficiary or other person who believes that he is being denied a benefit to which he is entitled (hereinafter referred to as "Claimant") may file a written request for such benefit with the Plan Administrator on forms supplied by the Plan Sponsor setting forth his claim.

 

49
 

 

(b) Response to Claim . The Plan Administrator shall respond within ninety (90) days (45 days in the case of a claim for a Disability Retirement Benefit) of receipt of the claim. However, upon written notification to the Claimant, the response period may be extended, for an additional ninety (90) days (two additional 30 day periods in the case of a claim for a Disability Retirement Benefit). The extension notice shall indicate the special circumstances requiring an extension of time and the date by which the plan expects to render the determination. In the case of a claim for a Disability Retirement Benefit, the notice of an extension shall specifically explain the standards on which entitlement to a benefit is based, the unresolved issues that prevent a decision on the claim, and the additional information needed to resolve those issues, and the claimant shall be afforded at least 45 days within which to provide the specified information. If the claim is denied in whole or in part, the Claimant shall be provided with a written opinion using nontechnical language calculated to be understood by the Participant setting forth:

 

(1) The specific reason or reasons for denial;

 

(2) The specific references to pertinent Plan provisions on which the denial is based;

 

(3) A description of any additional material or information necessary for the Claimant to perfect the claim and an explanation of why such material or such information is necessary;

 

(4) Appropriate information as to the steps to be taken if the Claimant wishes to submit the claim for review;

 

(5) The time limits for requesting a review; and

 

(6) A statement of the Claimant's right to bring a civil action under ERISA Section 502(a) following the adverse benefit determination on review.

 

13.07 Claims Review Procedure:

 

(a) Within sixty (60) days (180 days in the case of a claim for a Disability Retirement Benefit) after the receipt by the Claimant of the written opinion described above, the Claimant may request in writing that the Plan Administrator review the determination.

 

The Claimant or his duly authorized representative may review the pertinent documents and submit written comments, documents, records, and other information for consideration by the Plan Administrator. The Claimant shall be provided, upon request and free of charge, reasonable access to and copies of, all documents, records, and other information relevant to the Claimant's claim for benefits. If the Claimant does not request a review of the Plan Administrator's determination within such sixty- (60) day period (180 days in the case of a claim for a Disability Retirement Benefit), he shall be barred and stopped from challenging the Plan Administrator's determination.

 

50
 

 

The Plan Administrator shall review the determination within sixty (60) days (45 days in the case of a claim for a Disability Retirement Benefit) after receipt of a Claimant's request for review; provided, however, that for reasonable cause such period may be extended due to special circumstances for an additional sixty (60) days (45 days in the case of a Claim for a Disability Retirement Benefit). In the case of a claim for a Disability Retirement Benefit, the notice of an extension shall specifically explain the standards on which entitlement to a benefit is based, the unresolved issues that prevent a decision on the claim, and the additional information needed to resolve those issues, and the claimant shall be afforded at least 45 days within which to provide the specified information. In the case of a committee that meets at least on a regular quarterly basis, the committee shall make a benefit determination no later than the meeting date that immediately follows the Plan's receipt of the request for a review, unless the request for review is filed within 30 days before the meeting date. In such case, the benefit determination may be made no later than the date of the second meeting following the Plan's receipt of the request for review. After considering all materials presented by the Claimant, the Plan Administrator will render a written opinion, written in a manner calculated to be understood by the Claimant setting forth the specific reasons for the decision and containing specific references to the pertinent Plan provisions on which the decision is based. If the claim is denied in whole or in part, the Claimant shall be provided with a written opinion using nontechnical language setting forth:

 

(1) The specific reason or reasons for denial;

 

(2) The specific references to pertinent Plan provisions on which the denial is based;

 

(3) A statement that the Claimant is entitled to receive, upon request and free of charge, reasonable access to, and copies of, all documents, records, and other information relevant to the claimant's claim for benefits;

 

(4) A statement describing any voluntary appeal procedures offered by the Plan and the claimant's right to obtain the information about such procedures; and

 

(5) A statement of the Claimant's right to bring an action under ERISA Section 502(a).

 

(b) Procedures (General) . The following procedures shall apply to any claim filed or reviewed pursuant to this Section:

 

51
 

 

(1) Any Claimant may be represented by an authorized representative; however, the Administrator may determine reasonable procedures to determine whether any individual is authorized to act on behalf of another individual.

 

(2) The Administrator or any other person or persons acting as a named fiduciary for this purpose shall determine administrative safeguards designed to ensure and verify that all determinations are made in accordance with governing Plan documents and that all Plan provisions are applied consistently with respect to similarly situated claimants.

 

(3) The response periods described above shall be tolled for periods during which the Claimant is responding to a request for additional information that the Administrator or other named fiduciary has determined is necessary to process the claimant’s claim. The claimant shall have not less than 45 days to provide the requested information. The response periods described above shall recommence when the claimant provides the requested information.

 

(c) Procedures (Disability) . In the case of a claim that relates to a Disability Retirement pension, the following additional procedures shall apply.

 

(1) An individual or committee designated by the board of directors of the Company, but not the person or persons responsible for the initial review, shall be the named fiduciary responsible for determining the appeal. Such individual or committee may not make such determination if the individual or committee (or a subordinate thereof) was consulted in connection with the initial claim for benefits.

 

(2) The review shall not afford deference to the initial adverse benefit determination.

 

(3) When the appeal is based on a medical judgment, the named fiduciary shall consult with a health care professional who has appropriate experience and training in the field involved in determining the Claimant’s disability and shall identify all medical and vocational experts whose advice was obtained in connection with the appeal. A health care professional may not be consulted under this subsection if the health care professional (or a subordinate of such individual) was consulted in connection with the initial claim for benefits.

 

(4) If the named fiduciary makes an adverse benefit determination on review, the named fiduciary shall provide the Claimant with a statement that the Claimant is entitled to receive or request reasonable access to, and copies of, all information relevant to the claim for benefits, including internal rules, guidelines, and protocols (to the extent relied upon) and a statement regarding voluntary alternative dispute resolution options.

 

52
 

 

13.08 Compensation and Expenses of Plan Administrator

 

The Plan Administrator may engage any person, including counsel, whose services, in the opinion of the Plan Administrator, are necessary to assist him in carrying out his responsibilities under the Plan. The Employer shall direct the Trustee to pay any expenses properly and actually incurred for such services from the Trust Fund, including such reasonable compensation for services provided by the Plan Administrator as shall have been agreed upon between them, or, alternatively, the Employer may pay such expenses or compensation directly; provided, however, that no Plan Administrator shall receive any compensation if he already receives full-time pay from the Employer.

 

13.09 Removal or Resignation

 

Plan Administrator may be removed by the Board of Directors of the Plan Sponsor upon thirty (30) days written notice, and may resign upon thirty (30) days written notice to the Board of Directors. Upon such removal or resignation, or the inability of the Plan Administrator for any other reason to act as Plan Administrator, the Board of Directors shall appoint a Successor Plan Administrator. The successor Plan Administrator, upon written acceptance, shall have all the duties and responsibilities of a Plan Administrator hereinunder. The former Plan Administrator shall deliver to the successor Plan Administrator all records and documents held by him relating to the Plan upon such removal or resignation.

 

13.10 Records of Plan Administrator

 

The Employer and Trustee shall have access, upon request, to all the records of the Plan Administrator that relate to the Plan.

 

13.11 Other Responsibilities

 

Nothing in this Article shall be construed to limit the responsibilities and duties allocated to the Plan Administrator in other Articles of this Plan.

 

53
 

 

ARTICLE XIV – THE TRUSTEE

 

14.01 Appointment of Trustee

 

The Board of Directors of the Plan Sponsor shall appoint the Trustee. Nothing in this Plan shall prevent the Plan Sponsor from appointing multiple Trustees of creating multiple Trust Funds, each with separate Trustees. If more than one person is appointed as Trustee or a single Trust Fund, they shall act by majority vote; provided, however, that they shall act by unanimous vote at any time when there are only two Trustees. In the event there is more than one Trust, a reference to Trust shall be deemed to refer to all the Trusts. In the event there is more than one Trustee, a reference to Trustee shall be deemed to refer to all the Trustees.

 

14.02 Acceptance by Trustee

 

The Trustee shall accept his appointment by joining with the Employer and Plan Administrator in the execution of this Agreement.

 

14.03 Signature of Trustee

 

All persons dealing with the Trustee may rely on any document executed by the Trustee or, in the event there is more than one Trustee, on any document executed by at least one Trustee as being the act of the Trustee or Trustees.

 

14.04 Co-Trustees

 

In the event the Plan Sponsor appoints more than one Trustee under the Plan, and the Trustees accept such appointment, each Trustee shall use reasonable care to prevent a Co-Trustee from committing a breach under the Plan.

 

14.05 Allocation of Responsibilities

 

Nothing herein shall prevent Trustees from allocating specific responsibilities among themselves; provided, however, that all responsibilities so allocated must be evidenced by a written agreement executed by all the Trustees stating with particularity the responsibilities that have been allocated. Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 14.04, no Trustee shall be liable for the failure to exercise reasonable care to prevent a breach by a Co-Trustee if an allocation has been made under this section.

 

14.06 Removal or Resignation

 

A Trustee may be removed by the Board of Directors of the Plan Sponsor upon thirty (30) days written notice and may resign upon thirty (30) days written notice to the Plan Sponsor. Upon such removal or resignation, or the inability of the Trustee to act as Trustee for any reason, the Board of Directors of the Plan Sponsor shall appoint a successor Trustee. The successor Trustee, upon written acceptance, shall have all the rights, title to assets, powers, duties, privileges and immunities of a Trustee under this Plan. The former Trustee shall deliver to the successor Trustee all monies, contracts, records and all other property held by him for the purpose of this Plan and shall perform such other acts, if any, which may be necessary to give full effect to this section.

 

54
 

 

The Board of Directors of the Plan Sponsor may designate one or more successors prior to the death, resignation, incapacity or removal of a Trustee. In the event a successor is so designated by the Board of Directors, and accepts such designation, the successor shall, without further act, become vested with all the estate, rights, powers, discretion and duties of his predecessor with the like effect as if he were originally named as a Trustee herein immediately upon the death, resignation, incapacity or removal of his predecessor.

 

14.07 Action by Trustee

 

As it becomes necessary, and from time to time, the Trustee may request an interpretation of Plan provisions from the Plan Administrator. The Trustee shall be relieved of all liability for relying on such interpretation supplied by the Plan Administrator except as provided in Sections 12.04 and 12.05.

 

14.08 Records and Statement

 

The Trustee shall keep accurate and detailed accounts of all transactions for which he has responsibility hereunder. All accounts, books and records relating thereto shall be open to inspection at any reasonable time by any Participant or Former Participant, their Beneficiaries, the Employer, the Plan Administrator or any authorized representative of the foregoing. Within sixty (60) days after each Plan Anniversary, or such other date as may be agreed upon by the Trustee, Employer and Plan Administrator, and within sixty (60) days after the removal, resignation, or inability for any reason whatsoever of any Trustee to act, the Employer or Plan Administrator may require the Trustee to file with the Employer and Plan Administrator a statement of the transactions for which he has responsibility. Within ninety (90) days after filing such statement, the Plan Administrator and Employer shall notify the Trustee of any impropriety shown in such statement.

 

14.09 Responsibility for Plan Assets

 

The Trustee shall be responsible only for such monies, contracts and other property as shall actually be received by him as Trustee hereunder. The Trustee shall not be liable for failure to make any payment to any person entitled thereto under the Plan unless the Trustee has sufficient funds to do so or would have sufficient funds if it were not for breach of a Fiduciary duty specified in Article XII.

 

14.10 Investment Powers and Duties of the Trustee

 

Except to the extent responsibility for certain Plan assets has been allocated to an Investment Manager as provided in Section 13.04, the Trustee is authorized and empowered to invest the Trust Fund as hereinafter provided:

 

(a) The Trustee shall invest and reinvest the Trust Fund to keep the Trust Fund invested without distinction between principal and income and in such securities or property, real or personal, wherever situated, as the Trustee shall deem advisable, including, but not limited to, stocks, common or preferred, bonds and other evidences of indebtedness or ownership, and real estate or any interest therein. The Trustee shall at all times in making investments of the Trust Fund consider, among other factors, the short and long-term financial needs of the Plan on the basis of information furnished by the Employer. In making such investments, the Trustee shall not be restricted to securities or other property of the character expressly authorized by the applicable law for trust investments; however, the Trustee shall give due regard to any limitations imposed by the Code or ERISA so that at all times this Plan may qualify as a qualified Plan and Trust.

 

55
 

 

(b) The Trustee may, from time to time with the consent of the Employer, transfer to a common, collective, or pooled trust fund organized and maintained in the United States by any corporate Trustee, Investment Manager or Custodian hereunder, all or such part of the Trust Fund as the Trustee may deem advisable, provided such common, collective or pooled trust fund expressly limits participation to qualified pension and profit sharing trusts; prohibits that part of its corpus or income which equitably belongs to any trust from being used for or directed to any purposes other than the exclusive benefit of the employees or their beneficiaries who are entitled to benefits thereunder; and prohibits assignment by a participating trust of any part of its equity or interest in the common, collective or pooled trust fund. All the terms and provisions of any such common, collective, or pooled trust fund in which this Trust may participate are hereby adopted and made part of this Plan. The Trustee, may, from time to time with the consent of the Employer, withdraw from such common, collective, or pooled trust fund all or such part of the Trust Fund as the Trustee may deem advisable.

 

(c) The Trustee, at the direction of the Plan Administrator, shall apply for, own, and pay premiums on Insurance Contracts or annuity contracts, or group annuity contracts from an Insurer.

 

14.11 Other Powers of the Trustee

 

The Trustee, in addition to all powers and authorities under common law, statutory authority, including ERISA, and other provisions of this Agreement, shall have the following powers and authorities, to be exercised in the Trustee’s sole discretion:

 

(a) To purchase, or subscribe for, any securities or other property and to retain the same. In conjunction with the purchase of securities, margin accounts may be opened and maintained;

 

(b) To sell, exchange, convey, transfer, grant options to purchase, or otherwise dispose of any securities or other property held by the Trustee, by private contract or at public auction. No person dealing with the Trustee shall be bound to see to the application of the purchase money or to inquire into the validity, expediency, or propriety of any such sale or other disposition, with or without advertisement;

 

(c) To vote upon any stocks, bonds, or other securities; to give general or special proxies or powers of attorney with or without power of substitution; to exercise any conversion privileges, subscription rights or other options, and to make any payments incidental thereto; to oppose, or to consent to, or otherwise participate in, corporate reorganizations or other changes affecting corporate securities, and to delegate discretionary powers, and to pay any assessments or charges in connection therewith; and generally to exercise any of the powers of an owner with respect to stocks, bonds, securities, or other property;

 

56
 

 

(d) To cause any securities or other property to be registered in the Trustee’s own name or in the name of one or more of the Trustee’s nominees, and to hold any investments in bearer form, but the books and records of the Trustee shall at all times show that all such investments are part of the Trust Fund;

 

(e) To borrow or raise money for the purposes of the Plan in such amount, and upon such terms and conditions, as the Trustee shall deem advisable; and for any sum so borrowed, to issue a promissory note as Trustee, and to secure the repayment thereof by pledging all, or any part, of the Trust Fund; and no person lending money to the Trustee shall be bound to see to the application of the money lent or to inquire into the validity, expediency, or propriety of any borrowing;

 

(f) To keep such portion of the Trust Fund in cash or cash balances as the Trustee may, from time to time, deem to be in the best interests of the Plan, without liability for interest thereon;

 

(g) To accept and retain for such time as it may deem advisable any securities or other property received or acquired by it as Trustee hereunder, whether or not such securities or other property would normally be purchased as investments hereunder;

 

(h) To make, execute, acknowledge, and deliver any and all documents of transfer and conveyance and any and all other instruments that may be necessary or appropriate to carry out the powers herein granted;

 

(i) To settle, compromise, or submit to arbitration any claims, debts, or damages due or owing to or from the Plan, to commence or defend suits or legal administrative proceedings, and to represent the Plan in all suits and legal and administrative proceedings;

 

(j) To employ suitable agents and counsel and to pay their reasonable expenses and compensation, which agent or counsel may or may not be agent or counsel for the Employer;

 

(k) To do all such acts and exercise all such rights and privileges, although not specifically mentioned herein, as the Trustee may deem necessary to carry out the purposes of the Plan;

 

(l) To apply for and procure from responsible insurance companies, to be selected by the Plan Administrator, as an investment of the Trust Fund such endowment or annuity contracts on the life of any Participant as the Plan Administrator shall deem proper; to exercise, at any time or from time to time, whatever rights and privileges may be granted under such endowment or annuity contracts; to collect, receive, and settle for the proceeds of all such endowment or annuity contracts as and when entitled to do so under the provisions thereof;

 

57
 

 

(m) To invest funds of the Trust in time deposits or savings accounts bearing a reasonable rate of interest in the Trustee’s bank;

 

(n) To invest in Treasury Bills and other forms of United States government obligations;

 

(o) Except as hereinafter expressly authorized, the Trustee is prohibited from selling or purchasing stock options. The Trustee is expressly authorized to write and sell call options under which the holder of the option has the right to purchase shares of stock held by the Trustee as a part of the assets of this Trust, if such options are traded on and sold through a national securities exchange registered under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, which exchange has been authorized to provide a market for option contracts pursuant to Rule 9B-1 promulgated under such Act, and so long as the Trustee at all times up to and including the time of exercise or expiration of any such option holds sufficient stock in the assets of this Trust to meet the obligations under such option if exercised. In addition, the Trustee is expressly authorized to purchase and acquire call options for the purchase of shares of stock covered by such options if the options are traded on and purchased through a national securities exchange as described in the immediately preceding sentence, and so long as any such option is purchased solely in a closing purchase transaction, meaning the purchase of an exchange traded call option the effect of which is to reduce or eliminate the obligations of the Trustee with respect to a stock option contract or contracts which it has previously written and sold in a transaction authorized under the immediately preceding sentence;

 

(p) To deposit monies in federally insured savings accounts or certificates of deposit in banks or savings and loan associations;

 

(q) To pool all or any of the Trust Fund, from time to time, with assets belonging to any other qualified employee pension benefit or profit sharing trust created by the Employer, and to commingle such assets and make joint or common investments and carry joint accounts on behalf of this Plan and such other trust or trusts, allocating undivided shares or interests in such investments or accounts or any pooled assets of the two or more trusts in accordance with their respective interests; and

 

(r) To retain a bank, savings and loan association or similar financial institution to act as a Custodian of all or a portion of the Trust Assets. The retention of a Custodian shall be evidenced by a written agreement between the Trustees and the Custodian. The provisions of such agreement, as it may be amended from time to time, shall govern any assets held thereunder and is hereby made a part of this Agreement.

 

58
 

 

14.12 Duties of the Trustee Regarding Payments

 

At the direction of the Plan Administrator, the Trustee shall, from time to time, in accordance with the terms of the Plan, make payments out of the Trust Fund. The Trustee shall not be responsible in any way for the application of such payments.

 

14.13 Compensation and Expenses of Trustee

 

The Trustee may engage the services of any person, including counsel, whose services, in the opinion of the Trustee, are necessary to assist him in carrying out his responsibilities under the Plan. The Employer shall direct the Trustee to pay any expenses properly and actually incurred for such services from the Trust Fund, including such reasonable compensation for services provided by the Trustee as shall have been agreed upon between them, or, alternatively, the Employer may pay such expenses or compensation directly; provided, however, that no Trustee shall receive any compensation if he already receives full-time pay from the Employer.

 

14.14 Payment of Expenses

 

If so directed by the Employer or the Plan Administrator, the Trustee shall pay from the Trust Fund the expenses incurred or charged by a person or organization engaged by the Employer or Plan Administrator to assist them in establishing or maintaining the Plan. If so directed by the Plan Administrator, the Trustee shall pay from the Trust Fund any plan termination insurance premiums for the Plan to the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation.

 

14.15 Indemnification of Trustee

 

The Employer and Plan Administrator shall jointly indemnify the Trustee for any and all liabilities incurred by the Trustee in acting pursuant to the instructions of the Employer, Plan Administrator or Investment Manager, except as provided in Sections 12.04 and 12.05.

 

59
 

 

ARTICLE XV – THE EMPLOYER AND PLAN SPONSOR

 

15.01 Notification

 

The Plan Sponsor shall notify the Plan Administrator and the Trustee in writing if a new Plan Administrator or Trustee has been appointed hereunder.

 

15.02 Record Keeping

 

The Employer shall maintain records with respect to each Employee sufficient to enable the Plan Administrator and Trustee to fulfill their duties and responsibilities under the Plan.

 

15.03 Bonding

 

The Employer shall procure bonding for any person, whether or not a Fiduciary, to insure the Plan against risk of loss. The persons to be bonded and the amount necessary shall be determined in accordance with ERISA and regulations thereunder. No bonding shall be required pursuant to state law.

 

15.04 Signature of Employer

 

All persons dealing with the Plan may rely on any document executed by the Corporate President, Vice-President, Secretary or Assistant Secretary of a corporate employer, or a general partner of a partnership Employer, or an owner of any other Employer, as being the act of that Employer.

 

15.05 Plan Counsel and Expenses

 

The Employer may engage the service of any person or organization, including counsel, whose services, in the opinion of the Employer, are necessary for the establishment or maintenance of this Plan. The expenses incurred or charged by a person or organization engaged by the Employer pursuant to the previous sentence shall be paid by the Employer or, alternatively, the Employer may direct the Trustee to pay such expenses from the Trust Fund.

 

15.06 Other Responsibilities

 

Nothing in this Article shall be construed to limit the responsibilities or duties allocated to the Employer in other Articles of the Plan.

 

15.07 Controlled Groups/Affiliated Service Groups:

 

(a) For purposes of crediting Hours of Service, all employees of all corporations which are members of a Controlled Group of corporations, all employees of all trades or businesses (whether or not incorporated) which are a Group Under Common Control, all employees of an Affiliated Service Group and all employees of any other entity required to be aggregated with the Employer pursuant to regulations under Code Section 414(o) shall be treated as employed by a single Employer for purposes of Article II (Funding), Article III (Eligibility), and Article VIII (Vesting).

 

1
 

 

Except as provided in Section 19.04, all employees of all corporations which are members of a Controlled Group of corporations, all employees of all trades or businesses (whether incorporated or not) which are a Group Under Common Control, all employees of an Affiliated Service Group and all employees of any other entity required to be aggregated with the Employer pursuant to regulations under Code Section 414(o) shall be treated as employed by a single Employer.

 

(b) If the Employer is a member of a Controlled Group, Group Under Common Control, or Affiliated Service Group and if such group maintains more than one qualified retirement plan that is integrated with Social Security, only a single integration level shall be applicable to each Participant who is a Participant in one or more integrated plans. The integration level for each Participant shall be prorated in each such integrated plan in the ratio that the Annual Compensation received by the Participant from the member of the group maintaining such integrated plan bears to the Annual Compensation received by the Participant from all members of the group maintaining all such integrated plans.

 

(c) If more than one Employer has adopted this Plan and if all such Employers are members of the same Controlled Group, Group Under Common Control, or Affiliated Service Group:

 

(1) The provisions of Articles XVI and XVII shall be applicable to each adopting Employer as an individual Employer; and

 

(2) The “effective date” for any adopting Employer who adopts this Plan on other than the Effective Date shall be the first day of the Plan Year in which such adopting Employer shall first elect to be covered by this Plan.

 

15.08 Employer Contributions

 

The Employer shall contribute sufficient money to the Plan to maintain the Plan on a sound actuarial basis and to satisfy the minimum funding standards established by law, as determined by the Plan Administrator.

 

2
 

 

ARTICLE XVI – AMENDMENT OF PLAN

 

16.01 Power to Amend

 

The Plan Sponsor reserves the power to amend, alter, or wholly revise the Plan, prospectively or retrospectively, at any time, and the interest of every Participant is subject to the power so reserved. An amendment to this Plan adopted by the Plan Sponsor shall also bind each adopting Employer without written action of the adopting Employer.

 

16.02 Limitations on Amendments

 

Upon execution of any amendment, the Employer, Plan Administrator, Trustees, Participants and their Beneficiaries shall be bound thereby; provided, however, that no amendment:

 

(a) Shall enlarge the duties or responsibilities of the Plan Administrator or Trustee without his consent; or

 

(b) Shall cause any part of the assets contributed to the Plan to be diverted to any use or purpose other than for the exclusive benefit of the Participants and their Beneficiaries (including the reasonable cost of administering the Plan) prior to the satisfaction of all liabilities (fixed and contingent) under the Plan to Participants and their Beneficiaries; or

 

(c) Shall reduce the vesting percentage of any Participant, Former Participant, or Beneficiary; or

 

(d) Shall reduce or restrict the Accrued Benefit of any Participant, Former Participant or Beneficiary; or

 

(e) Shall reduce the Actuarial Equivalent of the Accrued Benefit of a Participant, Former Participant or Participant payable on an optional form of benefit with respect to such individual’s Accrued Benefit as of the date of the amendment; or

 

(f) Shall eliminate or reduce an early retirement benefit or a retirement-type subsidy (as defined in regulations under Code Section 411(d)(6)(B)), or eliminate an optional form of benefit, with respect to benefits attributable to service before the amendment. In the case of a retirement-type subsidy, the preceding sentence shall apply only with respect to Participants or Former Participants who satisfy (either before or after the amendment) the pre-amendment conditions for the subsidy.

 

Notwithstanding the above, any amendment may be made which may be or become necessary in order that the Plan will conform to the requirements of Section 401(a), or of any generally similar successor provision, of the Code, or in order that all of the provisions of the Plan will conform to all valid requirements of applicable federal and state laws.

 

3
 

 

For purposes of this Section, a Plan amendment that has the effect of (a) eliminating or reducing an early retirement benefit or retirement-type subsidy, or (b) eliminating an optional form, with respect to benefits attributable to service before the amendment shall be treated as reducing a Participant’s Accrued Benefit. In the case of a retirement-type subsidy, the preceding sentence shall apply only with respect to a Participant who satisfies (either before or after the amendment) the pre-amendment conditions for the subsidy. Notwithstanding the preceding, the Accrued Benefit of a Participant, early retirement benefit, retirement-type subsidy, or optional form of benefit may be reduced to the extent permitted under Code Section 412(c)(8) (as it read before the first day of the 2008 Plan Year) or Code Section 412(d)(2) (as it reads for Plan Years beginning on and after February 1, 2008), or to the extent permitted under Regulation Sections 1.411(d)-3 and 1.411(d)-4.

 

16.03 Method of Amendment

 

Each amendment shall be stated in an instrument in writing signed in the name of the Plan Sponsor by its Corporate President or Vice-President or other duly authorized corporate officer, or by any other individual duly authorized by its Board of Directors.

 

16.04 Notice of Amendment

 

Written notice of each amendment shall be given promptly by the Plan Sponsor to any other Employers, the Plan Administrator and the Trustee.

 

4
 

 

ARTICLE XVII – TERMINATION OF PLAN

 

17.01 Right to Terminate

 

The Plan Sponsor may terminate the Plan at any time by a written resolution by the Board of Directors specifying the termination date. The Plan Sponsor shall promptly notify the Plan Administrator, Trustee and any other Employers of such action. Further, the Plan Sponsor shall notify all Participants and Former Participants of such action, and shall file all required reports with Federal agencies, in accordance with applicable regulations.

 

17.02 Effect of Termination

 

In the event of a Plan termination, the rights of all affected Participants to their Accrued Benefits as of the date of such termination shall be fully vested, to the extent funded, and shall not thereafter be subject to forfeiture, except to the extent that law or regulation may preclude such vesting in order to prohibit discrimination in favor of officers, shareholders, or highly compensated Employees. For purposes of the preceding sentence, a Participant who has terminated employment with the Employer and incurred a One Year Break in Service as of the termination date shall not be considered to be affected by such Plan termination, and shall be vested in his Accrued Benefit only to the extent provided in the other applicable Articles of this Plan. Participants shall have recourse toward satisfaction of their non-forfeitable benefits solely from the Trust assets or the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation.

 

The assets of the Trust Fund shall be allocated and payment or provision for the payment of benefits (subject to the limitations required by Article XI) made in the following order of preference:

 

(a) Rollover Contributions : The available assets of the Trust Fund shall first be allocated to provide benefits from rollover contributions by a Participant, if any, pursuant to the provisions of Article IX.

 

(b) Voluntary Contributions : The remaining assets of the Trust Fund shall be allocated to provide benefits from voluntary contributions by a Participant, if any, pursuant to the provisions of Article IX.

 

(c) Mandatory Contributions : The remaining assets of the Trust Fund shall be allocated to provide that portion of each individual’s Accrued Benefit that is derived from the Participant’s Mandatory Contributions to the Plan, if any, pursuant to Article IX.

 

(d) Certain Benefits Payable Three Years Prior to Termination : To the extent the amount of a benefit has not been provided in the foregoing categories (a), (b) and (c), the available assets of the Trust Fund shall first be allocated to provide benefits that became payable three (3) or more years before the effective date of Plan termination, or that could have become payable at the beginning of such three (3) year period had the Participant not deferred the commencement of his benefit by failing to elect Early Retirement, or that could have become payable had a Participant’s retirement occurred immediately prior to the beginning of such three (3) year period, provided that:

 

5
 

 

(i) The portion of the benefit payable to a Participant or the Beneficiary of a Participant (or that could have been payable) shall be based on the provisions of the Plan in effect five (5) years prior to the effective date of Plan termination; and for this purpose, the first Plan Year in which an amendment became effective, or was adopted if later, shall constitute the first year an amendment was in effect; and further provided that;

 

(ii) If the Pension payable under the Plan had been reduced, either by amendment or due to the form in which the Pension is being paid, during the three (3) year period ending on the effective date of Plan termination, then the lowest benefit in pay status during such three (3) year period shall be considered the benefit in pay status for purposes of this category (d).

 

(e) Other Benefits Eligible for Termination Insurance : To the extent that the amount of a benefit has not been provided in the foregoing categories (a), (b), (c) and (d), the remaining assets shall be allocated to provide any benefit payable under the Plan for a Participant whose employment terminated prior to the effective date of Plan termination, or any immediate or deferred benefit that would have been payable to or on behalf of a Participant had his employment terminated for a reason other than death on the effective date of Plan termination, provided that the amount of a pension to be provided under this category (e) shall be determined as follows:

 

(i) The portion of the benefit payable to a Participant or the Beneficiary of a Participant (or that could have been payable) based on the provisions of the Plan in effect five (5) years prior to the effective date of Plan termination; and for this purpose, the first Plan Year in which an amendment became effective, or was adopted if later, shall constitute the first year an amendment was in effect; plus

 

(ii) The portion of the benefit payable to a Participant or the Beneficiary of a Participant which would have been included in (i) above had the Plan or a Plan amendment been in effect five (5) years prior to the effective date of Plan termination, determined as follows: Twenty percent (20%) for each Plan Year (less than five (5)) that the Plan or an amendment thereto was in effect, multiplied by the amount that would have been included under subparagraph (i) for such Participant or Beneficiary had the Plan or the amendment been in effect for five (5) Plan Years as of the effective date of Plan termination; provided that,

 

6
 

 

(iii) No benefit payable under this category (e) to a Participant or Beneficiary shall exceed an amount with an Actuarial Equivalent value of a monthly benefit in the form of a life only annuity commencing at Age sixty-five (65) equal to seven hundred fifty dollars ($750) multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the contribution and benefit base determined under Section 230 of the Social Security Act in effect at the effective date of Plan termination and the denominator of which is such contributions and benefit base in effect in calendar year 1974.

 

(f) Other Vested Benefits : To the extent that the amount of a benefit has not been provided in the foregoing categories (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e), the remaining assets shall be allocated to provide the benefit payable under the Plan to or on behalf of a Participant had his employment terminated for a reason other than death on the effective date of Plan termination, in the following order of preference:

 

(i) To any Participant who had retired prior to the effective date of Plan termination under either Section 4.01, or who was eligible to retire on the effective date of Plan termination under said Section;

 

(ii) To any Participant who had retired prior to the effective date of Plan termination under Section 4.02, or who was eligible to retire on the effective date of Plan termination under said Section; or

 

(iii) To any Participant whose employment had terminated prior to the effective date of Plan termination with entitlement to a deferred Vested Accrued Benefit under Section 8.04(b), or who would have been eligible for a deferred Vested Accrued Benefit under said Section had his employment terminated on the effective date of Plan termination.

 

(g) Other Benefits : To the extent that the amount of a benefit has not been provided in the foregoing categories (a), (b), (c), (d), (e), and (f), the remaining assets shall be allocated to provide the benefit accrued under the Plan, without regard to the satisfaction of the vesting requirements of this Plan, with respect to each Participant whose employment had not terminated as of the effective date of Plan termination, according to the respective Actuarial Equivalent value of each such Participant’s Accrued Benefits.

 

If the assets of the Trust Fund applicable to any of the above categories are insufficient to provide full benefits for all persons in such group, the benefits otherwise payable to such persons shall be reduced proportionately.

 

The Plan Administrator shall calculate the allocation of the assets of the Trust Fund in accordance with the above priority categories, and certify his calculations to the Trustee.

 

7
 

 

17.03 Manner of Distribution

 

In the event of a Plan termination, the Plan Administrator shall direct the Trustee to distribute the Accrued Benefits of all Participants, Former Participants, and Beneficiaries in accordance with Article VI and Article VIII. Where distribution is in the form of an annuity, the Plan Administrator shall purchase on the Participant’s behalf a nontransferable annuity contract from an insurance company licensed to do business in any State, subject to any minimum issue limits of such insurance company. The terms and conditions of such annuity contract shall preserve the Participant’s rights to his Accrued Benefit to the extent possible as if the Plan had not terminated.

 

No payment of benefits (or provisions therefor) shall actually be made by the Trustee until after it is advised by the Plan Administrator in writing that applicable requirements, if any, of ERISA governing termination of this Plan have been, or are being, complied with or that appropriate authorizations, waivers, exemptions or variances have been, or are being, obtained. The actual payment of benefits (or provision therefor) shall be in conformity with the applicable requirements, methods and procedures, if any, of ERISA governing the termination of the Plan.

 

17.04 Residual Amounts

 

In no event shall the Employer receive any amounts from the Trust Fund upon termination of the Plan, except that, and notwithstanding any other provisions of the Plan, the Employer shall receive such amounts, if any, as may remain after the satisfaction of all liabilities (fixed and contingent) of the Plan and arising out of any variations between actual requirements and expected actuarial requirements, unless the Board of Directors resolves to have such amounts allocated to the Participants in a non-discriminatory manner.

 

17.05 Termination of an Employer

 

An Employer, other than the Plan Sponsor, may terminate its participation in the Plan at any time by a written resolution by the Board of Directors specifying the termination date. The Employer shall promptly notify the Plan Sponsor, Plan Administrator and Trustee of such action.

 

17.06 Partial Termination

 

A partial termination of the Plan may be deemed to have occurred if a substantial percentage of Participants are excluded from coverage by reason of amendment of the Plan, severance by an Employer or termination of an Employer, or if the Plan is amended to adversely affect the rights of employees to vest in benefits under the Plan or to reduce or eliminate future benefit accruals under the Plan. The determination of whether a partial termination has occurred shall be made on the basis of the facts and circumstances in a particular case.

 

17.07 Effect of Partial Termination

 

In the event of a partial termination of the Plan, the provisions of Section 17.02 shall apply to those Participants affected by the partial termination.

 

8
 

 

ARTICLE XVIII - THE INSURER

 

18.01 Actions Consistent with Terms of Contracts

 

No Insurer, which may issue an insurance or annuity contract for the purpose of this Plan and Trust, shall be required to take or permit to be taken any action contrary to the provision of said contract nor shall the Insurer be required to look into the terms of this Plan and Trust or question any action as authorized by the Trustee or Plan Administrator in the application for a contract or changes in any existing contract.

 

18.02 Insurer not a Party to Plan

 

The Insurer shall not be deemed to be a contracting party to this Plan and Trust for any purpose nor shall it be responsible for the validity of this Plan and Trust.

 

18.03 Signature of Trustee

 

Any and all forms, or other documents as required by the Insurer, may be executed and signed by any one Trustee. When so executed, any such document shall be accepted by the Insurer as conclusive evidence of any matters mentioned in this Plan and Trust, and any such Insurer shall be fully protected in taking any action on the faith thereof and shall incur no liability or responsibility for doing so.

 

18.04 Validity of Contracts

 

Neither the Employer nor the Trustee, nor their successors, shall be responsible for the validity of any contract issued hereunder or for the failure on the part of the Insurer to make payments provided by any such contract, or for the action of any person which may delay payment or render a contract null and void or unenforceable in whole or in part.

 

9
 

 

ARTICLE XIX – LIMITATIONS ON BENEFITS

 

19.01 Special Definitions

 

For purposes of this Article, the following terms shall be defined as follows:

 

(a) “Annual Benefit” means a benefit which is payable annually in the form of a straight life annuity. Such benefit does not include any benefits attributable to Participant contributions or Rollover contributions, as provided in Article IX, or to any benefit attributable to a transfer of assets or liabilities from another qualified plan. If the benefit is payable in a form other than a straight life annuity, it shall be adjusted in accordance with Subsection 19.02(b) for purposes of applying the limitations of Subsection 19.02(a). For a Participant who has or will have distributions commencing at more than one Annuity Starting Date, the Annual Benefit shall be determined as of each such Annuity Starting Date (and shall satisfy the limitations of this Article as of each such date), actuarially adjusting for past and future distributions of benefits commencing at the other Annuity Starting Dates. For this purpose, the determination of whether a new starting date has occurred shall be made without regard to Treasury Regulation 1.401(a)-20, Q&A 10(d), and with regard to Treasury Regulation 1.415(b)-l(b)(l)(iii)(B) and (C).

 

No actuarial adjustment to the benefit shall be made for (a) survivor benefits payable to a surviving spouse under a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity to the extent such benefits would not be payable if the Participant's benefit were paid in another form; (b) benefits that are not directly related to retirement benefits (such as a qualified disability benefit, preretirement incidental death benefits, and postretirement medical benefits); or ( c) the inclusion in the form of benefit of an automatic benefit increase feature, provided the form of benefit is not subject to Code Section 417(e)(3) and would otherwise satisfy the limitations of this Article, and the Plan provides that the amount payable under the form of benefit in any Limitation Year shall not exceed the limits of this Article applicable at the Annuity Starting Date, as increased in subsequent years pursuant to Code Section 415(d). For this purpose, an automatic benefit increase feature is included in a form of benefit if the form of benefit provides for automatic, periodic increases to the benefits paid in that form.

 

(b) “Average Compensation” shall mean the average of a Participant’s Compensation for the three (3) consecutive Limitation Years (or the actual number of consecutive years, if less than three (3)) during which the Participant had the greatest aggregate Compensation from the Employer. In the case of a Participant who has separated from service, the Participant’s Average Compensation will automatically be adjusted by multiplying such Average Compensation by the cost of living adjustment factor prescribed by the Secretary under Code Section 415(d) in such manner as the Secretary shall prescribe. The adjusted Average Compensation shall apply to Limitation Years ending with the calendar year of the date of adjustment but a Participant's benefits shall not reflect the adjusted limit prior to January 1 of that calendar year.

 

10
 

 

(c) “Compensation” for purposes of this Article and compliance with Code Section 415 shall mean and be determined as follows:

 

(1) The term “Compensation” shall include:

 

(A) The Participant's wages, salaries, fees for professional service and other amounts received (without regard to whether or not an amount is paid in cash) for personal services actually rendered in the course of employment with an Employer maintaining the Plan, to the extent that the amounts are includible in gross income (or would have been includible in gross income but for an election under Code Sections 125, 132(f)(4), 402(e)(3), 402(h)(I)(B), 402(k) or 457(b )). These amounts include, but are not limited to, commissions paid to salespersons, compensation for services on the basis of a percentage of profits, commissions on insurance premiums, tips, overtime, bonuses, fringe benefits, and reimbursements or other expense allowances under a nonaccountable plan as described in Treasury Regulation 1.62- 2(c).

 

(B) In the case of a Participant who is a Self-Employed Individual, the Participant’s Earned Income.

 

(C) Any amounts contributed by the Employer or received by the Participant pursuant to a non-qualified plan of deferred compensation in the year such amounts are includable in the gross income of the Participant, under the rules of Code Section 409A.

 

(D) Effective for Plan Years beginning on and after February 1, 2009, differential wage payments (as defined in Code Section 3401(h)(2)) paid to an Employee of the Employer with respect to any period during which the Employee is performing service in the uniformed services (as defined in Code Section 3401(h)(2)(A)) while on active duty for more than 30 days that represents all or a portion of the wages the Employee would have received from the Employer if the individual were performing services for the Employer.

 

Compensation shall not include in any Limitation Year compensation in excess of two hundred thousand dollars ($200,000), such amount to be adjusted by the Commissioner for increases in the cost of living after 2002 in accordance with Code Section 401(a)(17)(B). A Participant's Compensation for a Limitation Year shall not include Compensation in excess of the limitation under Code Section 401(a)(17) that is in effect for the calendar year in which such year of service begins.

 

11
 

 

(2) The term “Compensation” does not include items such as:

 

(A) Except as provided in subparagraph (1)(A) above, any employer contributions to a qualified retirement plan and any employer contributions to any other retirement plan which receives special tax benefits, to the extent the contributions are not includable in the gross income of the Participant for the taxable year in which made; and any distributions from any such retirement plan, regardless of whether the distributions are includable in the gross income of the Participant.

 

(B) Amounts realized from the exercise of a nonstatutory stock option (which is an option other than a statutory as defined in Treasury Regulation 1.421-1(b), or when restricted stock (or other property) held by a Participant either becomes freely transferable or is no longer subject to a substantial risk of forfeiture (see Code Section 83 and the regulations thereunder).

 

(C) Amounts realized from the sale, exchange, or other disposition of stock acquired under a qualified stock option (as defined in Treasury Regulation 1.421-1(b)).

 

(D) Other amounts that receive special tax benefits, such as premiums for group health insurance and group term life insurance (but only to the extent that the compensation is not includable in the gross income of the Participant and are not salary reduction amounts that are described in Code Section 125).

 

(3) The Compensation (as described in (1) above), actually paid or made available to a Participant within the Limitation Year is the Compensation used for the purposes of applying the limitations of Code Section 415 unless the Employer has elected to use the Compensation accrued during a Limitation Year for purposes of applying the limitations of this Article and Code Section 415.

 

In the case of a group of employers which constitutes a controlled group of corporations (as defined in Code Section 414(b) as modified by Section 415(h)), or which constitutes trades or businesses (whether or not incorporated) which are under common control (as defined in Code Section 414(c) as modified by Section 415(h)), or which constitutes an affiliated service group (as defined in Code Section 414(m)), all such employers must make a similar election.

 

12
 

 

For Limitation Years beginning on or after February 1, 2008, Compensation for a Limitation Year shall also include Compensation paid by the later of 2-1/2 months after an employee's severance from employment with the Employer maintaining the Plan or the end of the Limitation Year that includes the date of the Employee's severance from employment with the Employer maintaining the Plan, if the payment is regular compensation for services during the Employee's regular working hours, or compensation for services outside the employee's regular working hours (such as overtime or shift differential), commissions, bonuses, or other similar payments, and, absent a severance from employment, the payments would have been paid to the Employee while the Employee continued in employment with the Employer.

 

Back pay, within the meaning of Treasury Regulation 1.415(c)-2(g)(8), shall be treated as Compensation for the Limitation Year to which the back pay relates to the extent the back pay represents wages and Compensation that would otherwise be included under this definition.

 

(4) In the case of a Participant who is rehired after a severance from employment, the Defined Benefit Compensation Limitation is the greater of 100 percent of the Participant's High Three-Year Average Compensation, as determined prior to the severance from employment, as adjusted pursuant to the preceding paragraph, if applicable; or 100 percent of the Participant's High Three-Year Average Compensation, as determined after the severance from employment under paragraph 19.02(h).

 

(d) “Defined Benefit Dollar Limitation” shall mean one hundred sixty thousand dollars ($160,000), adjusted annually for Limitation Years beginning after December 31, 2001 for increases in the cost of living applicable to the calendar year in which a Limitation Year ends in accordance with Code Section 415(d) as prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury. A limitation as adjusted under Code Section 415(d) will apply to limitation years ending with or within the calendar year for which the adjustment applies, but a Participant’s benefits shall not reflect the adjusted limit prior to January 1 of that calendar year.

 

(e) “Employer” shall mean the Employer that adopts this Plan and, in the case of a group of employers which constitutes a controlled group of corporations (as defined in Code Section 414(b) as modified by Code Section 415(h)) or which constitutes trades or businesses (whether or not incorporated) which are under common control (as defined in Code Section 414(c) as modified by Code Section 415(h)), or which constitutes an affiliated service group, (as defined in Code Section 414(m)) or which is required to be aggregated with the Employer under Code Section 414(o), all such employers shall be considered a single Employer for purposes of applying the limitations of this Article.

 

13
 

 

(f) “Limitation Year” shall mean the twelve (12) consecutive month period specified in Article I hereof.

 

The Limitation Year may be changed by amending the election previously made by the Employer. Any change in the Limitation Year must be a change to a twelve (12) month period commencing with any day within the current Limitation Year. The limitations of this Article (and Code Section 415) are to be separately applied to a limitation period which begins with the first day of the current Limitation Year and which ends on the day before the first day of the first Limitation Year for which the change is effective.

 

The Limitation Year for all years prior to the effective date of Code Section 415 shall, as applied to this Plan, be the twelve (12) consecutive month period selected as the Limitation Year for the first Limitation Year after the effective date of Code Section 415.

 

(g) "Formerly Affiliated Plan of the Employer" shall mean a plan that, immediately prior to the cessation of affiliation, was actually maintained by the Employer and, immediately after the cessation of affiliation, is not actually maintained by the Employer. For this purpose, cessation of affiliation means the event that causes an entity to no longer be considered the Employer, such as the sale of a member controlled group of corporations, as defined in Code Section 414(b), as modified by Code Section 415(h), to an unrelated corporation, or that causes a plan to not actually be maintained by the Employer, such as transfer of plan sponsorship outside a controlled group.

 

(h) “Predecessor Employer" : If the Employer maintains a plan that provides a benefit which the Participant accrued while performing services for a former employer, the former employer is a Predecessor Employer with respect to the Participant in the Plan. A former entity that antedates the Employer is also a Predecessor Employer with respect to a Participant if, under the facts and circumstances, the Employer constitutes a continuation of all or a portion of the trade or business of the former entity.

 

(i) "Severance from Employment" shall occur when an Employee ceases to be an Employee of the Employer maintaining the Plan. An Employee does not have a Severance from Employment if, in connection with a change of employment, the employee's new employer maintains the Plan with respect to the employee.

 

19.02 Limitations Applicable to this Plan

 

Notwithstanding any other provision of this Plan to the contrary, in no event shall a Participant or Former Participant receive or accrue a benefit under this Plan which exceeds the following limitations:

 

(a) General Limitation : The Annual Benefit to which a Participant or Former Participant is entitled at any time may not exceed the lesser of:

 

14
 

 

(1) The Defined Benefit Dollar Limitation; or

 

(2) One hundred percent (100%) of such Participant’s Average Compensation.

 

(b) Adjustments for Other than Straight Life Annuity : For purposes of applying the limitations of Subsection (a) above, if the benefit payable to a Participant or Former Participant is payable in any form other than a straight life annuity, the benefit shall be adjusted to a straight life annuity which is the Actuarial Equivalent of such benefit determined in accordance with (1) or (2) below:

 

(1) Forms of Benefit Not Subject to Code Section 417(e)(3): The straight life annuity that is the Actuarial Equivalent of the Participant's form of benefit shall be determined under this paragraph 19.02(b)(1) if the form of the Participant's benefit is either a nondecreasing annuity (other than a straight life annuity) payable for a period of not less than the life of the Participant (or, in the case of a qualified pre-retirement survivor annuity, the life of the surviving spouse), or an annuity that decreases during the life of the Participant merely because of the death of the survivor annuitant (but only if the reduction is not below 50% of the benefit payable before the death of the survivor annuitant), or the cessation or reduction of Social Security supplements or qualified disability payments (as defined in Code Section 401(a)(11).

 

(A) Limitation Years beginning before February 1, 2008: For Limitation Years beginning before February 1,2008, the actuarially equivalent straight life annuity is equal to the annual amount of the straight life annuity commencing at the same Annuity Starting Date that has the same actuarial present value as the Participant's form of benefit computed using whichever of the following produces the greater annual amount: (I) the interest rate specified in Section 1.02 of the Plan and the mortality table (or other tabular factor) specified in Section 1.02 of the Plan for adjusting benefits in the same form; and (II) a 5 percent interest rate assumption and the Applicable Mortality Table defined in Section 1.08 of the Plan for that Annuity Starting Date.

 

(B) Limitation Years beginning on or after February 1,2008: For Limitation Years beginning on or after February I, 2008, the Actuarial Equivalent straight life annuity is equal to the greater of (1) the annual amount of the straight life annuity (if any) payable to the Participant under the Plan commencing at the same Annuity Starting Date as the Participant's form of benefit; and (2) the annual amount of the straight life annuity commencing at the same Annuity Starting Date that has the same actuarial present value as the Participant's form of benefit, computed using a 5 percent interest rate assumption and the Applicable Mortality Table defined in Section 1.08 of the Plan for that Annuity Starting Date.

 

15
 

 

(2) Forms of Benefit Subject to Code Section 417(e)(3): The straight life annuity that is the Actuarial Equivalent of the Participant's form of benefit shall be determined under this paragraph if the form of the Participant's benefit is other than a benefit form described in (I) above. In this case, the actuarially equivalent straight life annuity shall be determined as follows:

 

(A) Annuity Starting Date in Plan Years Beginning After 2005: If the Annuity Starting Date of the Participant's form of benefit is in a Plan Year beginning after 2005, the actuarially equivalent straight life annuity is equal to the greatest of(I) the annual amount of the straight life annuity commencing at the same Annuity Starting Date that has the same actuarial present value as the Participant's form of benefit, computed using the interest rate specified in Section 1.02 of the Plan and the mortality table (or other tabular factor) specified in Section 1.02 of the Plan for adjusting benefits in the same form; (II) the annual amount of the straight life annuity commencing at the same Annuity Starting Date that has the same actuarial present value as the Participant's form of benefit, computed using a 5.5 percent interest rate assumption and the Applicable Mortality Table defined in Section 1.08 of the Plan; and (III) the annual amount of the straight life annuity commencing at the same Annuity Starting Date that has the same actuarial present value as the Participant's form of benefit, computed using the Applicable Interest Rate defined in Section 1.07 of the Plan and the Applicable Mortality Table defined in Section 1.08 of the Plan, divided by 1.05.

 

(B) Annuity Starting Date in Plan Years Beginning in 2004 or 2005: If the Annuity Starting Date of the Participant's form of benefit is in a Plan Year beginning in 2004 or 2005, the actuarially equivalent straight life annuity is equal to the annual amount of the straight life annuity commencing at the same Annuity Starting Date that has the same actuarial present value as the Participant's form of benefit, computed using whichever of the following produces the greater annual amount: (I) the interest rate specified in Section 1.02 of the Plan and the mortality table (or other tabular factor) specified in Section 1.02 of the Plan for adjusting benefits in the same form; and (II) a 5.5 percent interest rate assumption and the Applicable Mortality Table defined in Section 1.08 of the Plan.

 

16
 

 

If the Annuity Starting Date of the Participant's benefit is on or after the first day of the first Plan Year beginning in 2004 and before December 31,2004, the application of this paragraph (B) shall not cause the amount payable under the Participant's form of benefit to be less than the benefit calculated under the Plan, taking into account the limitations of this Article, except that the actuarially equivalent straight life annuity is equal to the annual amount of the straight life annuity commencing at the same Annuity Starting Date that has the same actuarial present value as the Participant's form of benefit, computed using whichever of the following produces the greatest annual amount:

 

(I) the interest rate specified in Section 1.02 of the Plan and the mortality table (or other tabular factor) specified in Section 1.02 of the Plan for adjusting benefits in the same form;

 

(II)        the Applicable Interest Rate defined in Section 1.07 of the Plan and the Applicable Mortality Table defined in Section 1.08 of the Plan; and

 

(III) the Applicable Interest Rate defined in Section 1.07 of the Plan (as in effect on the last day of the last Plan Year beginning before January 1,2004, under provisions of the Plan then adopted and in effect) and the Applicable Mortality Table defined in Section 1.08 of the Plan.

 

(c) Adjustment Where Benefit Commences Before Age 62 :

 

(1) Limitation Years Beginning Before February I, 2008: If the Annuity Starting Date for the Participant's benefit is prior to age 62 and occurs in a Limitation Year beginning before February 1, 2008, the Defined Benefit Dollar Limitation for the Participant's Annuity Starting Date is the annual amount of a benefit payable in the form of a straight life annuity commencing at the Participant's Annuity Starting Date that is the Actuarial Equivalent of the Defined Benefit Dollar Limitation (adjusted under Paragraph 19.02(g) below for Years of Participation less than 10, if required) with actuarial equivalence computed using whichever of the following produces the smaller annual amount: (1) the interest rate specified in Section 1.02 of the Plan and the mortality table (or other tabular factor) specified in Section 1.02 of the Plan; or (2) a 5-percent interest rate assumption and the Applicable Mortality Table as defined in Section 1.08 of the Plan.

 

17
 

 

(2) Limitation Years Beginning on or After February 1, 2008:

 

(A) Plan Does Not Have Immediately Commencing Straight Life Annuity Payable at Both Age 62 and the Age of Benefit Commencement. If the Annuity Starting Date for the Participant's benefit is prior to age 62 and occurs in a Limitation Year beginning on or after February 1,2008, and the Plan does not have an immediately commencing straight life annuity payable at both age 62 and the age of benefit commencement, the Defined Benefit Dollar Limitation for the Participant's Annuity Starting Date is the annual amount of a benefit payable in the form of a straight life annuity commencing at the Participant's Annuity Starting Date that is the Actuarial Equivalent of the Defined Benefit Dollar Limitation (adjusted under Paragraph 19.02(g) for Years of Participation less than 10, if required) with actuarial equivalence computed using a 5 percent interest rate assumption and the Applicable Mortality Table for the Annuity Starting Date as defined in Section 1.08 of the Plan (and expressing the Participant's age based on completed calendar months as of the Annuity Starting Date).

 

(B) Plan Has Immediately Commencing Straight Life Annuity Payable at Both Age 62 and the Age of Benefit Commencement. If the Annuity Starting Date for the Participant's benefit is prior to age 62 and occurs in a Limitation Year beginning on or after February 1, 2008, and the Plan has an immediately commencing straight life annuity payable at both age 62 and the age of benefit commencement, the Defined Benefit Dollar Limitation for the Participant's Annuity Starting Date is the lesser of the limitation determined under (A) above and the Defined Benefit Dollar Limitation (adjusted under Paragraph 19.02(g) for Years of Participation less than 10, if required) multiplied by the ratio of the annual amount of the immediately commencing straight life annuity under the Plan at the Participant's Annuity Starting Date to the annual amount of the immediately commencing straight life annuity under the Plan at age 62, both determined without applying the limitations of this Article.

 

(d) Adjustment Where Benefit Commences After Age 65 :

 

(1) Limitation Years Beginning Before February 1, 2008. If the Annuity Starting Date for the Participant's benefit is after age 65 and occurs in a Limitation Year beginning before February 1,2008, the Defined Benefit Dollar Limitation for the Participant's Annuity Starting Date is the annual amount of a benefit payable in the form of a straight life annuity commencing at the Participant's Annuity Starting Date that is the Actuarial Equivalent of the Defined Benefit Dollar Limitation (adjusted under Paragraph 19.02(g) for Years of Participation less than 10, if required) with actuarial equivalence computed using whichever of the following produces the smaller annual amount: (1) the interest rate specified in Section 1.02 of the Plan and the mortality table (or other tabular factor) specified in Section 1.02 of the Plan; or (2) a 5-percent interest rate assumption and the Applicable Mortality Table as defined in 1.08 of the Plan.

 

18
 

 

(2) Limitation Years Beginning Before February 1, 2008.

 

(A) Plan Does Not Have Immediately Commencing Straight Life Annuity Payable at Both Age 65 and the Age of Benefit Commencement. If the Annuity Starting Date for the Participant's benefit is after age 65 and occurs in a Limitation Year beginning on or after February 1, 2008, and the plan does not have an immediately commencing straight life annuity payable at both age 65 and the age of benefit commencement, the Defined Benefit Dollar Limitation at the Participant's Annuity Starting Date is the annual amount of a benefit payable in the form of a straight life annuity commencing at the Participant's Annuity Starting Date that is the Actuarial Equivalent of the Defined Benefit Dollar Limitation (adjusted under Paragraph 19.02(g) for Years of Participation less than 10, if required), with actuarial equivalence computed using a 5 percent interest rate assumption and the Applicable Mortality Table for that Annuity Starting Date as defined in Section 1.08 of the Plan (and expressing the Participant's age based on completed calendar months as of the Annuity Starting Date).

 

(B) Plan Has Immediately Commencing Straight Life Annuity Payable at Both Age 65 and the Age of Benefit Commencement. If the Annuity Starting Date for the Participant's benefit is after age 65 and occurs in a Limitation Year beginning on or after February 1, 2008, and the Plan has an immediately commencing straight life annuity payable at both age 65 and the age of benefit commencement, the Defined Benefit Dollar Limitation at the Participant's Annuity Starting Date is the lesser of the limitation determined under paragraph(2)(A) above and the Defined Benefit Dollar Limitation (adjusted under Paragraph 19.02(g) for Years of Participation less than 10, if required) multiplied by the ratio of the annual amount of the adjusted immediately commencing straight life annuity under the Plan at the Participant's Annuity Starting Date to the annual amount of the adjusted immediately commencing straight life annuity under the Plan at age 65, both determined without applying the limitations of this article. For this purpose, the adjusted immediately commencing straight life annuity under the Plan at the Participant's Annuity Starting Date is the annual amount of such annuity payable to the Participant, computed disregarding the Participant's accruals after age 65 but including actuarial adjustments even if those actuarial adjustments are used to offset accruals; and the adjusted immediately commencing straight life annuity under the Plan at age 65 is the annual amount of such annuity that would be payable under the Plan to a hypothetical Participant who is age 65 and has the same accrued benefit as the Participant.

 

19
 

 

(e) Notwithstanding the other requirements of this Section 19.02, no adjustment shall be made to the Defined Benefit Dollar Limitation to reflect the probability of a Participant's death between the Annuity Starting Date and age 62, or between age 65 and the Annuity Starting Date, as applicable, if benefits are not forfeited upon the death of the Participant prior to the Annuity Starting Date. To the extent benefits are forfeited upon death before the Annuity Starting Date, such an adjustment shall be made. For this purpose, no forfeiture shall be treated as occurring upon the Participant's death if the Plan does not charge Participants for providing a Qualified Preretirement Survivor Annuity, as defined in Code Section 417(c), upon the Participant's death.

 

(f) Annual Benefit Not in Excess of Ten Thousand Dollars : The benefit payable to a Participant or Former Participant shall not be considered to exceed the limitations of Subsection (a) above, if:

 

(1) The benefits derived from Employer contributions payable with respect to such Participant under this Plan and all other defined benefit plans maintained by the Employer do not in the aggregate exceed ten thousand dollars ($10,000) for any Limitation Year; and

 

(2) The Employer has not at any time maintained a defined contribution plan in which the Participant participated.

 

No adjustment for the Age at which a Participant's benefit commences or for the form of the benefit shall be required for purposes of this subsection.

 

(g) Reduction for Less than Ten Years of Participation or Service : If a Participant or Former Participant has less than ten (10) Years of Participation, the dollar limitation described in paragraph 19.02(a)(l) above shall be reduced by ten percent (10%) for each Year of Participation less than ten (10) years. If a Participant or Former Participant has less than ten (10) Years of Credited Service, the percentage limitation described in paragraph 19.02(a)(2) and the dollar limitation described in paragraph 19.02(e)(1) shall be reduced by ten percent (10%) for each Year of Credited Service less than ten (10) years.

 

(h) If the Participant is, or has ever been, a Participant in another qualified defined benefit plan (without regard to whether the plan has been terminated) maintained by the Employer or a predecessor Employer, the sum of the Participant's Annual Benefits from all such plans may not exceed the limitation described in Section 19.02(a).

 

20
 

 

(i) Severance from Employment: In the case of a Participant who is rehired after a severance from employment, the limitation described in Section 19.02(a)(2) shall be the greater of 100 percent of the Participant' s Average Compensation, as determined prior to the severance from employment, as adjusted pursuant to Section 19.01(c)(3), if applicable; or 100 percent of the Participant's Average Compensation, as determined after the severance from employment.

 

In the case of a Participant who is rehired by the Employer after a severance from employment, the Participant's Average Compensation shall be calculated by excluding all years for which the Participant performs no services for and receives no compensation from the Employer (the break period) and by treating the years immediately preceding and following the break period as consecutive.

 

19.03 Aggregation of Plans

 

For purposes of applying the limitations of Sections 19.02 applicable to a Participant for a particular Limitation Year, all qualified defined benefit plans ever maintained by the Employer shall be treated as one defined benefit plan, and all defined contribution plans ever maintained by the Employer shall be treated as one defined contribution plan. However, this Plan shall not be combined with any multiemployer plan maintained by the employer for purposes of applying the Code Section 415(h)(1)(B) limit to this Plan.

 

19.04 Formerly Affiliated Plans of the Employer

 

A plan that, immediately prior to the cessation of affiliation, was actually maintained by the Employer and, immediately after the cessation of affiliation, is not actually maintained by the Employer. For this purpose, cessation of affiliation means the event that causes an entity to no longer be considered the Employer, such as the sale of a member controlled group of corporations, as defined in Code Section 414(b), as modified by Code Section 415(h), to an unrelated corporation, or that causes a plan to not actually be maintained by the employer, such as transfer of plan sponsorship outside a controlled group.

 

19.05 Plans of a Predecessor Employer

 

If the Employer maintains a defined benefit plan that provides benefits accrued by a Participant while performing services for a Predecessor Employer, the Participant's benefits under a plan maintained by the Predecessor Employer shall be treated as provided under a plan maintained by the Employer. However, for this purpose, the plan of the Predecessor Employer shall be treated as if it had terminated immediately prior to the event giving rise to the Predecessor Employer relationship with sufficient assets to pay Participants' benefit liabilities under the Plan, and had purchased annuities to provide benefits; the Employer and the Predecessor Employer shall be treated as if they were a single employer immediately prior to such event and as unrelated employers immediately after the event; and if the event giving rise to the predecessor relationship is a benefit transfer, the transferred benefits shall be excluded in determining the benefits provide under the plan of the Predecessor Employer.

 

21
 

 

19.06 Benefits Under Terminated Plans

 

If a defined benefit plan maintained by the Employer has terminated with sufficient assets for the payment of benefit liabilities of all Plan Participants and a Participant in the Plan has not yet commenced benefits under the Plan, the benefits provided pursuant to the annuities purchased to provide the Participant's benefits under the terminated plan at each possible Annuity Starting Date shall be taken into account in applying the limitations of this Article. If there are not sufficient assets for the payment of all Participants' benefit liabilities, the benefits taken into account shall be the benefits that are actually provided to the Participant under the terminated plan.

 

19.07 Benefits Transferred From the Plan

 

If a Participant's benefits under a defined benefit plan maintained by the Employer are transferred to another defined benefit plan maintained by the Employer and the transfer is not a transfer of distributable benefits pursuant to Treasury Regulation 1.411(d)-4, Q&A-3(c), the transferred benefits are not treated as being provided under the transferor plan (but are taken into account as benefits provided under the transferee plan). If a Participant's benefits under a defined benefit plan maintained by the Employer are transferred to another defined benefit plan that is not maintained by the Employer and the transfer is not a transfer of distributable benefits pursuant to Treasury Regulation 1.411(d)-4, Q&A-3(c), the transferred benefits are treated by the Employer's Plan as if such benefits were provided under annuities purchased to provide benefits under a plan maintained by the Employer that terminated immediately prior to the transfer with sufficient assets to pay all Participants' benefit liabilities under the Plan. If a Participant's benefits under a defined benefit plan maintained by the Employer are transferred to another defined benefit plan in a transfer of distributable benefits pursuant to Treasury Regulation 1.411(d)-4, Q&A-3(c), the amount transferred is treated as a benefit paid from the transferor plan.

 

19.08 Special Rules

 

The limitations of this Article shall be determined and applied taking into account the rules in Treasury Regulation 1.415(f)-1(d), (e) and (h).

 

22
 

 

ARTICLE XX – TOP-HEAVY PROVISIONS

 

20.01 Application

 

If this Plan is or becomes Top-Heavy for any Plan Year beginning after December 31, 1983, the provisions of this Article shall supersede any conflicting provisions contained in any other Article of this Plan.

 

20.02 Special Definitions

 

For purposes of this Article and related Plan provisions, the following terms shall have the following meanings unless a different meaning is plainly required by the context:

 

(a) “Determination Date” shall mean, for any plan year subsequent to the first plan year, the last day of the preceding plan year for such plan; for the first plan year of a plan, the last day of that plan year.

 

(b) “Determination Period” shall mean the plan year containing the Determination Date for such plan.

 

(c) “Five Percent Owner” shall mean:

 

(1) If the Employer is a corporation, any person who owns (or is considered as owning within the meaning of Code Section 318) more than five percent (5%) of the outstanding stock of the corporation or stock possessing more than five percent (5%) of the total combined voting power of all stock of the corporation.

 

(2) If the Employer is not a corporation, any person who owns more than five percent (5%) of the capital or profits interest in the Employer.

 

(d) “Key Employee” shall mean any Employee or former Employee (including any deceased employee) who at any time during the Determination Period was:

 

(1) An officer of the Employer during a Plan Year in which he received Top-Heavy Compensation greater than one hundred thirty thousand dollars ($130,000) (as adjusted under Code Section 416(i)(1) for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2002). For purposes of this Paragraph, no more than fifty (50) Employees (or, if lesser, the greater of three (3) or ten percent (10%) of the number of Employees) shall be treated as officers; or

 

(2) A Five Percent Owner of the Employer; or

 

(3) A One Percent Owner of the Employer during a plan year in which he received Top-Heavy Compensation greater than one hundred fifty thousand dollars ($150,000).

 

23
 

 

The determination of who is a Key Employee shall be made in accordance with Code Section 416(i)(1) and the Regulations and other guidance of general applicability issued thereunder. For purposes of determining who is a One Percent Owner or Five Percent Owner, the rules of Code Section 414(b), (c) and (m) shall not apply.

 

The term “Non-Key Employee” shall mean any Employee or former Employee (and any Beneficiary of such Employee) who is not a Key Employee. Non-Key Employees include Employees who are former Key Employees.

 

(e) “One Percent Owner” shall mean:

 

(1) If the Employer is a corporation, any person who owns (or is considered as owning within the meaning of Code Section 318) more than one percent (1%) of the outstanding stock of the corporation or stock possessing more than one percent (1%) of the total combined voting power of all stock of the corporation; or

 

(2) If the Employer is not a corporation, any person who owns more than one percent (1%) of the capital or profits interest in the Employer.

 

(f) “Permissive Aggregation Group” shall mean the Required Aggregation Group of plans plus any other plan or plans of the Employer which, when considered as a group with the Required Aggregation Group, would continue to satisfy the requirements of Code Sections 401(a)(4) and 410.

 

(g) “Present Value” shall mean the actuarial present value of an amount or series of amounts determined based on the assumptions specified in Section 1.02.

 

(h) “Required Aggregation Group” shall mean:

 

(1) Each qualified plan of the Employer including any plan terminated within the last five years ending on the determination date in which at least one Key Employee participates in the plan year containing the determination date, or any of the four preceding plan years; and

 

(2) Any other qualified plan of the Employer which enables a plan described in Item (1) to meet the requirements of Code Sections 401(a)(4) or 410.

 

(i) “Top-Heavy” : This Plan is Top-Heavy if any of the following conditions apply:

 

(1) If the Top-Heavy Ratio for this Plan exceeds sixty percent (60%) and this Plan is not part of any Required Aggregation Group or Permissive Aggregation Group of plans.

 

24
 

 

(2) If this Plan is a part of a Required Aggregation Group of plans but not part of a Permissive Aggregation Group and the Top-Heavy Ratio for the Required Aggregation Group of plans exceeds sixty percent (60%).

 

(3) If this Plan is a part of a Required Aggregation Group and a Permissive Aggregation Group of plans and the Top-Heavy Ratio for the Required Aggregation Group and the Permissive Aggregation Group exceeds sixty percent (60%).

 

(j) “Top Heavy Average Monthly Compensation” shall mean one-twelfth (1/12th) of the average of a Participant’s Top-Heavy Compensation during the five (5) consecutive Plan Years (or the total number of such years of the Participant’s employment, if less than five (5)) which produces the highest average, but taking into account only Top-Heavy Compensation for years that this Plan was Top-Heavy and any years preceding a year that this Plan was Top-Heavy.

 

(k) “Top-Heavy Compensation” shall have the same meaning as the term ‘Compensation’ defined in Section 19.01, but shall include contributions made by the Employer to a plan of deferred compensation otherwise excluded in Section 19.01.

 

(l) “Top-Heavy Ratio” shall mean and be determined as follows:

 

(1) If the Employer maintains one or more defined benefit plans and the Employer has never maintained any defined contribution plan (including any simplified employee pension plan) which during the five (5) year period ending on the Determination Date has or has had an account balance, the Top-Heavy Ratio is a fraction, the numerator of which is the sum of the Present Values of Accrued Benefits of all Key Employees as of the Determination Date and the denominator of which is the sum of all Present Values of Accrued Benefits of all Participants as of the Determination Date. Both the numerator and denominator of the Top-Heavy Ratio shall be adjusted to reflect any part of any Accrued Benefit distributed in the one (1) year period ending on the Determination Date. “Five (5) year period” shall be satisfied for “one (1) year period” above in the case of a distribution for a reason other than separation from service, death, or disability.

 

25
 

 

(2) If the Employer maintains one or more defined benefit plans and the Employer maintains or has maintained one or more defined contribution plans (including any simplified employee pension plan) which during the five (5) year period ending on the Determination Date has or has had an account balance, the Top-Heavy Ratio is a fraction, the numerator of which is the sum of account balances under the defined contribution plans for all Key Employees and the Present Value of Accrued Benefits under the defined benefit plans for all Key Employees, and the denominator of which is the sum of the account balances under the defined contribution plans for all Participants and the Present Value of Accrued Benefits under the defined benefit plans for all Participants. Both the numerator and denominator of the Top-Heavy Ratio are adjusted for any part of any account balance or Accrued Benefit distributed in the one (1) year period ending on the Determination Date and any contribution to a defined contribution plan that is due but unpaid as of the Determination Date. “Five (5) year period” shall be substituted for “one (1) year period” in the case of a distribution for a reason other than separation from service, death, or disability, In the case of a defined contribution plan which is not subject to Code Section 412, the adjustment for contributions due but unpaid is generally the amount of any contributions actually made after the Top-Heavy Valuation Date but on or before the Determination Date; however, for the first plan year of such a plan, the adjustment shall also reflect the amount of any contributions made after the Top-Heavy Valuation Date that are allocated as of a date in that first plan year. In the case of a defined contribution plan that is subject to Code Section 412, the account balances shall include contributions that would be allocated as of a date not later than the Determination Date, even though those amounts are not yet required to be contributed; furthermore, the adjustment for contributions due but unpaid shall reflect the amount of any contribution actually made (or due to be made) after the Top-Heavy Valuation Date but before the expiration date of the extended payment period in Code Section 412(c)(10).

 

(3) For purposes of (1) and (2) above, the value of account balances and the Present Value of Accrued Benefits shall be determined as of the most recent Top-Heavy Valuation Date that falls within or ends with the twelve month period ending on the Determination Date. The account balances and Accrued Benefits of a Participant who is not a Key Employee but who was a Key Employee in a prior year shall be disregarded. For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2001, the account balances and Accrued Benefits of any Participant who has not performed any service for the Employer at any time during the one (1) year period ending on the Determination Date shall be disregarded. In the case of a defined benefit plan, the Present Value of Accrued Benefits shall not reflect any proportional subsidies and shall reflect any non-proportional subsidies provided by the Plan. The calculations of the Top-Heavy Ratio, and the extent to which distributions, rollovers and transfers are taken into account shall be made in accordance with Code Section 416 and the Regulations thereunder. In the case of unrelated rollovers and transfers: (1) the plan making the distribution or transfer shall count the distribution as part of an accrued benefit distributed; and (2) the plan accepting the rollover or transfer shall not consider the rollover or transfer as part of the accrued benefit if such rollover or transfer was accepted after December 31, 1983, and shall consider the rollover or transfer as part of the accrued benefit if such rollover or transfer was accepted prior to January 1, 1984. In the case of related rollovers and transfers, the plan making the distribution or transfer shall not count the distribution or transfer as part of an accrued benefit distributed, and the plan accepting the rollover or transfer shall count the rollover or transfer as part of the accrued benefit. Deductible employee contributions shall not be taken into account for purposes of computing the Top-Heavy Ratio. When aggregating plans, the value of account balances and Accrued Benefits will be calculated with reference to the Determination Dates that fall within the same calendar year.

 

26
 

 

For purposes of the above, a Participant’s Accrued Benefit in a defined benefit plan shall be determined under a uniform accrual method which applies for all defined benefit plans maintained by the Employer or, if there is no such method, under the method described in Code Section 411(b)(1)(C) which provides the slowest rate of accrual.

 

(m) “Top-Heavy Valuation Date” shall mean the date as of which the Present Value of Accrued Benefits under a defined benefit plan or account balances under a defined contribution plan, which is part of a Permissive Aggregation Group or Required Aggregation Group, is determined for calculating the Top-Heavy Ratio. For a defined benefit plan, such date shall be the same as the actuarial valuation date used for computing plan costs under Code Section 412, regardless of whether an actuarial valuation is performed that year. For a defined contribution plan, such date shall be the last day of the plan year.

 

(n) “Year of Top-Heavy Service” shall mean a Plan Year during which a Participant is not a Key Employee and during which such Participant is credited with a Year of Participation. For this purpose, a Plan Year shall be disregarded to the extent such service occurs during a Plan Year when the Plan benefits (within the meaning of Code Section 410(b)) no Key Employee or former Key Employee.

 

20.03 Top-Heavy Minimum Accrued Benefit: For any Plan Year in which the Plan is Top-Heavy

 

(a) Except as otherwise provided below, the Accrued Benefit of any Participant who is a Non-Key Employee shall not be less than the lesser of:

 

(1) Two percent (2%) of such Participant’s Top-Heavy Average Monthly Compensation multiplied times his Years of Top-Heavy Service; or

 

(2) Twenty percent (20%) of such Participant’s Top-Heavy Average Monthly Compensation.

 

The minimum Accrued Benefit shall be determined without regard to any Social Security contribution by the Employer. This minimum accrual applies even though, under other Plan provisions, the Participant would not otherwise be entitled to receive an accrual, or would have received a lesser accrual for the Plan Year because of:

 

27
 

 

(1) The Participant not being employed on the last day of the Plan Year;

 

(2) The Participant’s failure to make mandatory employee contributions to the Plan;

 

(3) Annual Compensation less than a stated amount; or

 

(4) The Plan being integrated with Social Security.

 

The minimum Accrued Benefit determined above shall be based on payment in the form of a single life annuity with no ancillary benefits. If such Accrued Benefit is payable in any form other than a life annuity, it shall be equal to the Actuarial Equivalent of such life annuity.

 

20.04 Nonforfeitability of Minimum Accrued Benefit

 

The minimum Accrued Benefit required under Section 20.03 (to the extent required to be non-forfeitable under Code Section 416(b)) shall not be forfeited in the case of a suspension of benefits under Code Section 411(a)(3)(B) or a withdrawal of mandatory employee contributions under Code Section 411(a)(3)(D).

 

20.05 Minimum Vesting Provision

 

For any Plan Year in which this Plan is Top-Heavy, the following vesting schedule shall automatically apply to each Participant in the Plan, unless the vesting schedule of Section 8.02 would produce a larger vesting percentage for a Participant, in which case the vesting schedule of Section 8.02 shall apply to such Participant:

 

Years of
Vesting Service
  Vesting
Percentage
 
       
Less than 2     0 %
2 or More     100 %

 

This vesting schedule applies to all Accrued Benefits within the meaning of Code Section 411(a)(7), except those attributable to employee contributions, including benefits accrued before the effective date of Code Section 416 and benefits accrued before the Plan became Top-Heavy. Further, no reduction in vested benefits may occur in the event the Plan’s status as Top-Heavy changes for any Plan Year and any change in the Plan’s vesting schedule due to a change in Top-Heavy status shall be subject to the provision of Section 8.03. However, this Section does not apply to the Accrued Benefit of any Employee who does not have an Hour of Service after the Plan has initially become Top-Heavy; such Employee’s Vested Accrued Benefit shall be determined without regard to this Section.

 

28
 

 

ARTICLE XXI – MISCELLANEOUS

 

21.01 Participant’s Rights

 

This plan shall not be deemed to constitute a contract between the Employer and any Participant or to be a consideration or an inducement for the employment of any Participant or Employee. Nothing contained in this Plan shall be deemed to give any Participant or Employee the right to be retained in the service of the Employer or to interfere with the right of the Employer to discharge any Participant or Employee at any time regardless of the effect which such discharge shall have upon him as a Participant of this Plan.

 

21.02 Alienation

 

Except as specifically provided otherwise herein, no benefit which shall be payable out of the Trust Fund to any person (including a Participant, Former Participant or Beneficiary) shall be subject in any manner to anticipation, alienation, sale, transfer, assignment, pledge, encumbrance, or charge, and any attempt to anticipate, alienate, sell, transfer, assign, pledge, encumber, or charge the same shall be void; and no such benefit shall in any manner be liable for, or subject to, the debts, contracts, liabilities, engagements, or torts of any such person, nor shall it be subject to attachment or legal process for or against such person, and the same shall not be recognized by the Trustee, except to such extent as may be required by law.

 

The preceding paragraph shall apply to the creation, assignment, or recognition of a right to any benefit payable with respect to a Participant, Former Participant or Beneficiary pursuant to a Domestic Relations Order, unless such Domestic Relations Order is determined to be a Qualified Domestic Relations Order. In the event the Plan, the Trustee, or the Plan Administrator receives a Domestic Relations Order, the Plan Administrator shall promptly notify the Participant, Former Participant or Beneficiary whose benefit is the subject of such order and provide him with the Plan’s procedure for determining whether such order is a Qualified Domestic Relations Order. Unless and until said order is set aside, the following provisions shall apply:

 

(a) The Plan Administrator shall within a reasonable time determine whether the order is a Qualified Domestic Relations Order and shall notify the Participant, Former Participant or Beneficiary whose benefit is the subject of such order, of such determination.

 

(b) Until the determination is made as required by Subsection (a), the Trustee shall separate into a separate account in the Plan or in an escrow account the amounts which would have been payable to a person other than as required by this Plan if the Trustee had complied with the order.

 

(c) If, within eighteen (18) months after the receipt of the order by the Trustee or Plan Administrator, the Plan Administrator determines that the order is a Qualified Domestic Relations Order, the Plan Administrator shall direct the Trustee and the Trustee shall pay the segregated amounts plus any other amounts to the Alternative Payee(s) named in such order in accordance with such order.

 

29
 

 

(d) If, within eighteen (18) months after the receipt of the order by the Trustee or Plan Administrator, the Plan Administrator determines that the order is not a Qualified Domestic Relations Order, the Plan Administrator shall direct the Trustee and the Trustee shall disregard the order and pay in accordance with this Plan amounts required hereunder (including segregated amounts and any interest thereon) to the person to whom the payments would have been made if there had been no such order.

 

(e) Notwithstanding Subsections (b), (c) and (d) above, if the Trustee or Plan Administrator was a party to the proceedings which issued the order or is otherwise bound by the order and the Trustee or Plan Administrator is ordered by such order to pay in accordance with said order, the Plan Administrator may after notice to the Participant, Former Participant or Beneficiary, direct the Trustee to and the Trustee shall, upon such direction, pay in accordance with said order unless the Code or ERISA prohibits such payment.

 

(f) If, more than eighteen (18) months after the receipt of the order by the Trustee or Plan Administrator, a determination is made that such order is a Qualified Domestic Relations Order, the Plan Administrator shall direct the Trustee and the Trustee shall pay such amounts to the Alternate Payee(s) named in such order in accordance with such order, but only with respect to amounts which are payable after the date such determination is made.

 

(g) The Plan Administrator shall establish reasonable procedures to determine whether an order received by it or the Trustee is a Qualified Domestic Relations Order and to administer distributions pursuant to said order.

 

(h) Nothing in this Section 21.02 shall be deemed to allow payment to an Alternate Payee under a Qualified Domestic Relations Order before the Annuity Starting Date of the Participant of Former Participant whose benefits are subject to the Qualified Domestic Relations Order unless earlier payment is specifically provided under the terms of the Qualified Domestic Relations Order.

 

In the event a Participant’s benefits are garnished or attached by any court order, other than a Domestic Relations Order, the Plan Administrator may bring an action for a declaratory judgment in a court of competent jurisdiction to determine the proper recipient of the benefits to be paid by the Plan. During the pendency of said action, any benefits that become payable shall be paid into the court as they become payable, to be distributed by the court to the recipient it deems proper at the close of said action.

 

21.03 Actions Consistent with Terms of Plan

 

All actions taken by the Employer, Plan Administrator or Trustee with respect to Trust assets shall be in accordance with the terms of the Plan and Trust.

 

30
 

 

21.04 Performance of Duties

 

All parties to this Plan and Trust, or those claiming any interest hereunder, agree to perform any and all acts and execute any and all documents and papers which are necessary or desirable for carrying out this Plan and Trust or any of its provisions.

 

21.05 Validity of Plan

 

This Plan shall be construed in a way that is consistent with ERISA and regulations thereunder, the Code and regulations thereunder, and, to the extent state law has not been preempted by federal law, the laws of the State in which the Plan Sponsor has its principal office. In case any provision of this Plan shall be held illegal or invalid for any reason, such determination shall not affect the remaining provisions of the Plan; but the Plan shall be construed and enforced as if such provision had never been included therein.

 

21.06 Legal Action

 

In the event any claim, suit, or proceeding is brought regarding the Trust and/or Plan established hereunder to which the Trustee or the Plan Administrator may be a party, and such claim, suit, or proceeding is resolved in favor of the Trustee or Plan Administrator, they shall be entitled to be reimbursed from the Trust Fund for any and all costs, attorney’s fees, and other expenses pertaining thereto incurred by them for which they shall have become liable.

 

21.07 Gender and Number

 

Wherever any words are used herein in the masculine, feminine or neuter gender, they shall be construed as though they were also used in another gender in all cases where they would so apply, and whenever any words are used herein in the singular or plural form, they shall be construed as though they were also used in the other form in all cases where they would so apply.

 

21.08 Uniformity

 

All provisions of this Plan shall be interpreted and applied in a uniform, nondiscriminatory manner.

 

21.09 Headings

 

The headings and subheadings of this Agreement have been inserted for convenience of reference and are to be ignored in any construction of the provisions hereof.

 

21.10 Receipt and Release for Payments

 

Any payment to any Participant, his legal representative, Beneficiary, or to any guardian or committee appointed for such Participant or Beneficiary in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement, shall, to the extent thereof, be in full satisfaction of all claims hereunder against the Trustee and the Employer, either of whom may require such Participant, legal representative, Beneficiary, guardian or committee, as a condition precedent to such payment, to execute a receipt and release thereof in such form as shall be determined by the Trustee or Employer.

 

31
 

 

21.11 Payments of Minors, Incompetents

 

In any event the Plan Administrator must direct a payment from the Plan to or for the benefit of any minor or incompetent Participant or Beneficiary, the Plan Administrator shall direct the Trustee to make such payment according to the written instructions of the legal guardian of such minor or the attorney-in-fact of such incompetent. In the absence of such written instructions, the Plan Administrator, in his sole and absolute discretion, may, but need not, direct the Trustee to make such distribution to any of the following: with respect to a minor, a natural guardian or other relative or adult with whom the minor temporarily or permanently resides; with respect to an incompetent, a court-appointed conservator of the incompetent, a relative or adult with whom the incompetent temporarily or permanently resides, a residential care facility, rest home, sanitarium or similar entity at which the incompetent temporarily or permanently resides, or a person or entity who has been designated by the Social Security Administration as the recipient or custodian for Social Security benefits for the incompetent. Any such guardian, conservator, relative, attorney-in-fact or other person or entity shall have full authority and discretion to expend such distribution for the use and benefit of the minor or incompetent. The receipt of the distribution by such guardian, conservator, relative, attorney-in-fact or other person or entity shall be a complete discharge to the Plan, Plan Administrator and Trustee, without any responsibility on its part or the part of the Plan Administrator or Trustee to see to the application thereof. A Participant or Beneficiary shall be deemed incompetent if he is incapable of properly using, expending, investing or otherwise disposing of the distribution, and a court order or the written opinion of a qualified physician, psychiatrist or psychologist setting forth facts consistent with the standards outlined in this Section is presented to the Plan Administrator.

 

21.12 Missing Persons

 

Notwithstanding any provision in this Plan and Trust to the contrary, if the Plan Administrator is unable to locate any Former Participant who is entitled to benefits under this Plan within three (3) years of the date he becomes entitled to a distribution from the Trust Fund, any amounts being held for his behalf shall be forfeited and used to reduce the Employer’s contributions to the Plan and Trust. The Plan Administrator shall proceed with due diligence in attempting to locate any Former Participant. Provided, however, no forfeiture shall occur until the Plan Administrator has mailed the Former Participant a notice of the benefits and the provisions of this section to his last known address, via U.S. Mail postage prepaid, return receipt requested. And, provided further, if the Former Participant is located subsequent to such forfeiture, the forfeited amount shall be reinstated and the Former Participant shall receive a distribution of his Vested Accrued Benefit in accordance with the provisions of the Plan.

 

21.13 Merger or Consolidation

 

This Plan and Trust may be merged or consolidated with, or its assets or liabilities may be transferred to, any other plan only if the benefits which would be received by each Participant of this Plan, in the event of a termination of the Plan immediately after such merger, consolidation or transfer, are at least equal to the benefits the Participant would have received if the Plan had terminated immediately before the merger, consolidation or transfer. The Trustee possesses the specific authority to enter into agreements with the Trustees of other retirement plans described in Code Section 401(a) to effect a merger or consolidation with such other retirement plan or the direct transfer of Plan assets to or from such other retirement plan.

 

32
 

 

21.14 Prohibition Against Diversion of Funds

 

It shall be impossible by operation of the Plan or of the Trust, by termination of either, by power of revocation or amendment, by the happening of any contingency, by collateral arrangement or by any other means, for any part of the corpus or income of any trust fund maintained pursuant to the Plan or any funds contributed thereto to be used for, or diverted to, purposes other than the exclusive benefit of Participants, Former Participants or their Beneficiaries, except as provided in Sections 17.04 and 21.17.

 

21.15 Period of the Trust

 

If it shall be determined that the applicable State law requires a limitation on the period during which this Trust shall continue, then such Trust shall not continue for a period longer than twenty-one (21) years following the death of the last of those Participants, including future Participants, who are living at the Effective Date hereof. At least one hundred eighty (180) days prior to the end of the twenty-first (21st) year as described in the first sentence of this Section, the Plan Sponsor, the Plan Administrator and the Trustee shall provide for the establishment of a successor Trust and transfer of Plan assets to the Trustee of such successor Trust. If applicable State law places no such limitation, then this Section shall not be operative.

 

21.16 Misstatement of Age

 

If a Participant or Beneficiary misstates or misrepresents his age, date of birth or any other material information to the Employer, Plan Administrator or Trustee, the amount, terms and conditions of any benefits payable from the Plan which are attributable to periods prior to the discovery of such misstatement or misrepresentation shall be limited to the lesser (or more restrictive) of: the amount, terms and conditions determined based on the misstated information; or the amount, terms and conditions determined based on the correct information. The Plan Administrator shall have sole and absolute authority for applying the preceding sentence.

 

21.17 Return of Contributions to the Employer

 

(a) Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if, pursuant to an application filed by or on behalf of the Plan, the Commissioner of Internal Revenue Service or his delegate should determine that the Plan does not initially qualify as a tax-exempt plan and trust under Code Sections 401 and 501, and such determination is not contested, or if contested, is finally upheld, then the Plan shall be void as of the effective date of this Agreement and all amounts contributed to the Plan by the Employer or Employees, plus investment earnings thereon, less expenses paid, shall be returned to the Employer or Employees within one (1) year following the date of such final determination, the Plan shall terminate, and the Trustee shall be discharged from all further obligations.

 

(b) Notwithstanding any provisions to the contrary, any contribution by the Employer to the Trust Fund that is conditioned upon the deductibility of the contribution by the Employer under the Code and, to the extent any such deduction is or would be disallowed, the Employer may within one (1) year following a final determination of the disallowance, whether by agreement within the Internal Revenue Service or by final decision of a court of competent jurisdiction, demand repayment of such disallowed contribution and the Trustee shall return such contribution within one (1) year following the disallowance. Investment earnings attributable to such disallowed amount shall not be returned, but any investment losses attributable thereto shall reduce the amount so returned.

 

33
 

 

(c) Notwithstanding any provisions to the contrary, if any contribution (or portion thereof) by the Employer to the Trust is made as a result of a mistake of fact, the Employer may demand repayment of such mistaken amount and the Trustee shall return such mistaken amount within one (1) year following the time it was made. Investment earnings attributable to such mistaken amount shall not be returned, but any investment losses attributable thereto shall reduce the amount so returned.

 

21.18 Counterparts

 

This Plan and Trust may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which shall be deemed to be an original, and the counterparts shall constitute one and the same instrument.

 

21.19 Limitations Based on Funded Status of the Plan

 

Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, the following provisions shall apply as required by Code Section 436 effective for Plan Years beginning on or after February 1, 2008, except to the extent the exception under Code Section 436(d)(4) applies:

 

(a) In the event the Plan’s adjusted funding target attainment percentage for a Plan Year is less than 60 percent, benefit accruals shall cease during the period benefit accruals are restricted under the provisions of Code Section 436(e). The benefit accruals that were not permitted to accrue pursuant to the application of the provisions of the preceding sentence shall be restored automatically as of the 436 measurement date the limitations under Code Section 436(e) cease to apply, if (i) the continuous period of the limitation is 12 months or less, and (ii) the Plan’s enrolled actuary certifies that the adjusted funding target attainment percentage for the Plan would not be less than 60 percent taking into account the restored benefit accruals for the prior Plan Year.

 

(b) In the event the Plan’s adjusted funding target attainment percentage for a Plan Year falls below the threshold defined under Code Section 436(d)(1) and/or (3), the Funding Agent shall, as directed by the Plan Administrator, cease payment of any prohibited payment during the period specified in, and to the extent necessary to comply with the provisions of Code Section 436(d).

 

(c) In no event shall a prohibited payment be paid during any period the Employer is a debtor in a case under Title 11, United States Code, or similar federal or state law, to the extent necessary to comply with the provisions of Code Section 436(d)(2).

 

(d) In no event shall an amendment that has the effect of increasing liabilities of the Plan by reason of increases in benefits, establishment of new benefits, changing the rate of benefit accrual, or changing the rate at which benefits become nonforfeitable become effective during the period such amendment would violate the provisions of Code Section 436(c).

 

34
 

 

(e) If an optional form of benefit that is otherwise available under the terms of the Plan is not available because of the application of Code Section 436(d)(1) or (2), the Participant or Beneficiary, as applicable, shall be eligible to elect another form of benefit available under the Plan or to defer payment to a later date (to the extent permitted under applicable qualification requirements).

 

(f) If an optional form of benefit that is otherwise available under the terms of the Plan is not available because of the application of Code Section 436(d)(3), a Participant or Beneficiary, as applicable, shall be eligible to defer his entire payment to a later date (to the extent permitted under applicable qualification requirements) or to bifurcate the benefit into unrestricted and restricted portions. If a Participant or Beneficiary elects to bifurcate the benefit, the Participant or Beneficiary shall be eligible to elect, with respect to the unrestricted portion of the benefit, any optional form otherwise available under the Plan with respect to the Participant’s or Beneficiary’s entire benefit and in such a case, if the Participant or Beneficiary elects payment of the unrestricted portion of the benefit in the form of a prohibited payment, the Participant or Beneficiary shall be eligible to elect:

 

(i) to receive payment of the restricted portion of the benefit in any optional form of benefit under the Plan that is not a prohibited payment and that would have been permitted with respect to the Participant’s or Beneficiary’s entire benefit; or

 

(ii) if the Plan Administrator has determined in a consistent and nondiscriminatory manner that a Participant or Beneficiary may defer only the restricted portion of his benefit, to defer commencement of the restricted portion of his benefit until after the restrictions on prohibited payments lapse (to the extent permitted under applicable qualification requirements) and receive said amount in any optional form of payment available under the Plan. Such election shall be subject to any other applicable qualification requirements, shall be treated as a new Annuity Starting Date, and shall be made in accordance with all Plan rules regarding elections of forms of benefit.

 

For purposes of this Section, the terms “adjusted funding target attainment percentage,” “prohibited payment,” “unrestricted portion of the benefit,” and “restricted portion of the benefit” shall have the meanings given under Code Section 436, the regulations thereunder, and any applicable Internal Revenue Service guidance.

 

In the event that the provisions of this Section 21.19 or any part thereof cease to be required by law as a result of subsequent legislation or otherwise, this Section or any applicable part thereof shall be ineffective without the necessity of further amendments to the Plan.

 

35
 

 

21.20 Limitations on Unpredictable Contingent Event Benefit

 

Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, with respect to Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 2008, if a Participant or Beneficiary is entitled to an “unpredictable contingent event benefit” (as defined under Code Section 436(b)) with respect to any event occurring during any Plan Year, such unpredictable contingent event benefit shall not be provided to such Participant or Beneficiary if the Plan’s adjusted funding target attainment percentage (as defined in Section 21.19) for such Plan Year is less than 60 percent or would be less than 60 percent taking into account such occurrence; provided, however, that such unpredictable contingent event benefit shall become payable if and when the Plan meets the exemption under Code Section 436(b)(2).

 

In the event that the provisions of this Section 21.20 or any part thereof cease to be required by law as a result of subsequent legislation or otherwise, this Section or any applicable part thereof shall be ineffective without the necessity of further amendments to the Plan.

 

36
 

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Plan Sponsor has caused this Agreement to be executed by its duly authorized representative, and the Trustees and Plan Administrator have accepted their appointment and affixed their signatures hereto.

 

Executed this _______day of ________________, 20____.

 

PLAN SPONSOR:     IN THE PRESENCE OF:
       
BLONDER-TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.     (WITNESS)
         
By:      
  (Name and Title)      
         
TRUSTEES:      
         
By:        
James Luksch      
         
By:        
Robert Palle      

 

 

 

  

SIXTH AMENDMENT TO REVOLVING CREDIT,

TERM LOAN AND SECURITY AGREEMENT

 

THIS SIXTH AMENDMENT TO REVOLVING CREDIT, TERM LOAN AND SECURITY AGREEMENT (the “Agreement”) is entered into as of March 28, 2014 by and among BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC., a corporation organized under the laws of the State of Delaware (“BTL”), R. L. DRAKE HOLDINGS, LLC, a limited liability company organized under the laws of the State of Delaware (“RL Drake” and collectively with BTL, the “Borrower”), the financial institutions which are now or which hereafter become a party hereto (collectively, the “Lenders” and individually a “Lender”) and SANTANDER BANK, N.A. (formerly known as Sovereign Bank, N.A.) (“Santander”), as agent for Lenders (Santander, in such capacity, the “Agent”).

 

RECITALS

 

Whereas, the Borrower and the Lenders entered into a Revolving Credit, Term Loan and Security Agreement dated August 6, 2008, as amended by that certain First Amendment to Revolving Credit Term Loan and Security Agreement dated January 14, 2011, that certain Second Amendment to Revolving Credit Term Loan and Security Agreement dated February 1, 2012, that certain letter agreement dated August 10, 2012 (constituting the third amendment to the Revolving Credit, Term Loan and Security Agreement), that certain Fourth Amendment to Revolving Credit, Term Loan and Security Agreement dated March 27, 2013 and that certain Fifth Amendment to Revolving Credit, Term Loan and Security Agreement dated November 13, 2013 as the same shall be further amended by this Agreement (as may be further amended, restated, replaced and/or modified from time to time, the “Loan Agreement); and

 

Whereas, the Borrower and the Lenders have agreed to modify the terms of the Loan Agreement as set forth in this Agreement to, among other things, modifying certain financial covenants set forth in the Loan Agreement.

 

Now, therefore, in consideration of the Lender’s continued extension of credit and the agreements contained herein, the parties agree as follows:

 

AGREEMENT

 

1) ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF BALANCE. The Borrower acknowledges that the most recent statement of account sent to the Borrower with respect to the Obligations is correct.

 

2) MODIFICATIONS. The Loan Agreement be and hereby is modified as follows:

 

(A) The following definitions in Section 1.2 of the Loan Agreement are hereby deleted, and are replaced to read as follows:

 

Inventory Sublimit ” shall mean the least of (i) $2,000,000 and (ii) the amount calculated pursuant to Subsection 2.1(a)(y)(i) herein.

 

Maximum Loan Amount ” shall mean $9,350,000 less all repayments of the Term Loan since the Second Amendment Closing Date.

 

Maximum Revolving Advance Amount ” shall mean $5,000,000.

 

Revolving Interest Rate ” shall mean an interest rate per annum equal to (a) the sum of the Index plus one and one quarter of one percent (1.25%) with respect to Domestic Rate Loans and (b) the sum of LIBOR plus four percent (4.00%) with respect to LIBOR Loans.

Term Loan Rate ” shall mean an interest rate per annum equal to (a) the sum of the Index plus one and one half of one percent (1.50%) with respect to Domestic Rate Loans, and (b) the sum of LIBOR plus four and one quarter of one (4.25%) percent with respect to LIBOR Loans.

 

(B) The following definitions are hereby added to Section 1.2 of the Loan Agreement to read as follows:

 

1
 

 

Sixth Amendment ” shall mean that certain Sixth Amendment to Revolving Credit, Term Loan and Security Agreement dated the Sixth Amendment Closing Date by and among the Borrower, the Lenders and the Agent.

 

Sixth Amendment Closing Date ” shall mean as of March 28, 2014.

 

(C) Subsection 2.1(a) of the Loan Agreement is deleted, and is replaced by a new Subsection 2.1(a) to read as follows:

 

(a) Subject to the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement including, without limitation, Section 2.1(b), each Lender, severally and not jointly, will make Revolving Advances to Borrower in aggregate amounts outstanding at any time equal to such Lender’s Commitment Percentage of the lesser of (x) the Maximum Revolving Advance Amount or (y) an amount equal to the sum of:

 

(i) up to 85%, subject to the provisions of Section 2.1(b) hereof, (“ Receivables Advance Rate ”), of Eligible Receivables, plus

 

(ii) up to the lesser of (A) (I) 35% from the Sixth Amendment Closing Date through and including June 26, 2014 and (II) 25% at all times thereafter, subject to the provisions of Section 2.1(b) hereof (“ Inventory Advance Rate ”), of the value of the Eligible Inventory (the Receivables Advance Rate and the Inventory Advance Rate shall be referred to collectively, as the “ Advance Rates ”) or (B) the Inventory Sublimit in the aggregate at any one time, minus

 

(iii) the aggregate amount of outstanding Letters of Credit, minus

 

(iv) such reserves as Agent may reasonably deem proper and necessary from time to time in its Permitted Discretion.

 

The amount derived from the sum of (x) Sections 2.1(a)(y)(i) and (ii) minus (y) Sections 2.1 (a)(y)(iii) and (iv) at any time and from time to time shall be referred to as the “Formula Amount”. The Revolving Advances shall be evidenced by one or more secured promissory notes (collectively, the “ Revolving Credit Note ”) substantially in the form attached hereto as Exhibit 2.1(a) . Within thirty (30) days of the Sixth Amendment Closing Date, Agent will use its reasonable efforts to mark the original Third Amended and Restated Revolving Credit Note, dated November 13, 2013, in the original principal amount of $6,000,000, “CANCELLED” and will return the same to the Borrower.

 

(D) Section 6.5 of the Loan Agreement is deleted, and is replaced by a new Section 6.5 to read as follows:

 

6.5. Financial Covenants .

 

(a) Intentionally Omitted.

 

(b) Balance Sheet Leverage Ratio . Cause to be maintained a Balance Sheet Leverage Ratio, tested quarterly (as of the last day of each fiscal quarter) on a consolidated basis, of not more than 1.25 to 1.00 at all times.

 

(c) Minimum EBITDA . Cause to be achieved EBITDA, tested quarterly (as of the last day of each fiscal quarter) on a consolidated basis, of not less than (i) negative (-) $600,000 as of March 31, 2014 calculated on a trailing three (3) month basis, (ii) negative (-) $400,000 as of June 30, 2014 calculated on a trailing six (6) month basis, (iii) $300,000 as of September 30, 2014 calculated on a trailing nine (9) month basis, and (iv) $700,000 as of December 31, 2014 and for each fiscal quarter thereafter calculated on a trailing twelve (12) month basis.

 

2
 

 

3) CONSULTANT. The Borrower hereby represents and warrants to the Agent that prior to the date hereof the Borrower has retained the services of a consultant acceptable to the Agent in its sole discretion for any purpose required by the Agent including, but not limited to, evaluating the Borrower’s general business strategies, focusing primarily on sales and marketing, at the sole cost and expense of the Borrower.

 

4) REAL ESTATE APPRAISAL. The Borrower hereby acknowledges, agrees and consents to the Agent retaining the services of a real estate appraiser in the sole discretion of the Agent to perform a real estate appraisal with regard to the Mortgaged Premises as soon as reasonably possible hereafter at the sole cost and expense of the Borrower.

 

5) EFFECTIVENESS OF AMENDMENT. All parties hereby acknowledge and agree that the Borrower has not yet provided to the Agent formal calculations of the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio and the minimum EBITDA covenant for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2013 and such calculations (along with all other calculations contemplated under such Section 9.7) are not due until the date that is one hundred five (105) days after December 31, 2013, as set forth in Section 9.7 of the Loan Agreement (the “December 2013 Annual Financial Due Date”). The parties further acknowledge and agree that (i) this Agreement waives the requirements that the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio for the trailing twelve month period ended as of the last day of the fiscal year ended December 31, 2013 and the minimum EBITDA covenant for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2013 be tested, (ii) the date of this Agreement is prior to the December 2013 Annual Financial Due Date, (iii) the calculations of the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio for the trailing twelve month period ended as of the last day of the fiscal year ended December 31, 2013 and the minimum EBITDA covenant for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2013 are not yet due as of the date hereof, (iv) the Borrower is not obligated to and will not provide such calculations to the Agent, and (v) as of December 31, 2013 and thereafter through and including the date hereof, Borrower remains in compliance with Section 6.5 of the Loan Agreement.

 

6) ACKNOWLEDGMENTS. The Borrower acknowledges and represents that:

 

(A) the Loan Agreement and Other Documents, as amended hereby, are in full force and effect without any defense, claim, counterclaim, right or claim of set-off;

 

(B) to the best of its knowledge, no default by the Agent or the Lenders in the performance of their duties under the Loan Agreement or the Other Documents has occurred;

 

(C) all representations and warranties of the Borrower contained herein and in the Other Documents are true and correct in all material respects as of this date, except for any representation or warranty that specifically refers to an earlier date;

 

(D) the Borrower has taken all necessary action to authorize the execution and delivery of this Agreement; and

 

(E) this Agreement is a modification of an existing obligation and is not a novation.

 

7) PRECONDITIONS . As a precondition to the effectiveness of any of the modifications, consents, or waivers contained herein, the Borrower agrees to:

 

(A) provide the Agent with this Agreement and the Fourth Amended and Restated Revolving Credit Note, each properly executed;

 

(B) provide the Agent with secretary’s certificates and resolutions, in form and substance acceptable to the Agent, which approves the modification contemplated hereby;

 

(C) pay to the Agent an amendment fee in the amount of $45,000; and

 

(D) pay, promptly upon presentation of an invoice therefor, all other fees and costs incurred by the Lenders in entering into this Agreement, including, but not limited to, all reasonable legal fees incurred by the Agent.

 

3
 

 

8) MISCELLANEOUS. This Agreement shall be construed in accordance with and governed by the laws of the State of New Jersey, without reference to that state’s conflicts of law principles. This Agreement and the Other Documents constitute the sole agreement of the parties with respect to the subject matter thereof and supersede all oral negotiations and prior writings with respect to the subject matter thereof. No amendment of this Agreement, and no waiver of any one or more of the provisions hereof shall be effective unless set forth in writing and signed by the parties hereto. The illegality, unenforceability or inconsistency of any provision of this Agreement shall not in any way affect or impair the legality, enforceability or consistency of the remaining provisions of this Agreement or the Other Documents. This Agreement and the Other Documents are intended to be consistent. However, in the event of any inconsistencies among this Agreement and any of the Other Documents, the terms of this Agreement, then the Loan Agreement, shall control. This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts and by the different parties on separate counterparts. Each such counterpart shall be deemed an original, but all such counterparts shall together constitute one and the same agreement.

 

9) DEFINITIONS. The terms used herein and not otherwise defined or modified herein shall have the meanings ascribed to them in the Loan Agreement. The terms used herein and not otherwise defined or modified herein or defined in the Loan Agreement shall have the meanings ascribed to them by the Uniform Commercial Code as enacted in New Jersey.

 

4
 

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned have signed and sealed this Agreement the day and year first above written.

 

ATTEST:   BLONDER TONGUE LABORATORIES, INC.  
       
       
By:____________________________   By:___________________________________  
Name:  ERIC SKOLNIK   Name:  JAMES A. LUKSCH  
Title:   Assistant Secretary   Title:    Chief Executive Officer  
       
       
WITNESS:   R. L. DRAKE HOLDINGS, LLC  
       
       
By:____________________________   By:___________________________________  
Name:  ERIC SKOLNIK   Name:  JAMES A. LUKSCH  
Title:    Secretary   Title:    Chief Executive Officer  
       
       
       
    SANTANDER BANK, N.A.,  
    (formerly known as Sovereign Bank),  
    as Lender and as Agent  
       
       
    By:___________________________________  
    Name:  GREGORY R. RUSSANO  
    Title:  Senior Vice President  
       

 

5

 

 

 

 

EXHIBIT 21

 

List of Subsidiaries of Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc.

 

1. Blonder Tongue Far East, LLC

 

2. R. L. Drake Holdings, LLC

  

 

 

EXHIBIT 23.1

 

INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC

ACCOUNTING FIRM’S CONSENT

 

Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc.

Old Bridge, New Jersey

 

We consent to the incorporation by reference in the Registration Statements of Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. on Form S-8 (File Nos. 333-15039, 333-52519, 333-37670, 333-96993, 333-111367, 333-126064, 333-150755 and 333-174303) of our report dated March 31, 2014 with respect to our audits of the consolidated financial statements of Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. as of December 31, 2013 and 2012 and for the years then ended appearing in this Annual Report on Form 10-K of Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. for the year ended December 31, 2013.

 

/s/ Marcum LLP

 

Marcum LLP

New York, NY

March 31, 2014

 

 

 

EXHIBIT 31.1

CERTIFICATION

 

I, James A. Luksch, Chief Executive Officer of Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc., certify that:

 

1.         I have reviewed this Annual Report on Form 10-K of Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc.;

 

2.         Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

3.         Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

4.        The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:

 

a)        Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

b)        Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

c)        Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant's disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

d)        Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

5.         The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant's auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

a)        All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

b)        Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

Date: March 31, 2014

 

  /s/ James A. Luksch
  James A. Luksch
  Chief Executive Officer
  (Principal Executive Officer)

 

 

 

EXHIBIT 31.2

 

CERTIFICATION

 

I, Eric Skolnik, Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc., certify that:

 

1.         I have reviewed this Annual Report on Form 10-K of Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc.;

 

2.        Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

3.        Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

  

4.        The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:

 

a)         Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

b)        Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

c)         Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant's disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

d)         Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

5.         The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant's auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

a)         All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

b)         Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

Date: March 31, 2014

 

  /s/ Eric Skolnik
  Eric Skolnik
  Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer
  (Principal Financial Officer)

 

 

 

EXHIBIT 32.1

CERTIFICATION pursuant to

 

section 906 of the sarbanes-oxley act of 2002

 

To the knowledge of each of the undersigned, this Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2013 complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and the information contained in this Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. for the applicable reporting period.

 

Date: March 31, 2014 By: /s/ James A. Luksch
    James A. Luksch, Chief Executive Officer
  By: /s/ Eric Skolnik
    Eric Skolnik, Chief Financial Officer